Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 369

CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

JUNE 2014









CIVIL /ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

OVER ALL INDEX

Division 01 00 00 - General Requirements
- 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule
- 01 32 33 - Photographic Documentation
- 01 35 29 - Health, Safety, and Emergency
Response Procedures
- 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities
- 01 57 19 - Construction Environment Management
Plan
- 01 74 00 - Cleaning & Waste Management
- 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements

Division 02 00 00 - Existing Conditions
- 02 32 00 - Geo Technical Investigation

Division 03 00 00 - Concrete
- 03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
- 03 15 00 - Concrete Accessories
- 03 21 00 - Reinforcement
- 03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete
- 03 30 50 - Concrete for Water retaining Structures
- 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing
- 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete
- 03 45 00 - Precast Architectural Concrete

Division 04 00 00 - Masonry
- 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry

Division 05 00 00 - Metals
- 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications

Division 06 00 00 - Wood, Plastic and Composites
- 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
- 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
- 06 41 16 - Plastic Laminated Architectural cabinets
- 06 61 16 - Solid Surfacing Fabrications

Division 07 00 00 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
- 07 10 00 - Water proofing/Thermal Insulation
- 07 10 50 - Underground Water Tank GRP Lining
- 07 84 00 - Fire stopping
- 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants



INDEX CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2




Division 08 00 00 - Openings
- 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames
- 08 11 16 - Aluminium Doors and Frames
- 08 14 00 - Wood doors
- 08 32 13 - Automatic sliding doors
- 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows
- 08 62 13 - Domed Unit Skylights
- 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
- 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing

Division 09 00 00 - Finishes
- 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
- 09 24 00 - Cement Plastering
- 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tiling
- 09 30 33 - Stone Tiling
- 09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings
- 09 66 16 - Terrazzo Tiles
- 09 68 16 - Sheet carpeting
- 09 90 00 - Painting
- 09 96 00 - High Performance coating

Division 10 00 00 - Specialties
- 10 14 00 - S i gn ag e
- 10 14 53 - Traffic signage
- 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories

Division 13 00 00 - Special Construction
- 13 31 23 - Tensioned Fabric Structures

Division 31 00 00 - Earth Work
- 31 23 16 - Excavation
- 31 23 23.13 - Backfill
- 31 31 16 - Termite control


Division 32 00 00 - Site Construction

- 32 14 13.13 - Interlocking Precast Concrete Unit
Paving
- 32 17 23 - Pavement Marking



















CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 01 00 00 - General Requirements

- 01 32 16 - Construction Progress Schedule
- 01 32 33 - Photographic Documentation
- 01 35 29 - Health, Safety, and Emergency Response
Procedures
- 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities
01 57 19 Construction Environment Management Plan
- 01 74 00 - Cleaning & Waste Management
01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements














































DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE



1. Section Includes

A. Measurement And Payment
B. General
C. Scheduling format.
D. Submittals
E. Four-week plan
F. Monthly progress status report. G. Review,
updates, and revisions.



2. Measurement And Payment

A. Separate measurement or payment will not be made for work required under this Section.
All costs in connection with the work specified herein will be considered to include with the
related item of work in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form, or incidental to the Work.


3. General

A. Progress schedules shall represent a practical plan to complete the Work within the
Contract time(s) of completion indicated, and shall convey the Contractor's intent in the
manner of prosecution and progress of the Work.

B. The scheduling and execution of construction in accordance with the Contract Documents
are the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall involve and coordinate all
Subcontractors and material Suppliers in the development and updating of progress
schedules.

C. The submittal of progress schedules shall be understood to be the Contractor's
representation that the progress schedule meets the requirements of the Contract
Documents and that the Work will be executed in the sequence and duration indicated in the
progress schedule.

4. Scheduling Format

A. The Project Schedule shall be computer produced in the Critical Path Method (CPM)
format. The schedule shall be computer produced utilizing project scheduling software such as
Primavera, Microsoft Project or other equivalent software as approved by the CLIENT.











B. The Project Schedule shall be updated monthly and submitted as indicated in Article 1.05,
Submittals.

C. The schedule shall show Contract tasks, percent complete, progress bars, baseline
schedules, milestones, start and finish dates, and other breakdowns as required by the
CLIENT.. The schedules shall show clearly the sequence of activities and shall list specifically
the following activities:

1. Interim milestone completion dates. Phasing and staging of the Work as specified
shall be prominently identified.

2. Submittals and the Architect's review of submittals.

3. District inspection of the Work, including Preliminary Final Inspection, Final
Inspection, punch list(s), and Acceptance.

4. Acquisition of permits.

5. Any long lead time (over 60 days) orders for material and equipment.

6. Work to be performed by other contractors or agencies.

7. Delivery of District-furnished equipment and materials indicated for incorporation
in the Work.

D. Descriptions of scheduled activities shall include sufficient detail to identify the work that is
to be accomplished.

1. The schedule shall contain sufficient activities to clearly show the sequence and
interdependencies of the Work. The schedule shall be prepared in such a way that
an activity or group of activities will correspond directly with the bid item
breakdown and/or the breakdown of lump sum bid items. The CLIENT may request
that additional activities be added.

2. Activity durations shall be expressed in whole days. Work that is to be performed
by Subcontract shall be clearly defined.

3. Float suppression techniques, such as preferential sequencing (crew movement,
equipment use, and form reuse), extended duration, imposed dates, scheduling of
work not required for the Contract, and others, shall not be used to affect or limit
float in the schedule. The use of constraint dates should be minimized, and must be
approved by the CLIENT..

4. Critical Path activities are those activities with a total float equal to or less than
zero. Schedules with negative total float may be found to be impractical by the
CLIENT.

E. A schedule showing that Work that is completed in less than the completion time specified
may be found to be impractical by the CLIENT.

F. A schedule showing that Work that is completed in less than the completion time specified,
that is found to be practical by the CLIENT shall be considered to have float. The float shall be







the time between the scheduled completion of the Work and the Contract completion date.
Float time shall not be for the exclusive benefit of either the District or the Contractor. Float
shall be a resource available to both parties.

G. A schedule found to be impractical for the preceding reasons or any other reasons shall be
revised by the Contractor and resubmitted.


5. Submittals





A. 1Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures, for submittal requirements and
procedures.

B. Schedules shall be submitted in time-scaled bar-chart (Gantt) format with logic lines shown
on sheets no smaller than 22 inches wide by 34 inches long or larger than 34 inches wide
by 44 inches long. A time-scaled logic network diagram may also be required by the
CLIENT. An activity report in a tabular form showing the following information shall be
submitted with bar-chart: activity ID, description, duration, total float, early start, early finish,
late start, late finish, predecessors, successors, constrains, percent complete, and remaining
duration.

C. All schedule submittals shall include one reproducible and six full-size copies.

D. Schedule submittals will be reviewed by the CLIENT. and shall be updated and revised as
indicated in Article 1.08, Review, Updates, and Revisions. Re submittal shall conform to the
same requirements as original submittals.

E. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all schedules and schedule analysis reports in
electronic format as well as hard copies.

F. All progress schedule submittals are subject to review and approval by the Architect. The
Architect retains the right to withhold progress payments until the Contractor submits an
acceptable progress schedule and progress schedule updates.

G. The Contractor shall submit the schedule within 14 days after the date of the Notice to
Proceed or as mentioned by the condition of contract.

H. The first of each type of schedule and the first Progress Status Report submitted by the
Contractor will be reviewed for format, as well as content. The CLIENT may request format
changes. Once the format has been approved, all subsequent Schedules and Progress
Status Reports shall be submitted in the approved format.


6. Four-Week Work Plan

A. A schedule in calendar time-scaled bar chart format depicting the Contractor's intended
work activities for the upcoming four-week period shall be submitted on a weekly basis and
shall be due on the first working day of each week. Each activity of one day or more in
duration shall be indicated.

B. Any deviations, such as sequences of work, timing, and durations of activities from the
approved Project Schedule, shall be noted and explained in writing.








C. The Four-Week Work Plan shall be submitted on sheets not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11
inches, or as approved by the CLIENT.


7. Monthly Progress Status Report

A. The Monthly Progress Status Report shall be a narrative report that describes work
activities accomplished in the reporting period, intended work activities for the upcoming
reporting period, problems and actions intended by the Contractor to mitigate the problems,
work that is being performed out of sequence with approved schedules, status of Change
Orders, Notices of Potential Claims, status of submittals, and status of Contractor
procurement items.

B. The Contractor shall submit the report format and obtain the CLIENT's approval of the format.

C. The Monthly Progress Status Report shall be submitted neither monthly on sheets no larger
than 11 inches by 17 inches, nor any smaller than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches.


8. Review, Updates, and Revisions

A. The CLIENT will review and return the Contractor's schedule submittals with written
comments according to the following schedule from the date of receipt.

Project CPM Schedule: 10 calendar days

Four-Week Work Plan: 5 calendar days

B. The Contractor shall make all corrections to the Project Schedule requested by the CLIENT
and resubmit the schedule for approval. If the Contractor does not agree with the CLIENT's
comments, the Contractor shall provide written notice of disagreement within five days from
the receipt of the Architect's comments. The Architect's comments on the Four-Week Work
Plan for which the Contractor disagrees shall be resolved in a meeting held for that
purpose, if necessary.

C. At least once each month, or as often as deemed necessary by the Architect, the
Contractor shall submit an updated schedule showing the progress of the Work to date and
anticipated activities to be worked on, and the Monthly Progress Status Report as specified
in Article 1.07. The submittal of the Project Schedule update and Monthly Progress Status
Report shall be at least five days prior to the submittal of a payment invoice. No invoice will
be accepted nor payment made if there is not an approved current update in place.

D. If, according to the approved Project Schedule, the Contractor is thirty or more days behind
the Contract completion date of any milestone indicated, or the schedule contains 30 or
more days of negative float, considering all approved time extensions, the Contractor shall
submit a revised schedule, showing a practical plan to complete the Work within the
specified Contract completion time. The District may withhold progress payments until a
revised schedule, acceptable to the CLIENT, is submitted by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION









DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION



1. Section Includes

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Measurement And Payment
Stages of construction.
Quality and quantity of photographs.
Identification of photographs.
Disputes, and potential claims.


2. Measurement and Payment

A. Separate measurement or payment will not be made for work required under this Section.
All costs in connection with the work specified herein will be considered to be included with
the related item of work in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form, Drawings or incidental to the
Work.


3. Stages of Construction

A. The Contractor shall take photographs at all construction milestones and at each of the
following stages of construction:

1. Before commencement of clearing and demolition;

2. Upon completion of clearing and demolition;

3. Monthly during performance of the Work; and

4. Upon completion of the Work.

5. Anytime a problem arises that may result in a Notice of Potential Claim and the
problem can be illustrated by photographs.

B. Furnish at least three different views or vantage points of each milestone and stage of
construction.


4. Quality And Quantity of Photographs

A. All photographs shall be standard commercial quality, colour prints, on single weight
glossy paper.

B. Photographs shall be 5 by 7 inches in size.








C. Digital photographs stored on CD-ROM or DVD may be substituted for standard
photographs addressed above. Digital photographs shall be in pdf, jpg, or tif format.


5.












6.


Identification of Photographs

A. The following information shall be typed on the back of each print furnished and furnished
for each digital photograph in a manner approved by the CLIENT.

1. Title of Contract and Contract Number;

2. Identification of subject shown;

3. Time and date taken.


Disputes and Potential Claims:

A. In the event a problem arises or dispute occurs which may result in a Notice of Potential
Claim under the General Conditions and the problem or dispute can be illustrated by
photographs and video recordings, the Contractor shall provide such photographs and
video cassettes.


END OF SECTION



































DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 35 29 - HEALTH, SAFETY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE PROCEDURES



1. Section Includes

A. Measurement And Payment
B. Submittals
C. Contractor's safety program. D.
First aid.
E. Emergencies and emergency procedures. F.
Protecting the general public.
G. Specific requirements
H. Inspections by outside agencies.
I. Inspections by the District.
J. Work performed near existing operating right-of-way
K. Hazardous materials encountered during construction.


2. Measurement and Payment

A. Separate measurement or payment will not be made for work required under this Section.
All costs in connection with the work specified herein will be considered to be included with
the related item of work in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form, Drawings or incidental to the
Work.


3. Submittals

A. Within 5 days of Execution of Contract:

1.

Submit for review and approval, the Contractor's proposed Safety
representatives resume identifying his or her work experience and qualifications.
The minimum qualifications shall be five years of diversified construction safety
experience, and two years experience related to the Contract's scope of work.
The Contractor shall have received the CLIENT's approval of the Contractor's
proposed Safety Representative prior to submitting the first monthly progress
payment.

B. Within 7 days of Notice to Proceed:

1. Submit two copies of the Contractor's Safety Program for review and approval.
The Contractor shall have received the CLIENT's approval of the Contractor's
proposed Safety Program prior to submitting the first monthly progress payment.










4. Contractor's Safety Program

A. The Contractor's Safety Program shall incorporate the Contractor's safety practices
and procedures, as well as the requirements described herein including the following:

1. A disciplinary program.

2. A policy that prohibits rough or boisterous play and activity, gambling, the use of
alcohol or drugs, and the possession of weapons on the construction site.

5. First Aid




A. The Contractor shall provide emergency medical services including American Red
Cross certified First Aid Representative(s) on the jobsite and an appropriate area
designated for first aid to treat injured employees. First Aid Representatives shall be
CPR certified.

B. Employees shall receive prompt first aid care when injured.


6. Emergencies and Emergency Procedures

A. Develop Emergency Procedures for any event that may occur for the following
categories:

1.

2.

3.


4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Fire;

Employee injury;

Property damage and damage to various utilities (such as, electrical, gas,
sewage, water, telephone or public roadways);

Public demonstrations;

Bomb threats;

Hazardous materials encountered;

Toxic spills;

Explosions; and

Vehicular accidents.

B. The Emergency Procedures shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Identification of the person responsible for handling an emergency. 2.
Establishment of teams for handling each type of emergency.









3. Identification of the person responsible for making emergency call (preferably the
ranking Supervisor present).

4. 2The requirement to conspicuously post a list of an emergency phone numbers,
along with information to be transmitted.

C. Update the Emergency Procedures when necessary.

D. Provide to the CLIENT copies of the above Emergency Procedures.

E. Contact the CLIENT immediately in the event a serious accident should occur.

F. Following an emergency, the Contractor shall:

1. Secure the area as expediently as possible; and

2. Provide only those authorized representatives of the District and specific
governmental agencies an account of the nature of the emergency. Questions
from media personnel shall be referred to the CLIENT.

G. Whenever the Contractor requires emergency services, such as ambulance, Fire
Department or Police, the Contractor shall use the posted emergency numbers and
also contact a District representative.

7. Protecting the General Public

A. The Contractor shall take the necessary steps to prevent injury to the general public
or damage to public property. The public shall be considered as any persons not
employed by the Contractor or its Subcontractors. The Contractor shall adhere to the
following requirements:

1.


2.



3.

Work shall be performed outside of the designated work area only when
specifically stated in writing from the CLIENT.

Necessary steps shall be taken to protect and maintain work areas that interface
with public sidewalks, station entrances (lobbies, corridors and aisles), stairways,
escalators, elevators, and station platforms.

All travel ways, access and egress points shall be maintained and clear of
obstructions at all times.

4. Warning signs shall be conspicuously positioned and a flag person shall be assigned
when the Contractor's equipment may be encountered by pedestrians or vehicles.

8. Specific Requirements

A. Work Areas: The Contractor shall provide a safe work area for its employees. When
unsafe conditions do exist, immediate abatement is required.

B. Work Practices: The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that its employees
work safely and use the appropriate personal protective equipment.








C. Weekly "Tool Box" Meetings:

1.











2.

The Contractor shall conduct weekly "tool box" meetings (15 minutes minimum)
for all employees. The purpose of these weekly meetings is to:

a. Discuss observed accident trends and causes.

b. Plan safety into the work activities.

c. Take action to correct workers' safety concerns.

d. Review emergency procedures with employees.

These meetings shall be documented and such documentation forwarded to the
CLIENT within one week of the meeting.

D. Accident and Incident Reports: Provide CLIENT with copies of all accident and incident
reports within 24 hour of occurrence.

E. Cal/OSHA Permit and Registration Requirements:

1.

Submit copies of permits from the California Division of Occupational Safety for
the following:

a. Erection or demolition of any building, false work, scaffolding, or structure
the equivalent of three stories or higher.

b. Performing any work related to hazardous materials.

F. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): The Contractor's personnel, without exception,
are required to wear certain PPE. Among these are:

2.

3.

4.


5.



6.


7.

8.

Hard hats and orange safety vests - mandatory.

Hearing protection - mandatory in all operations creating noise above 80dBA.

Eye protection - mandatory when performing tasks producing flying debris or
when handling any chemicals.

Safety harness - meeting ANSI A10.14 and shall be worn and used when
exposed to any fall of 4 feet or more in height, where the height cannot be
properly guarded with rails or other means.

Shoes - made of leather (if tunnelling is performed, shoes shall be made of
rubber with steel toes).

Shirts - only those with sleeves allowed; no tank tops or mesh shirts are allowed.

Respiratory protection - when required by law.











9.


Inspections by Outside Agencies

A. The Contractor shall be subject to inspections by outside agencies, including
Cal/OSHA. The Contractor shall notify the CLIENT immediately should citations,
warnings or safety violations be issued. Copies of same shall be provided to the
CLIENT within 48 hours.


10. Inspections by the District

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with designated District representatives when
conducting site inspections.

B. The District may periodically make quality assurance audits of the Contractor's Safety
Program.

11. Work Performed Near Existing Operating Right-Of-Way

A. For any construction equipment (such as cranes, concrete pump trucks, back hoes,
and the like) that could encroach into the District's operating right-of-way, the
Contractor shall submit, and obtain approval by the CLIENT, a plan describing the use
of such equipment, and the necessary precautions to be taken to preclude any
accidental encroachment of the right-of-way.

12. Hazardous Materials Encountered During Construction

A. If unidentified contaminated materials are encountered during construction or an
accident results in the release of hazardous materials, work shall be stopped and the
area evacuated and secured. The Contractor shall immediately notify the CLIENT. If
necessary, the Contractor shall take precautions to limit the contamination to the
jobsite.

END OF SECTION



























DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 52 00 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES


1. Section Includes

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.


Measurement And Payment
Governing Laws
Temporary sanitary facilities.
Engineer's field office.
Contractor's field office.
Storage and parking areas.
Enclosed storage and shops.
Protective barricades and safety precautions.
Temporary fencing. Security.
Close -out


2. Measurement and Payment

A. Separate measurement or payment will not be made for work required under this Section.
All costs in connection with the work specified herein will be considered to be included with
the related item of work in the Bid Schedule of the Bid Form, Drawings or incidental to the
Work.

3. Governing Laws

A. Temporary facilities shall be in compliance with applicable federal, state, county, municipal
and local utility laws, rules, and regulations. Nothing in these Contract Documents shall be
construed to permit work not conforming to such codes and regulations.


4. Temporary Sanitary Facilities

A. Provide adequate temporary toilet conveniences, washing facilities, and drinking water for
the use of all employees and persons engaged on or about the Work, including
Subcontractors and their employees. Drinking water shall be potable, and drinking water
facilities shall be clean and sanitary.

B. Locate sanitary facilities where approved by authorities having jurisdiction and maintain in
a clean and sanitary condition during the course of the Work. Keep such facilities
adequately supplied with toilet paper, paper towelling, paper cups, and related supplies as
required.









C. At completion of the Work, sanitary facilities shall be properly disinfected and all evidence
of same removed from the site.


5. Engineer's Field Office

A. Requirements:

1.







2.




3.

Provide mobile units or temporary buildings, with water, sanitary facilities,
electrical power, and parking facilities, hereinafter called the "Engineer's field
office," for use of the Engineer and District representatives in administering the
Contract. The Engineer's field office shall be situated in the work area at a
location approved by the Engineer, adjacent to the Contractor's field office. The
Engineers field office shall be completely furnished and ready for occupancy by
the District within 30 days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed.

The Engineer's field office shall be maintained and serviced by the Contractor, as
herein specified, until the final invoice has been submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the District, as set forth in General Conditions. The Contractor shall
then remove or dispose of the field office off the site at Contractor's expense.

Mobile units shall have all the features specified herein. If the Contractor elects to
provide a building or buildings in lieu of mobile units, the buildings shall conform
to local building codes and shall have the basic features specified herein, with
substitute materials allowable subject to approval of the Engineer.

B. Construction and Materials: Obtain and pay all costs for hauling, building, and connection
permits. The field office shall be substantially constructed to provide office space for the
construction time period specified in the Contract Specifications. All materials shall be
good commercial quality. The amount of space (square feet) required for the Engineer's
field office is specified in the Contract Specifications. As a minimum, provide the following
features and facilities:

1.



2.


3.


4.






5.

Exterior and interior surfaces, other than factory finished, painted with two coats
of an approved paint of a colour or colours approved by the Engineer. No
painting will be required on aluminium or stainless steel surfaces.

Interior walls and ceilings panelled with finished plywood or gypsum wallboard of
not less than one-half inch thickness, or other suitable material.

Floors covered with resilient flooring material such as vinyl composition tile or
sheet vinyl flooring. Floors shall be constructed to withstand a live load of 50 psf.

Two rest rooms minimum, each with lavatory, water closet, mirror, soap holder,
toilet paper holder, and paper towel dispenser. Provide one rest room (men's)
with urinal. Both rest rooms shall comply with State and Federal accessibility
requirements. Water supply may be from a self-contained water storage tank,
and water closets may be self-contained, flushing chemical units. Lavatory,
urinal, and water closet waste may drain into a self-contained holding tank.

Entrance doors shall comply with applicable State and Federal accessibility
requirements.









6.


7.


8.


9.

10.


11.



Lighting of 100 foot-candles minimum at desk height uniformly in all areas except
rest rooms. Provide rest rooms with adequate lighting.

Duplex electrical receptacles around interior walls at an approximate spacing of
10 feet on centre.

An electric drinking fountain for furnishing cool water. Water supply for drinking
fountain may be bottled drinking water.

An automatically controlled heating/cooling system.

Water, sewer, telephone and facsimile (FAX) service (separate telephone lines),
and electrical utility connections as required.

Adequate access from public streets shall be provided to the field office, together
with parking spaces as specified in the Contract Specifications. Include spaces
for handicapped parking stalls as specified in the Contract Specifications. The
access roadway and parking area shall be graded for drainage and surfaced with
temporary concrete or asphalt pavement in an approved manner.

C. Furnishings and Equipment: Provide furnishings, equipment, and appliances as specified
in the Contract Specifications.

D. Services: Provide maintenance, utility, and janitorial services throughout the specified
period as follows:

1.

2.






3.


4.

Repair and daily cleaning of the field office, parking, and access area.

The furnishing of drinking water, paper cups and towels, toilet paper, light bulbs,
and such other basic necessities required for the operation and maintenance of
the field office. For mobile units with holding tanks, provide periodic removal of
waste material and cleaning of holding tank as required. Provide self-contained
water storage tank with fresh, potable water as required. Refill when tank is down to
1/4 full.

Provide security measures and area protection equivalent to that used by the
Contractor for the Contractor's jobsite shop and field office facilities.

Provide services for utilities indicated in Article 1.05.B.10, including monthly
charges, account fees, service charges, connection fees and deposits.
Telephone service shall include long distance costs.

6. Contractor's Field Office

A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, in good condition, on the site or near the site
as approved by the Engineer, a temporary field office of suitable size for construction
administrative operations and consultations with representatives of the District.

B. The Contractor's field office shall contain a complete set of Contract Documents.







C. The Contractor shall make arrangements and pay all costs, including service and toll
charges, until Substantial Completion of the Work, for temporary telephone service in the
temporary field office, for use by the Contractor and Subcontractors, for purposes related
to the Work.


7. Storage and Parking Areas

A. The Contract Drawings may indicate work areas available to the Contractor for storage of
materials and for parking of construction equipment. If so indicated, these areas will be
provided to the Contractor for the durations indicated in the Contract Specifications.
Additional work and storage space, if required, shall be provided by the Contractor at
Contractor's expense.

B. The Contractor shall provide parking facilities for the Contractor's personnel,
Subcontractors, supplier's delivery vehicles, and authorized visitors. Off-site parking
facilities (if any) shall not impair or interfere with existing community parking and traffic
conditions, regulations, and restrictions.


8. Enclosed Storage and Shops

A. The Contractor shall provide all temporary storage and shop rooms that may be required
at the jobsite for safe and proper storage of tools, materials, and equipment. Construct
such rooms only in locations indicated or as approved by the Architect, and so as not to
interfere with the proper installation and completion of other work.

B. Remove such rooms within three days of receipt of notices from the Architect that removal
is necessary, and incur all expenses for such removal.

C. Storage of gasoline or similar fuels shall conform to regulations and local fire department
regulations and shall be confined within definite boundaries apart from buildings as
approved by the Architect and the jurisdictional fire marshal.

9. Protective Barricades and Safety Precautions

A. Construct and maintain barricades, lights, shoring, and warning signs as required by
Federal and State safety ordinances and as required to protect the District's property from
injury or loss and as necessary for the protection of the public and adjacent properties.
Provide walks around obstructions made in a public place for prosecuting the Work. Leave
all protection in place and maintain until removal is authorized.

B. Guard and protect all workers, pedestrians, and the public from excavations, construction
equipment, obstructions, and other dangers with adequate railings, guard rails, temporary
walks, barricades, warning signs, directional signs, overhead protection, planking,
decking, danger lights, and other suitable safeguards.

C. Flaggers shall be provided to direct or divert pedestrian or vehicular traffic when
necessary as specified in Section 01 57 00 - Temporary Controls.

D. Additional safety requirements are specified in Section 01 35 24 - Construction Safety.






10. Temporary Fencing

A. The Contractor shall furnish, construct, maintain, and later remove temporary fencing
around the jobsite perimeter as indicated.

B. Except as otherwise specified herein, temporary fencing shall conform to Specifications
Section 32 31 13 - Chain Link Fences and Gates.

C. Used materials may be employed for temporary fencing, provided such used materials are
good, sound, and are suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Fencing materials may be commercial quality, provided the dimensions and sizes of said
materials are equal to, or greater than, the dimensions and sizes indicated in
Specifications Section 32 31 13 - Chain Link Fences and Gates. Additional fencing options
include the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Posts may be either metal or wood.

Galvanizing and painting of steel items will not be required.

Treating wood with wood preservatives will not be required.

Concrete footings for metal posts will not be required, except where portable
footings are required for temporary anchorage of posts.

E. Temporary fencing that is damaged from any cause during the progress of the Work shall
be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the District.

F. When no longer required for the Work, temporary fencing shall be removed. Removed
fencing and related materials shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the jobsite, except as otherwise provided herein.




11. Security

G. Holes caused by the removal of temporary fences shall be properly filled to match
adjacent surfaces.



A. The Contractor shall provide for security of the Work and the jobsite until final inspection
and Acceptance of the Work. Storage areas shall be suitably fenced and lighted and
routinely patrolled by security guards.

B. The District assumes no responsibility for protection of structures and finished work or for
loss of materials and equipment from the time that Contract operations have commenced
until Acceptance of the Work.

C. If watchman service is deemed necessary by the Contractor, such protection shall be
provided by the Contractor, and all costs therefore shall be paid for by the Contractor.











D. Damaged, lost, or stolen materials and equipment, whether or not stored or already
installed, shall be replaced by the Contractor with new specified materials and equipment,
including reinstallation where applicable, at no additional cost to the District.

12. Close-out

A. Upon completion of the Work, or prior thereto when required by the Engineer, remove
temporary facilities' structures and installations from the District's property.

B. Return exterior areas utilized for temporary facilities to their original, natural state or, when
called for on the Contract Documents, complete such areas as indicated.



END OF SECTION












































DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 57 19 - CONSTRUCTION ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN



PART 1 - GENERAL


1 .1


DESCRIPTION

A. This section specifies the control of environmental pollution and damage that the Contractor must consider for
air, water, and land resources. It includes management of visual aesthetics, noise, solid waste, radiant energy,
and radioactive materials, as well as other pollutants and resources encountered or generated by the
Contractor. The Contractor is obligated to consider specified control measures with the costs included within
the various contract items of work.

B. Environmental pollution and damage is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or
agents which:

1. Adversely effect human health or welfare,

2. Unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life,

3. Effect other species of importance to humankind, or;

4. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural, and historical purposes.

C. Definitions of Pollutants:

1. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides,
organic chemicals, and inorganic wastes.

2. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves, tree trimmings, ashes, and waste
materials resulting from construction or maintenance and repair work.

3. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by runoff water.

4. Solid Waste: Rubbish, debris, garbage, and other discarded solid materials resulting from industrial,
commercial, and agricultural operations and from community activities.

5. Surface Discharge: The term "Surface Discharge" implies that the water is discharged with possible
sheeting action and subsequent soil erosion may occur. Waters that are surface discharged may terminate
in drainage ditches, storm sewers, creeks, and/or "water of the United States" and would require a permit
to discharge water from the governing agency.

6. Rubbish: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass and crockery, metal and
lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.







7. Sanitary Wastes:

a. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage and human and animal waste.

b. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, dispensing, and consumption of
food.

1 .2







1 .3







1 .4







1 .5

REGULATORY REQUIREMENT

A. CEMP must be developed in accordance with the requirements of the technical Guidance Document for
Construction Environmental Management Plan (CEMP) of the Environmental Agency of Abu Dhabi ver. 2010 or
any available update. Any discrepancy from the specifications and the EAD requirements will be discussed with
the Project Engineer.

QUALITY CONTROL

A. Establish and maintain quality control for the environmental protection of all items set forth herein.

B. Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations, and ordinances. Note any corrective
action taken.

REFERENCE

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. U.S. National Archives and Records Administration (NARA)

SUBMITTALS

A. In accordance with Section, 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES, furnish the
following:

1. Environmental Protection Plan: After the contract is awarded and prior to the commencement of the work,
the Contractor shall meet with the Resident Engineer to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection
Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection. Not more than 20
days after the meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Resident Engineer and the
Contracting Officer for approval, a written and/or graphic Environmental Protection Plan including, but not
limited to, the following:

a. Name(s) of person(s) within the Contractor's organization who is (are) responsible for ensuring
adherence to the Environmental Protection Plan.

b. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed
from the site.

c. Name(s) and qualifications of person(s) responsible for training the Contractor's environmental
protection personnel.








d. Description of the Contractor's environmental protection personnel training program.

e. A list of Federal, State, and local laws, regulations, and permits concerning environmental protection,
pollution control, noise control and abatement that are applicable to the Contractor's proposed
operations and the requirements imposed by those laws, regulations, and permits.

f. Methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas including trees,
shrubs, vines, grasses, ground cover, landscape features, air and water quality, fish and wildlife, soil,
historical, and archeological and cultural resources.

g. Procedures to provide the environmental protection that comply with the applicable laws and
regulations. Describe the procedures to correct pollution of the environment due to accident, natural
causes, or failure to follow the procedures as described in the Environmental Protection Plan.

h. Permits, licenses, and the location of the solid waste disposal area.

i.





j.

Drawings showing locations of any proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, //
stream crossings, // material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or
spoil materials. Include as part of an Erosion Control Plan approved by the District Office of the U.S.
Soil Conservation Service and the Department of Veterans Affairs.

Environmental Monitoring Plans for the job site including land, water, air, and noise.

k. Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area and identifying the areas of
limited use or nonuse. Plan should include measures for marking the limits of use areas. This plan
may be incorporated within the Erosion Control Plan.

B. Approval of the Contractor's Environmental Protection Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
adequate and continued control of pollutants and other environmental protection measures.

1 .6

PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES

A. Protect environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of
permanent work during the entire period of this contract. Confine activities to areas defined by the
specifications and drawings.

B. Protection of Land Resources: Prior to construction, identify all land resources to be preserved within the work
area. Do not remove, cut, deface, injure, or destroy land resources including trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, top
soil, and land forms without permission from the Resident Engineer. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or
guys to trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized, or where special emergency use is permitted.

1. Work Area Limits: Prior to any construction, mark the areas that require work to be performed under this
contract. Mark or fence isolated areas within the general work area that are to be saved and protected.
Protect monuments, works of art, and markers before construction operations begin. Convey to all
personnel the purpose of marking and protecting all necessary objects.

2. Protection of Landscape: Protect trees, shrubs, vines, grasses, land forms, and other landscape features
shown on the drawings to be preserved by marking, fencing, or using any other approved techniques.





a. Box and protect from damage existing trees and shrubs to remain on the construction site.

b. Immediately repair all damage to existing trees and shrubs by trimming, cleaning, and painting with
antiseptic tree paint.

c. Do not store building materials or perform construction activities closer to existing trees or shrubs than
the farthest extension of their limbs.

3. Reduction of Exposure of Unprotected Erodible Soils: Plan and conduct earthwork to minimize the
duration of exposure of unprotected soils. Clear areas in reasonably sized increments only as needed to
use. Form earthwork to final grade as shown. Immediately protect side slopes and back slopes upon
completion of rough grading.

4. Temporary Protection of Disturbed Areas: Construct diversion ditches, benches, and berms to retard and
divert runoff from the construction site to protected drainage areas approved under paragraph 208 of the
Clean Water Act.

a. Sediment Basins: Trap sediment from construction areas in temporary or permanent sediment basins
that accommodate the runoff of a local storm. After each storm, pump the basins dry and remove the
accumulated sediment. Control overflow/drainage with paved weirs or by vertical overflow pipes,
draining from the surface.

b. Reuse or conserve the collected topsoil sediment as directed by the Resident Engineer. Topsoil use
and requirements are specified in Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING.

c. Institute effluent quality monitoring programs as required by Federal, State, and local environmental
agencies.

5. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Devices: The erosion and sediment controls selected and maintained
by the Contractor shall be such that water quality standards are not violated as a result of the Contractor's
activities. Construct or install all temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control features //
shown. // on the Environmental Protection Plan. Maintain temporary erosion and sediment control
measures such as berms, dikes, drains, sedimentation basins, grassing, and mulching, until permanent
drainage and erosion control facilities are completed and operative.

6. Manage borrow areas on and off Government property to minimize erosion and to prevent sediment from
entering nearby water courses or lakes.

7. Manage and control spoil areas on and off Government property to limit spoil to areas // shown on the
Environmental Protection Plan and prevent erosion of soil or sediment from entering nearby water courses
or lakes.

8. Protect adjacent areas from despoilment by temporary excavations and embankments.

9. Handle and dispose of solid wastes in such a manner that will prevent contamination of the environment.
Place solid wastes (excluding clearing debris) in containers that are emptied on a regular schedule.








Transport all solid waste off Government property and dispose of waste in compliance with Federal, State,
and local requirements.

10. Store chemical waste away from the work areas in corrosion resistant containers and dispose of waste in
accordance with Federal, State, and local regulations.

11. Handle discarded materials other than those included in the solid waste category as directed by the
Resident Engineer.

C. Protection of Water Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to
avoid pollution of surface and ground waters and sewer systems. Implement management techniques to control
water pollution by the listed construction activities that are included in this contract.

1. Washing and Curing Water: Do not allow wastewater directly derived from construction activities to enter
water areas. Collect and place wastewater in retention ponds allowing the suspended material to settle, the
pollutants to separate, or the water to evaporate.

2. Control movement of materials and equipment at stream crossings during construction to prevent violation
of water pollution control standards of the Federal, State, or local government.

3. Monitor water areas affected by construction.

D. Protection of Fish and Wildlife Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and
control to minimize interference with, disturbance of, or damage to fish and wildlife. Prior to beginning
construction operations, list species that require specific attention along with measures for their protection.

E. Protection of Air Resources: Keep construction activities under surveillance, management, and control to
minimize pollution of air resources. Burning is not permitted on the job site. Keep activities, equipment,
processes, and work operated or performed, in strict accordance with the State of insert Name of State and title
of State Air Pollution Statue, Rule, or Regulation and Federal emission and performance laws and standards.
Maintain ambient air quality standards set by the Environmental Protection Agency, for those construction
operations and activities specified.

1. Particulates: Control dust particles, aerosols, and gaseous by-products from all construction activities,
processing, and preparation of materials (such as from asphaltic batch plants) at all times, including
weekends, holidays, and hours when work is not in progress.

2. Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, haul roads, permanent and temporary access
roads, plant sites, spoil areas, borrow areas, and all other work areas within or outside the project
boundaries free from particulates which would cause a hazard or a nuisance. Sprinklering, chemical
treatment of an approved type, light bituminous treatment, baghouse, scrubbers, electrostatic
precipitators, or other methods are permitted to control particulates in the work area.

3. Hydrocarbons and Carbon Monoxide: Control monoxide emissions from equipment to Federal and State
allowable limits.

4. Odors: Control odors of construction activities and prevent obnoxious odors from occurring.






F. Reduction of Noise: Minimize noise using every action possible. Perform noise-producing work in less sensitive
hours of the day or week as directed by the Resident Engineer. Maintain noise-produced work at or below the
decibel levels and within the time periods specified.

1. Perform construction activities involving repetitive, high-level impact noise only between 8:00 am and 6:00
pm unless otherwise permitted by local ordinance or the Resident Engineer. Repetitive impact noise on
the property shall not exceed the following dB limitations:


Time Duration of Impact Noise

More than 12 minutes in any hour

Less than 30 seconds of any hour

Less than three minutes of any hour

Less than 12 minutes of any hour


Sound Level in dB

70

85

80

75

2. Provide sound-deadening devices on equipment and take noise abatement measures that are necessary
to comply with the requirements of this contract, consisting of, but not limited to, the following:

a. Maintain maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 15 m (50 feet) (dBA):

EARTHMOVING

FRONT LOADERS

BACKHOES

DOZERS

TRACTORS

SCAPERS

GRADERS

TRUCKS

PAVERS,
STATIONARY

PUMPS

GENERATORS




75

75

75

75

80

75

75

80



75

75


MATERIALS HANDLING

CONCRETE MIXERS

CONCRETE PUMPS

CRANES

DERRICKS IMPACT

PILE DRIVERS

JACK HAMMERS

ROCK DRILLS

PNEUMATIC TOOLS



BLASTING

SAWS




75

75

75

75

95

75

80

80



//--//

75







COMPRESSORS 75 VIBRATORS 75

b. Use shields or other physical barriers to restrict noise transmission.

c. Provide soundproof housings or enclosures for noise-producing machinery.

d. Use efficient silencers on equipment air intakes.

e. Use efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that are maintained so
equipment performs below noise levels specified.

f. Line hoppers and storage bins with sound deadening material.

g. Conduct truck loading, unloading, and hauling operations so that noise is kept to a minimum.

3. Measure sound level for noise exposure due to the construction at least once every five successive
working days while work is being performed above 55 dB(A) noise level. Measure noise exposure at the
property line or 15 m (50 feet) from the noise source, whichever is greater. Measure the sound levels on
the A weighing network of a General Purpose sound level meter at slow response. To minimize the effect
of reflective sound waves at buildings, take measurements at 900 to 1800 mm (three to six feet) in front of
any building face. Submit the recorded information to the Resident Engineer noting any problems and the
alternatives for mitigating actions.

G. Restoration of Damaged Property: If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property resulting
from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct, the Contractor shall restore the damaged property to a
condition equal to that existing before the damage at no additional cost to the Government. Repair, rebuild, or
restore property as directed or make good such damage in an acceptable manner.

H. Final Clean-up: On completion of project and after removal of all debris, rubbish, and temporary construction,
Contractor shall leave the construction area in a clean condition satisfactory to the Resident Engineer.
Cleaning shall include off the station disposal of all items and materials not required to be salvaged, as well as all
debris and rubbish resulting from demolition and new work operations.
























PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 .1 SILT FENCE

A. Geotextile fabric and support system complying with the requirements, except geotextile fabric shall have a
maximum flow rate of 10 gal/minute/sq ft at 50 mm constant head as determined by multiplying permittivity in
1/second as determined by ASTM D4491 by a conversion factor of 74.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 .1
































3 .2


EROSION CONTROL

A. Applicable Standards: Unless otherwise shown or specified, erosion control measures shall comply with:

1. "Wisconsin Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (WPDES) General Permit" for storm water discharges
associated with construction activities.

2. WDNR "Stormwater Management Technical Standards" (available on the WDNR website)

B. General: Maintain erosion control measures to protect the project site and prevent sediment pollution of adjacent
water courses and properties. At a minimum, provide erosion control measures as indicated on Drawings.

C. Time Period: Install erosion control measures prior to start of construction and maintain them until final
completion of work. Unless otherwise instructed, remove temporary erosion control measures prior to final
application for payment.

D. Stripping: Strive to limit stripping of sod and vegetation to a period that will expose bare soil to the least
possibility of erosion that construction requirements will allow.

E. Storm Drain Protection: Protect storm drain inlets by using inlet protection of the type shown on Drawings. If not
shown, use inlet protection fabric, silt fence barriers, erosion bale barriers, or equivalent.

F. Tracking Pads: Prevent tracking of soils and sediments onto public and private streets by constructing temporary
graveled access roads and parking areas as needed at the construction site. Remove at the end of each work
day soils and sediment reaching public and private streets not part of the construction site.

G. Re-establishment of Vegetation: Re-establish temporary or permanent vegetation on disturbed areas within the
time limits allowed by applicable standards.

EROSION CONTROL MONITORING AND REPORTING

A. Contractor shall conduct the following inspections:

1. Weekly inspections of implemented erosion and sediment controls.






2. Inspections of erosion and sediment controls within 24 hours after a precipitation event that produces 0.5 in.
of rain or more during a 24 hour period.

B. Contractor shall prepare weekly written reports of all inspections that include:

1. Date, time, and exact place of inspection.

2. Name of individual who performed inspection.

3. An assessment of condition of erosion and sediment controls.

4. A description of any erosion and sediment control implementation and maintenance performed.

5. A description of the present phase of construction at site.

3 .3






3 .4





3 .5

DUST CONTROL

A. Minimize dispersion of dust from construction operations by application of water or other dust control materials.
Controls shall confine dust and dirt within the immediate area of project. Masonry and debris shall be
thoroughly soaked during demolition and loading operations.

NOISE CONTROL

A. Provide noise control measures to limit the amount of noise and prevent nuisance. Properly equip all equipment
with mufflers. Limit construction activities generating significant noise to normal working hours.

HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. If underground petroleum storage tanks, petroleum contaminated soils, or other hazardous environmental
conditions are encountered, and are not identified to be part of the work, Contractor shall immediately stop all
work in connection with the hazardous condition.
(See the General Conditions of the Contract for specific procedures that may apply.)



END OF SECTION






















DIVISION ONE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 74 00 - CLEANING & WASTE MANAGEMENT


PART 1 - GENERAL

1 .1 SUMMARY

A. CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE FROM THE LANDFILL
1.


2.

3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
Waste Management Goals: a minimum of 50% of the total project waste should be diverted
from landfill, in order of preference 1) weight, 2) volume, whichever is most feasible to
measure.
Provide contract documents, including a waste management plan, to show evidence of
recycling, and reuse of recovered materials.
Inform Owner and architect where Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste Management
requirements could detrimentally impact C&D schedule.
Provide separate itemization of cost related to C&D Waste Management.
Effect optimum management of solid wastes via a materials management hierarchy.
The materials management hierarchy shall be: reduce, reuse, and recycle. Prevent
environmental pollution and damage.


B.


REGULATORY REQUIREMENT
1. Comply with ESTIDAMA requirements intended to achieve sustainability, measured and
documented in accordance with Division 01 requirements, fully coordinated with requirements
within individual specification sections.de external architectural woodwork in accordance with
requirements of the Contract Documents.


1 .2 REFERENCES

A.

B.


C.

CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN GUIDELINES

ESTIDAMA VILLA BUILDING RATING SYSTEM (PVRS),
Design & Construction V1.0 April 2010

CURRENT LAW AND LEGISLATION

1. Law No. (21) of 2005 for Waste Management in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi.
2. Abu Dhabi Environment Health and safety Management System Regulatory Framework (EHSMS) -
AD EHMS Co16 - Waste Management V1.2 July 2009.
3. Federal Law No. (24) Of 1999 for the Protection and Development of the Environment.
4. Executive order of Federal Law No. (24) for Regulation for Handling Hazardous Materials, Hazardous
Wastes and Medical Wastes.
5. Law No. (16) of 2005 Pertaining to the Reorganization of the Abu Dhabi Environment Agency.
6. Federal Law No. (23) of the year 1999 regarding the Exploitation, Protection and Development of the
Living Aquatic Resources In the waters of the state of the United Arab Emirates.
7. Federal Law No. (1) 2002 Regarding the Regulation and Control of the Use of Radiation Sources and
Protection Against Their Hazards.


1 .3 DEFINITIONS








A. Contractor shall appoint a Waste Management Contractor approved by NADAFA & the Centre of Waste
Management of Abu Dhabi as soon appointed.

B. Inert Fill - A permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively.

C. Class III Landfill - A landfill that accepts non-hazardous waste such as household, commercial, and
industrial waste, including construction, remodelling, repair, and demolition operations.

D. Construction and Demolition Waste - Including solid wastes, such as building materials, packaging,
rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
1. Rubbish: Including both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as paper, boxes, glass,
crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.
2. Debris: Including both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves and tree trimmings
that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.

E. Target estimated construction and demolition waste salvaged/recycled is 80%.

F. Deconstruction - The process of removing existing building materials from renovation and demolition
projects for the purposes of reuse, and recycling, in a efficient and safe manner possible.

G. Divert - Using material for any purpose other than disposal in a landfill.

H. Waste Materials - Large and small pieces of listed materials which are excess to contract requirements
and generally include materials to be recycled and/or recovered from existing construction and items of
trimmings, cuttings, and damaged goods resulting from new installations, which can be effectively used in
the Work.

I. Reuse - Using a material or product that is recovered from construction, renovation, or demolition
activities.

J. Recycling - The process of collecting and preparing recyclable materials in their original form or in
manufacturing processes that do not cause the destruction/contamination of recyclable materials in a
manner that precludes further use.

K. Recovery - Any process that reclaims materials, substances, energy, or other products contained within or
derived from waste on-site. It includes waste-to-energy, composting, and other processes.

L. Sources Separation - Sorting the recovered materials into specific material types with no or a minimum
amount of contamination on site.

M. Time-Based Separation - Collecting waste during each phase of construction or deconstruction which
results in primarily one major type of recovered material. The material is removed before it becomes mixed
with the material from the next phase of construction.

N. Commingled or Off-site Separation - Collecting all material types into a single bin or mixed collection
system and separating the waste materials into recyclable material types in an off-site facility.


1 .4 SUBMITTALS

A. C&D Waste Management Plan
Before the start of demolition, submit a C&D waste management plan to the Owner and the architect
for approval and it shall include the following:






1. Indicate how the Contractor proposes to recover at least 75% of the C&D wastes for reuse and
recycling.
2. The C&D Waste Management Plan should coordinate the recovery effort with the construction,
and renovation / demolition schedule.
3. Indicate compliance with section 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE.
4. Include a list of reuse facilities, recycling facilities and processing facilities that will be receiving
the recovered materials (including take back by Owner or on-site auctions.)
5. If some of the materials will be donated or sold on-site auctions, describe the process and identify
the organizations that may receive the materials.
6. Identify materials that are not recyclable or not recovered which will be disposed of in a landfill (or
other means acceptable by the State of California and local ordinance and regulations) and
explain why the materials are not recovered.
7. List the permitted landfill, or other permitted disposal facilities, that will be accepting the disposed
waste materials.
8. Indicate instances or situations where compliance with the requirements of this specification do
not apply or do not appear to be possible.
9. Identify each type of waste material to be reused or recycled and estimate the amount, by weight.
10. Provide estimate of time requirements for demolition and for the removal of valuable reusable
items and materials.
11. Prepare building engineering survey and worker safety plan, assessment of building condition
and all potential hazards.
12. Provide a C&D site management plan.
13. Provide final accounting of disposition of recovered materials upon completion of project for final
payments.

B. C&D Waste management Summary Reports
Provide the C&D Quality Manager with delivery receipts for the recovered materials and waste
materials sent to the permitted recycling facilities, processing facilities, or landfill with the following
information:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Name of firm accepting the recovered materials or waste materials
Specify type of facility (e.g. retail facility, recycler, processor, Class III landfill, MRF)
Location of the facility
Type of materials
Net weights (or volume) of each type of material
Date of delivery
Value of the materials or tipping fee paid

1 .5 RECYCLING PROGRAM

A.







B.

The recycling program could utilize one or a combination of any of the following common waste
diversion strategies:
1. Sources Separation
2. Time-Based Separation
3. Commingled or Off-site Separation
4. Back haul of packaging
5. On-site sales auctions and removal.

Waste Material management hierarchy can be viewed as: reuse on-site, recycle on-site, reuse off-site,
and recycle off-site.








C.


D.


Other innovative approaches to achieve the minimum diversion rate are encouraged and should be
specified and described in the C&D Waste Management Plan.

Minimum diversion rate may be achieved by recovering and recycling the following materials:
1. Asphalt
2. Concrete and concrete blocks
3. Brick, tile and masonry materials
4. Ferrous metal
5. Non-ferrous metals: copper, aluminum etc
6. Untreated lumber
7. Plywood, OSB and particle board
8. Gypsum wallboard scrap
9. Paper and cardboard 10.
Beverage containers
11. Insulation
12. Rigid foam
13. Glass
14. Carpet and pad
15. Trees and shrubs
16. Soil
17. Plumbing fixtures
18. Windows
19. Doors
20. Cabinets
21. Architectural fixtures
22. Millwork, paneling and other similar interior finishes
23. Electric fixtures, motors, switch gear and other similar equipment
24. HVAC equipment, duck work, control systems, switches and other similar equipment
25. Others as appropriate


1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.



B.



C.













Regulatory Requirement
Comply with applicable requirements of the State of California, local ordinances and regulations
concerning management of construction, clearing, and inert materials.

Disposal Site, Recyclers and waste Materials Processors
Use only facilities properly permitted by the State of California, and/or by local authorities where
applicable.

Pre-C&D Waste Management Meeting
1. Prior to beginning work at the site, schedule and conduct a meeting to review the C&D Waste
Management Plan and discuss procedures, schedules, coordination and specific requirements for
waste materials recycling and disposal. Discuss coordination and interface between Contractor,
sub-contractors, architect, engineers, project manager, Owner, and other C&D activities. Identify
and resolve problems of compliance with requirements. Record minutes of the meeting,
identifying conclusions reached and matters requiring further resolution. Maintain waste
management as an agenda item at future construction meetings.
2. Attendees: Contractor and related contractor personnel associated with work of this section,
including personnel in charge of the waste management program; C&D Quality Manager;
architect; engineers; material and equipment suppliers where appropriate; and such additional
Owner personnel as Owner deems appropriate.




3. Plan Revision: Make revisions to C&D Waste Management Plan agreed upon during the meeting
and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit revised plan to
architect or the Owner personnel as Owner deems appropriate for approval.

D.









E.


F.


G.


H.

Implementation
1. Designate an on-site party responsible for instructing workers and implementing the C&D Waste
Management Plan.
2. Distribute copies of C&D Waste Management Plan to job site foreman and each subcontractor.
3. Include waste management and recycling in worker orientation.
4. Provide on-site instruction on appropriate separation, handling, recycling, and recovery methods to
be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the work at the site.
5. Also include discussion of waste management and recycling in regular job meeting and job safety
meetings conducted during the course of work at the site.

The Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that the appropriate governmental entities are notified of
the work.

Remove and relocate reusable materials to be reinstalled or retained in a manner to prevent damage or
contamination.

Conduct construction and demolition in such a manner to minimize damage to trees, plants and
natural landscape environment.

Arrange for adequate collection, and transportation to deliver the recovered materials to the approved
recycling centre or processing facility. Maintain records accessible to the architect or C&D Quality
Manager for verification of diversion of recovered waste materials.

1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A.











B.

Site Storage
1. Remove materials for recycling and recovery from the work locations to approved containers or
storage area as required. Failure to remove waste or recovered materials will be considered
cause for withholding payment and termination of Contract.
2. Position containers for recyclable and recoverable waste materials at a designated location on the
Project Site. If materials are sorted on site, also provide a sorting area and necessary storage
containers.
3. Change-out loaded containers for empty containers, as demand requires.
4. If recovered materials are stored on-site for project duration provide adequate security from
pilferage.

Handling
1. Deposit indicated recyclable, and recoverable materials in storage areas or containers in a clean
(no mud, adhesive, solvents, petroleum contamination), debris-free condition. Do not deposit
contaminated materials into the containers until such time as such materials have been cleaned.
2. Insure all recovered materials are made safe for handling and storage.
3. If the contamination chemically combines with the material so that it cannot be cleaned, do not
deposit into the recycle containers. In such case, request resolution by the C&D Quality Manager
for disposal of the contaminated material. Directions from the C&D Quality Manager do not relieve
the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with all legal and regulatory requirements for
disposal, nor shall such directions cause a request for modification of the Contract. levelled
bearers in a manner that prevents sagging and permits free air circulation.






1 .8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.









B.

Environmental Requirement
1. Transport recyclable and recoverable waste materials from the Work Area to containers and
carefully deposit in the containers without excess noise and interference with other activities, to
minimize noise and dust.
2. The Contractor shall ensure adequate erosion control and storm water control, if required, to
prevent or minimize the negative impact to its surrounding environment.
3. Provide measures to insure the containment of lead-based paint and dust, nails, asbestos-based
products and any biological contaminants that may affect environmental health and safety
conditions.

Site Condition
1. Signs and instructions should be clear, and easy to understand. All recycling containers should
be clearly labelled and lists of acceptable and unacceptable materials will be posted throughout
the site. Whenever possible, they should be in multiple-languages, especially in Spanish, and in
graphic symbols.
2. The Contractor shall ensure the safety of all personnel involved in the C&D process.
3. A C&D site management plan shall be created including: work areas, materials processing areas,
materials storage and disposal areas, worker hand-washing and changing stations, first aid and
medical information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 .1 SALVAGED AND REUSE MATERIALS: N/A


2 .2 RECYCLED MATERIALS

A.

The following materials are collected for recycling:

1. Asphalt
2. Concrete and concrete blocks
3. Tile and masonry materials
4. Ferrous metal
5. Non-ferrous metals: copper, aluminum etc
6. Untreated lumber
7. Plywood, OSB and particle board
8. Gypsum wallboard scrap
9. Paper and cardboard 10.
Beverage containers
11. Insulation 12. Rigid
foam
13. Glass
14. Carpet and pad
15. Trees and shrubs
16. Soil
PART 3 - EXECUTION

N/A

END OF SECTION







SECTION - 01 81 13

SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENT





Table of Contents

1. General............................................................................................................................................ 2
2. Products .......................................................................................................................................... 4
3. Execution......................................................................................................................................... 5



List of Appendices

Appendix 1: Electronic copy of Estidama Pearl Building Rating System (PBRS): Design and
Construction, version 1.0, April 2010, by Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council (UPC).

Appendix 2: Design Pearl Rating Credit Points Summary

Appendix 3: Electronic copy of Full Pearl Design Rating Documentation approved by UPC

Appendix 4: Commissioning Plan

Appendix 5: Preliminary Occupant Handbook

Appendix 6: Preliminary Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan





























SECTION - 01 81 13
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENT


1. General

1.1. Summary
A. This Section describes general requirements and procedures to comply with Estidama
Pearl Rating (2 Pearls)
B. General: Read this Section in conjunction with other related specification Sections, the
Design Drawings, and Bill of Quantities.
C. Related Documentation:
- Appendix 1: Electronic copy of Estidama Pearl Building Rating System (PBRS): Design
and Construction, version 1.0, April 2010, by Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council (UPC).
- Appendix 2: Design Pearl Rating Credit Points Summary
- Appendix 3: Electronic copy of Full Pearl Design Rating Documentation approved by
UPC.
- Appendix 4: Commissioning Plan
- Appendix 5: Preliminary Occupant Handbook
- Appendix 6: Preliminary Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan

1.2. Submittals
A. ESTIDAMA submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to
that submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate
submittal to verify compliance with indicated ESTIDAMA requirements.
B. ESTIDAMA Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established
for the Notice of Award indicating how the requirements covered in this Section and its
related Sections will be met.
C. ESTIDAMA Progress Reports: On Bi-weekly basis, submit reports comparing actual
construction and purchasing activities with ESTIDAMA action plans for the following:
D. Waste reduction progress reports complying with the CDWMP.
E. Regional material requirement as per the requirement stated herein
F. Recycled Content requirement as per the requirement stated herein
G. Estidama Documentation:
H. Submit all Pearl Construction Rating stage documentation required for the UPC submission
in order to achieve 2 Pearl Certification as per the Pearl Building Rating System: Design
and Construction document for submittal requirements.





I. All documentation shall be based on PBRS Ver. 1.0
J. All forms/ templates, shall be approved by the PQP and the engineer.

1.3. Definitions
BLB: Building Log Book


CDWMP: Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan

CIBSE: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

GWP: Global Warming Potential

HVAC: Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning

IAQ: Indoor Air Quality.

km: Kilometer.

Light Pollution: Light that extends beyond its source such that the additional light is wasted in
an unwanted area or in an area where it inhibits view of the night sky

MSDS: Material Safety Data Sheet

ODP: Ozone Depleting Potential

PBRS: Estidama Pearl Building Rating System

Post-Consumer Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituent materials that
have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid-waste stream after consumer use

Pre-Consumer Recycled Content: Materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted
from the solid-waste stream during the manufacturing process.

ppm: parts per million.

Recycled Content Materials: Products that contain pre-consumer or post-consumer materials
as all or part of their feedstock.

Recycled Steel: Steel product from companies certified under CARES Sustainable Reinforcing
Steel Appendix 01 "Production of continuously cast steel billets" and "Production of hot rolled
steel bar and coil for the reinforcement of concrete" will count as recycled









Regional Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, recovered, and manufactured
within a radius of 500km

Sealant: Any material that fills and seals gaps between other materials

SMACNA: Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association

SRI: Solar Reflectance Index

UPC: Abu Dhabi Urban Planning Council

VOC: Volatile Organic Compound.

WB: Water Based.

SB: Solvent Based

1.4. Quality Assurance:
A. Pearl Qualified Professional (PQP): Engage a Pearl Qualified Professional (PQP) who has
sufficient experience of sustainable and green buildings design and construction, sufficient
awareness of International Organization for Standardization (ISO) documentation and who
is aware of the Pearl Building Rating System - Design and Construction Version 1.0, April
2010 Issue.
B. The PQP may be any of the construction team members such as Project manager,
Construction Manager, Site Engineer, or HSE Officer.
C. The PQP should review all documents produced during the Pearl Design Rating Stage, all
approved management plans should be implemented during the project construction.
Plans, handbooks and guides should be updated where required.
D. The PQP needs to manage the implementation of credits' requirements, and handle the
documentation process and ensure the compilation of all documents required for the Pearl
Construction Rating Submission.
2. Products
A. PBRS Credit Summary: Generally, the project shall comply with the requirements of all
credits fulfilled during design stage as clarified in the "Credit Points Summary" document in
Appendix 1.















3. Execution
This section clarifies requirements of certain credits to be fulfilled by the contractor; however for full
documentation requirements the PQP shall refer to the PBRS guide, shown in Appendices 1, 2 and 3.
Generally, the project shall comply with the requirements of the following credits:
IDP-R3: Basic Commissioning:
The Contractor has to employ an independent commissioning contractor to commission the installed
systems and develop a Building Log Book (BLB) in accordance to CIBSE TM31 or similar guide (Any
other guide needs to be approved by the Engineer). The commissioning should be executed as per
the commissioning plan approved as part of the design rating. The Commissioning Contractor shall
provide Commissioning results demonstrating compliance with all associated credits (including but
not limited to LBi-R1: Healthy Ventilation Delivery); the commissioning process shall cover - at
minimum - the following systems:
- HVAC;
- On-site energy generation (including co-generation), if applicable;
- Building Management System;
- Lighting and lighting controls;
- Domestic hot and cold water systems;
- On-site water treatment systems including swimming pools (if applicable); and
- Automated control features such as blinds (If applicable).
IDP-6: Sustainability Communication:
Update the Preliminary Occupant Handbook document which is approved during the Pearl Design
Rating Stage. The Occupant Handbook should include a list of information that will enable building
occupants to appreciate, understand and contribute to responsible resource use in the building. The
list below indicates the minimum requirements to be included in the Occupant Handbook:
- The building's energy and water efficiency measures and how occupant behaviour affects
the building performance as follows:
- This should give owners and occupiers information on energy-efficient features and
strategies relating to the building, and also provide an overview of the reasons for their
use (e.g. economic and environmental savings).
- Information could include: information on the operation of innovative features such as
lighting control systems etc., and guidance on the impacts of strategies covering window
opening and the use of blinds, lighting and heating controls as well as impact of occupant
behaviour.
- Details of water saving features and their use and benefits, e.g. aerating taps, low flush
WCs, water monitoring, metering etc. as well as impact of occupant behaviour on water
consumption.








- Information on the building's indoor environmental quality and how it is measured,
monitored and managed (e.g. thermostat location and use);
- Information on materials used in the building, including environmental and social benefits,
as appropriate;
- Waste and recycling policies and information such as location, sorting requirements (if
any) and the use of green waste (if applicable);
- Locations of nearby public transport to include maps and time tables, shuttle service,
carpooling and on-site bicycle facilities; and
- Tenant fit-out considerations, such as low-energy lighting installations, to maximize the
building performance potential and minimize environmental impacts.
LBo-R3: Outdoor Thermal Comfort Strategy & LBo-1: Improved Outdoor Thermal Comfort
Strategy:
Improved Outdoor Thermal Comfort: Where cover is provided by structures such as canopies or other
architectural elements, the outer surface of the shading element must have a minimum SRI of 29 as
per the following table, Contractor shall submit Evidence that all purchased and installed covers have
compliant outer surface SRIs.


Space Type


Exterior Surface Parking with more than 10
spaces


Public Open Spaces

Primary Pedestrian Walkways
(based on 1.8m width within the through zone)

Secondary Pedestrian Walkways
(based on 1.8m width within the through zone)


Cycle Tracks


Shading Element


PVC white colour with SRI of 109



n/a


Aluminium - White Colour (Bone White)


Aluminium - White Colour (Bone White)



n/a




LBo-8: Preferred Car Parking Spaces:
The car parking includes 3Nos. car park spaces identified priority vehicles parking, 2Nos. parking
spaces shall have an industrial socket/isolator convenient for plugging the charge cord for battery
charging for vehicles as per specification section 16442.









LBo-10: Light Pollution Reduction:
No incandescent lamps shall be installed within the project, and all internal and permanently installed
fluorescent lighting installations shall incorporate high frequency electronic ballasts.
All rooms intended for individual occupancy shall be equipped with occupancy sensors.
For full details refer to specification section 16511.
LBi-2.1: Materials Emissions Adhesives & Sealants:
Contractor must submit Product Data to confirm use of low emission adhesives and sealants to
encourage the desirability of spaces in relation to improved occupant health and demonstrate that a
minimum of 95% (by weight) of all adhesives and sealants used on the building interior must not
exceed the prescribed VOC limits in South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168, some
of which are reproduced in the table below.
- For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation
including printed statement of VOC content. The VOC limits of the remaining non
compliant adhesives and sealants must be no more than 50% higher than values listed for
each product type.
- Reference: South Coast Air Quality Management District (California, U.S.) - Rule 1168
"Adhesive and Sealant Applications", (www.aqmd.gov).


Maximum grams of VOC per litre of adhesive or
# Product type
sealant, less water and exempt compounds

1 Indoor carpet adhesive 50

2 Carpet pad adhesive 50

3 Wood flooring adhesive 100

4 Rubber flooring adhesive 60

5 Sub-floor adhesive 50

6 Ceramic tile adhesive 65

7 Cove base adhesive 50

8 Plasterboard and wall panel adhesive 50

9 Multipurpose construction adhesive 70

10 Structural glazing adhesive 100

11 Architectural sealants 250






LBi-2.2: Materials Emissions: Paints & Coatings:
Contractor must submit Product Data to confirm use of low emission paints and coatings to improve
occupant health to demonstrate that the interior surface area covered by paints and coatings in the
project meet or are less than the maximum VOC content limits values for paints and coatings for 95%
of all surface areas covered by paints and coatings per Annex II, Phase II, Table A of European
Directive 2004/42/CE: 2004.
- The VOC limits of the remaining non-compliant paints and coatings must be no more than
50% higher than the values listed below for each product type. All paints and coatings
must have fungal resistance.
- Reference: Annex II, Table A of Directive 2004/ 42/ CE of European Parliament and of
The Council of 21 April 2004 (http:/ /eur-lex.europa.eu/ LexUriServ/
LexUriServ.do?uri=OJ:L:2004:143:0087:0096:EN:PDF).



Phase II



1



2



3



4



5



6



7
# Product Category


Interior matt walls and ceilings (Gloss <25 @
60
o
)


Interior glossy walls and ceilings (Gloss >25
@ 60
o
)


Interior trim and cladding paints for wood and
metal


Interior trim varnishes and wood stains,
including opaque wood stains


Interior minimal build wood stains



Primers



Binding Primers
Type


WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB
(g/l)*

30
30

100
100

130
300

130
400

130
700

30
350

30
750







Phase II



8



9
# Product Category


One- Pack performance coatings



Two- pack reactive performance coatings for
specific end use such as floors
Type


WB
SB

WB
SB
(g/l)*

140
500

140
500

10



11



12

Two- pack reactive performance coatings for
specific end use such as floors


Multi- colored coatings



Decorative effect coatings

WB
SB

WB
SB

WB
SB

140
500

100
100

200
200

*g/l of ready to use product
LBi-2.4: Materials Emissions: Ceiling System:
Product Data to confirm use of low emission ceiling systems as follows:
- Suspended Ceiling Systems Demonstrate that all suspended ceiling systems comply with
the requirements of BS EN 13964: 2004 section 4.5, in relation to asbestos (no asbestos)
and formaldehyde content (which must meet class E1 at a minimum and be tested,
classified and appropriately marked).
- Non-Suspended Ceiling Systems Comply with the aforementioned requirements of LBi-
2.1 for any Adhesives and Sealants. Comply with the requirements listed in LBi-2.2 for any
Paints and Coatings.



LBi-6: High Frequency Lighting:
No incandescent lamps may be installed in the internal environment, and all internal and permanently
installed fluorescent lighting installations must incorporate high frequency electronic ballasts as stated in
specification section 16511. Furthermore, all spaces must comply with the requirements for
occupancy sensors as per credit requirement as stated in specification section 16511.
PW-R1: Minimum Interior Water Use Reduction & PW-1: Improved Interior Water Use Reduction:










The water strategy developed during design stage proved that there is a reduction of 47.5% of the
water consumption if compared to the baseline building through the use of water efficient fixtures as
per the flow rates specified below, the contractor shall submit product data to confirm the same.
- Kitchen Tap: 3.0 L/min at 417.7 kPa
- Bathroom washbasin taps: 1.8 L/min at 417.7 kPa
- Toilets, Dual Flush: 4.0/3.0 L/Flush at 417.7 kPa
- Ablution fixtures: 1.8 L/min at 417.7 kPa
PW-R2: Exterior Water Monitoring:
Product Data for selection of metering facilities on all exterior water uses enabling effective
management of outdoor water consumption and prevention of leaks as per specification section
02510.
PW-3: Water Monitoring & Leak Detection:
Product Data for provision of metering facilities that allows the water consumption of the building to
be recorded and monitored to allow future improvement and understanding of the use of water in
buildings as per specification section 02510.
RE-R1: Minimum Energy Performance & RE-1: Improved Energy Performance:
The project has achieved 26.9% performance improvement compared to the baseline building
performance demonstrated by the energy simulation model as per the building performance rating
method outlined in Appendix G of ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2007, in order to achieve this
reduction the Contractor shall follow the related specification sections for the following:
- Building fabric: Contractor shall achieve at minimum the following as per relevant
drawings and specification:

Proposed
Item


Roof Construction

Above-Grade Wall Construction

Floor/Slab Construction

Vertical Glazing U- Value

Vertical Glazing SHGC

Vertical Glazing Light Transmittance


Horizontal Glazing U- Value (overall U-
Unit of Measurement


U- Value (W/mK)

U- Value (W/mK)

U- Value (W/mK)

U- Value (W/mK)

N/A

Percentage

U- Value (W/mK)
Building

0.1133

0.2325

1.98

2.64

0.27

37%

2.64



10





Item

value of full windows including glass,
frame, spacers, and any other
component)

Horizontal Glazing SHGC

Horizontal Light Transmittance




Unit of Measurement






U- Value (W/mK)

Percentage



Proposed
Building






0.27

37%

- HVAC: Chillers Efficiency at full load COP=3.1; and IPLV COP= 4.3
- Service water heating;
- Power;
- Lighting; and
- Other equipment
In case of any variation during construction that may impact the above items, The Contractor shall
submit Updated Energy Model Template summarizing the dynamic energy simulation, confirming that
the minimum requirements of this credit have been achieved (i.e. The Contractor needs to develop
as-built energy model)
RE-R2: Energy Monitoring & Reporting:
An easily accessible and clearly labelled energy sub-meters shall be installed as per credit
requirement and as specified in specification section 15120
RE-R3: Ozone Impacts of Refrigerants & Fire Suppression Systems:
All refrigerants and gaseous fire suppression systems to be installed within the project site boundary
must have an ozone depletion potential (ODP) of zero as per specification section 15880 and
specification section 15620.
RE-2: Cool Building Strategies:
The project has proved 32% reductions in the annual external heat gain of the proposed building
compared with the baseline, the Contractor shall ensure implementation of the following:
- Compliance with building fabric specification as stated in RE-R1; -
Stick to the glazing to wall ratio as per project specification; and
- Roofing Materials: Provide high solar reflective roofing materials with a value greater than
or equal to 78 for the Solar Reflectance Index (SRI) to comply with the requirements as
stated in Credit requirement.
RE-7: Global Warming Impacts of Refrigerants & Fire Suppression Systems:









/

The weighted average of all fire suppression to be installed within the project has an equivalent
Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 10 or less as per specification section 15320
SM-R1: Hazardous Materials Elimination:
Demonstrate that no Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) are used within the development and
that all ACMs have been removed from refurbished buildings. Demonstrate that where timber is
specified to treat external structures where there is frequent and intimate contact, such as -but not
limited to- shading devices, playground equipment and handrails that no chromated copper arsenate
(CCA)-treated timber is used on the project.
SM-R2: Basic Construction Waste Management & SM-13:
A Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan (CDWMP) was developed and approved
during the Design Pearl Rating. The contractor should develop a work method statement detailing
how this CDWMP will be implemented during construction operations.
The objective of this management is to divert 80% of the generated construction waste from disposal
to landfill into more sustainable paths, these can include: reuse on- site or off- site and recycling.
SM-1: Non-Polluting Materials:
The Contractor shall submit Product Data for selection of Non-Polluting Materials that do not have
long-term negative impacts on human health or pollute natural systems. Demonstrate that the project
has achieved the following:
- Zero ODP, Low GWP Insulation All thermal insulation materials used in the project shall
have an Ozone Depleting Potential of zero (ODP = 0) and a low Global Warming Potential
of less than five (GWP 5). Compliance is required for any blowing agent used to
manufacture the insulation product or to spray it in place as per the following
specifications sections:
- Low Toxicity Materials Shall not use materials or building products or components
containing elements or compounds with the following R-phrase attribution under EU Risk
Phrases (R-Phrases) listed in Annex III of EU Directives 67/548/EEC:
1. R20 - Harmful by inhalation.
2. R21 - Harmful in contact with skin.
3. R22 - Harmful if swallowed.
4. R23 Toxic by inhalation.
5. R24 - Toxic in contact with skin.
6. R25 - Toxic if swallowed.
7. R26 - Very toxic by inhalation.
8. R27 - Very toxic in contact with skin.
9. R28 - Very toxic if swallowed.



12




10. R29 - Contact with water liberates toxic gas.
11. R31 - Contact with acids liberates toxic gas.
12. R32 - Contact with acids liberates very toxic gas.
13. R33 - Danger of cumulative effects.
14. R36 - Irritating to eyes.
15. R37 - Irritating to respiratory system.
16. R38 - Irritating to skin.
17. R39 - Danger of very serious irreversible effects.
18. R41 - Risk of serious damage to eyes.
19. R42 - May cause sensitization by inhalation.
20. R43 - May cause sensitization by skin contact.
21. R45 - May cause cancer.
22. R46 - May cause heritable genetic damage.
23. R48 - Danger of serious damage to health by prolonged exposure.
24. R49 - May cause cancer by inhalation.
25. R50 - Very toxic to aquatic organisms.
26. R51 - Toxic to aquatic organisms.
27. R52 - Harmful to aquatic organisms.
28. R53 - May cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.
29. R54 - Toxic to flora
30. R55 - Toxic to fauna.
31. R56 - Toxic to soil organisms.
32. R57 - Toxic to bees.
33. R58 - May cause long-term adverse effects in the environment.
34. R59 - Dangerous for the ozone layer.
35. R60 - May impair fertility.
36. R61 - May cause harm to the unborn child.
37. R62 - Possible risk of impaired fertility.
38. R63 - Possible risk of harm to the unborn child.
39. R64 - May cause harm to breastfed babies
40. R65 - Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed






SM-9: Regional Materials:
This project intends to target 2 points under the regional materials credit; through selection of regional
material with a cost more than 20% of the total material cost of the project.
At minimum, the following materials shall be sourced locally, considered as "Regional Material" as
defined and in compliance with credit requirements:
- Filling Material
- Concrete Material for screeds and topping (Plastering and Rendering)
- Painting materials
- Concrete blocks
- Concrete materials
- Ceramic tiles
- PVC tents
- Interlocking
- Cement Plaster
SM-10: Recycled Materials:
This project intends to target 5 points under the recycled materials credit; through selection of
regional material with a cost of 20% of the total material cost of the project. Identified recycled
material should include:
- 91% recycled steel
- 100% recycled aggregate
- Cement replacement: through either the use of supplementary cementing materials
(SCMs) (including fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS) and silica
fumes) or the increased use of aggregates or admixtures, that the project has reduced the
overall amount of Portland cement used and associated embodied greenhouse gas
emissions
SM-13: Improved Construction Waste Management Plan:
A Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan (CDWMP) was developed and approved
during the Design Pearl Rating. The contractor should develop a work method statement detailing
how this CDWMP will be implemented during construction operations.
The objective of this management is to divert 80% of the generated construction waste from disposal
to landfill into more sustainable paths, these can include: reuse on- site or off- site and recycling.










SM-14: Improved Operational Waste Management Plan:
An Operational Waste Management Plan has been developed based on the best available practices.
The target is to divert 82% of the operational waste from landfills and send it to recycling plants.
Separated waste bins will be provided near the building entrance for collection of: Paper, Plastic,
Cans, and Glass



- End of Section -

























































Appendix 1: Electronic copy of Estidama Pearl Building Rating System (PBRS):
Design and Construction, version 1.0, April 2010, by Abu Dhabi Urban Planning
Council (UPC).




Please refer to this link: http://estidama.org/template/estidama/docs/PBRS%20Version%201.0.pdf



















































Appendix 2: Design Pearl Rating Credit Points Summary




























































Appendix 3: Electronic copy of Full Pearl Design Rating Documentation approved
by UPC.



Refer to the attached Disc (CD)























































Appendix 4: Commissioning Plan




























































Appendix 5: Preliminary Occupant Handbook





























































Appendix 6: Preliminary Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan
-























































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 03 00 00 - Concrete
- 03 11 00 - Concrete Forming
- 03 15 00 - Concrete Accessories
- 03 21 00 - Reinforcement
- 03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete
- 03 30 50 - Concrete for Water Retaining Structures
- 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Finishing
- 03 41 00 - Precast Structural Concrete
- 03 45 00 - Precast Architectural Concrete












































DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMING

PART 1:


GENERAL

1.0 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
apply to this Section.

B. This section covers the materials, design, installation & workmanship for all formwork for cast-in-situ
or precast concrete.
C. Contractor shall submit material data sheet to confirm the cost of regional materials at least is
equivalent to 10% of Total Material Cost.


2 .0 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Division 03 - CONCRETE B.
Division 04 - MASONRY
C. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
D. Division 09 - FINISHES



3.0 QUALITY CONTROL


A.


REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

1. The design and construction of formwork shall be carried out by competent persons taking due
account of the surface finish required. The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent
loss of grout or mortar from the concrete at all stages and for the appropriate method of placing and
compacting.


2. The design and use of formwork shall be in accordance with BS 5975: 1996 Falsework.

3. The Contractor must submit to the CLIENT substantiating calculations justifying the formwork design
prior to its use on site.

4. Formwork (including supports) shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in their correct position
and to the correct shape and profile, so that the final concrete structure is within the limits of the
dimensional tolerances specified. The supports should be designed to withstand the worst
combination of self weight, formwork weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete














weight, and construction and wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic effects caused by
placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete.

5. The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled and removable from the cast
concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. Where necessary, the formwork shall be so
arranged that the soffit form, properly supported on props only, can be retained in position for such
periods as may be required by maturing conditions or specification.

6. Formwork shall be provided with suitable means of access and safety guardrails for operatives
working above ground.

7. In addition to the above, formwork shall be provided to the top surface of concrete where the slope or
the nature of the work requires.

8. Provisions shall be made for forming holes and chases for services and for building in pipes,
conduits and other fixings shown on the construction and plant manufacturer's drawings.

9. The position of any ties passing through the concrete requires the CLIENT's approval. Where part of
a
metal tie remains embedded in the concrete it shall not have less cover than the reinforcement. Any
holes left after the removal of ties shall be filled with concrete or mortar to the CLIENT's approval.






B. WORKMANSHIP - DEFLECTION AND CAMBER

1. The Contractor shall make allowance for any deflection of formwork that is likely to arise during
construction, so that the hardened concrete conforms to the specified line and level.

2. Formwork shall be set with an upward camber of 1 in 600 for all beams and slabs over 5.0m span
and 1 in 300 for cantilevers.

3. Dimensional deviations of reinforced concrete members must not exceed those given in specification
03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete.
These deviations, shall however, not be permitted where and when a higher degree of accuracy may
be required - e.g: -
a. As necessary to suit the installation of lifts, escalators or other mechanical plant.
b. As necessary to suit windows and cladding. c. As necessary to suit finishes.

4. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining all tolerances that require greater accuracy than
those laid down in specification 03 30 00.










5. The Contractor shall agree structural tolerances with all sub-contractors prior to the commencement
of construction or, where applicable, the manufacture of off-site materials.


4.0 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings for formwork and false work in accordance with conditions of the Contract -
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups.

B. Indicate method and schedule of construction, shoring, stripping and re-shoring procedures, and
Materials, arrangement of joints, special architectural exposed finishes, ties, liners, and locations of
temporary embedded parts.

C. Indicate formwork design data, such as permissible rate of concrete placement, and temperature of
concrete, in forms as well as all necessary structural calculation.


D. Indicate sequence of erection and removal of formwork / false work as agreed with
CLIENT.







































PART 2



PRODUCTS

1.0 'MATERIALS

A. Formwork Materials

1. For concrete without special architectural features use marine plywood in accordance with approved
shop drawings prepared by the Contractor.

2. Thickness of plywood and member sizes used in the formwork is to be designed by the Contractor in
accordance with BS 5975: 1996 False work. See section 1.2 of this specification.

3. For concrete with special architectural features, use formwork materials to provide the specified
finish.

4. The reuse of formwork is accepted provided the formwork used produces concrete surfaces that
satisfy the surface finish requirements. Damage or distorted formwork shall not be used.


B. Pan forms: As required by the Contractor and the finishes schedule.

C. Tubular column forms: Round, steel, internally treated with release material. Spiral pattern not to show in
hardened concrete.

D. Form ties
1. For concrete not designated fair face finish, use removable or snap-off metal ties, fixed or adjustable
length, free of devices leaving holes larger than 25 mm dia. in concrete surface.


2. For Architectural concrete, use snap ties complete with plastic cones and light grey concrete plugs.

E. Form release agent: chemically active release agents containing compounds that react with free lime in
concrete resulting in water insoluble soaps.

F. Form stripping agent: colourless mineral oil, free of kerosene.

G. Falsework materials: to approval from the CLIENT.

H. Sealant: to Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.












PART 3

EXECUTION

1.0 FABRICATION AND ERECTION

A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork / falsework and ensure dimensions
agree with drawings.


B. Obtain CLIENT's approval for use of earth forms not indicated on drawings.


C. Hand trim sides and bottoms and remove loose earth from earth forms before placing concrete.

D. Fabricate and erect Falsework in accordance with standards specified in this section.


E. Refer to architectural drawings for concrete members requiring architectural exposed finishes.

F. Provide site drainage to prevent washout of soil supporting mud sills and shores.

G. Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with standards to produce finished concrete conforming
to shape, dimensions, locations and levels indicated within tolerances required by the specified
standard.


H. Align form joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to minimum.


I. Locate horizontal form joints for exposed columns 2700 mm above finished floor levels (F.F.L).

J. Use 25 mm chamfer strips on external corners and/or 25 mm fillets at interior corners of concrete
members, joints, unless specified otherwise.


K. Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses, expansion and control joints as indicated.

L. Construct forms for architectural concrete, and place ties as indicated and/or as directed. Joint
pattern not necessarily based on using standard size panels or maximum permissible spacing of ties.

M. Build in anchors, sleeves, and other inserts required to accommodate Work specified in other
sections. Assure that all anchors and inserts will not protrude beyond surfaces designated to receive
applied finishes, including painting.

N. Where sleeves have been used for the erection of formwork and are left in place, the void is to be
fully grouted up and the required surface finish achieved.










2.0 SUPPORTS

A. Props and supports shall be designed to allow the formwork to be adjusted accurately to line and
level and to be erected and removed in a sequence without damage to the concrete. Props and
supports must be certified using 'scaftag' or similar system from a reputable manufacturer.


3.0 JOINTS AND EDGES

A. All joints in formwork shall be close-fitting to prevent bleeding of cement paste from the concrete.

B. At construction joints formwork shall be tightly secured against previously cast or hardened concrete
to prevent the loss of grout or the formation of steps or ridges in the concrete.

C. Formwork shall be constructed to provide straight and true angles, arises or edges. Where chamfers
are called for, the fillets shall be accurately sized to provide a smooth and continuous chamfer.

D. Formworks panels shall have true edges to permit accurate alignment of their sides and to provide
clean lines at construction joints and shall be fixed with joints either vertical or horizontal, unless
otherwise specified.

E. The type and treatment of any lining (plywood, metal, plastics, etc.) to the forms shall be appropriate
to the concrete finish required.

F. Where holes are needed in forms to accommodate projecting reinforcement or fixing devices, care
shall be taken to prevent loss of grout. Special care shall be taken when stripping in order not to
break off the edge of the concrete adjacent to the projecting reinforcement.


4.0 CLEANING AND TREATMENT

A. The formwork that will be in contact with the concrete shall be clean and treated with suitable release
agent before fixing reinforcement. All rubbish and water shall be removed from the interior of the
forms before the concrete is placed.

B. Release agents for formwork shall be approved by the CLIENT and shall be carefully chosen for the
particular conditions they are required to fulfill. Where a concrete surface is to be permanently
exposed only one agent shall be used throughout the entire area. Release agents shall be applied
evenly and contact with reinforcement and concrete at construction joints avoided. Where the
surface is to receive an applied finish, care shall be taken to ensure the compatibility of the release
agent with the finish.


C. Surface retarding agents shall not be used.








D. Damaged or distorted formwork shall not be used

5.0 STRIKING

A. The formwork shall be removed slowly as the sudden removal of wedges is equivalent to a shock
load on the partly hardened concrete.

B. Materials and plant shall not be stacked on any newly constructed floor without the permission of the
CLIENT.

C. Provided the concrete strength is confirmed by tests on cubes stored as far as possible under the
same conditions as the concrete in the member under consideration, formwork supporting cast in-
situ concrete in flexure may be struck, when the cube strength is 25N/sq.mm or twice the stress to
which it will then be subjected, whichever is the greater, provided that such earlier striking will not
result in unacceptable deflections due to shrinkage, creep, etc. The Contractor shall submit
calculations and cube test results to prove compliance with this Clause.

D. In the absence of cube test results the periods before striking given below shall be used:
Minimum Period
Type of Formwork
Vertical formwork to columns, walls :
Soffit formwork to slabs:
Props to slabs:
Soffit formwork to beams:
Props to beams:
Before Striking
24 hours
7 days
11 days 8
days
15 days

E. When formwork is removed within the seven (7) days curing period, particular care shall be
exercised to avoid damage to the concrete, especially to arises and features. The provision of
suitable curing methods shall immediately follow the removal of the formwork and the concrete shall
be protected from high temperatures by means of suitable shielding.

F. Concrete shall not be cured by the application of cold water. Where the finished surface has re-
entrant angles, formwork shall be removed at the earliest time possible to avoid shrinkage cracks.

G. In multi storey construction the Contractor shall submit his proposed sequence of removal of props,
taking into account the above minimum details for striking formwork. Reference can be made to BS
5975 "Falsework".












H. Should areas of defective concrete become apparent on the striking of the formwork, the Contractor
must immediately inform the CLIENT and submit a written method statement of his proposals to rectify
the problem. Remedial works may only be undertaken following authorization by the CLIENT.


END OF SECTION




















































DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03 15 00 Concrete Accessories


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.0 Scope

A. This sub-division contains specification for materials and workmanship for the
following:

1. Water stops

2. jointing materials and covers

3. inserts, ties and fixings

4. Worked finishes on concrete after casting.

2.0 Codes of Practice

A. The requirements of part 1.2 of sub-division 03 30 00 - CAST IN PLACE
CONCRETE are applicable to this sub-division with the following additions.

3.0 Standards

A. Materials and workmanship shall comply with the British standards (BS).

4.0 Definitions

A. Construction joints: construction or day work joints are those joints introduced for
convenience of construction and are formed by placing new concrete against
existing concrete to form a continuous joint.

B. Movement joints: movement joints either formed or induced are those joints designed
into a structure to allow for differential movement and to control cracking in large
areas of cast concrete. They shall comprise:

1. . Formed contraction or expansion joints

2. . Induced contraction joints

3. . Isolation joints

4. . Sliding joints.











PART 2 - MATERIALS

1.0 Water stops

A. Water stops shall be either dumbbell or surface type.

B. Dumbbell water stops shall be of rubber and surface water stops shall be of P.V.C.,
both from approved manufacture.

2.0 Joint filler

A. Joint filler shall be a compressible sheet of selected soft wood and oak fibres
impregnated with a bitumen emulsion.

B. It shall be completely none staining.

C. It will not extrude when compressed and returns to over 80% of its original thickness
after expansion.

3.0 Joint sealer

A. Movement joints shall be sealed with high performance elastomeric sealant to be
approved by the CLIENT.

B. Required primers shall be used in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations.

4.0 Cover strips

A. Cover strips shall be of European or USA make. They shall either of P.V.C. or of
aluminium, to the CLIENT's approval.

B. Mechanical expansion joints shall be approved by the CLIENT. They shall be either
built
in during construction or fixed afterwards.


























PART 3 - WORKMANSHIP
1.0 Water stops

A. Water stops shall be fixed so that they maintain their correct position during placing
and compacting of the concrete.

B. All junctions and angles shall be formed with purpose made junction pieces.

C. Welds shall be formed on site as recommended by the manufacturer with the correct
equipment for the particular type of water stop.

2.0 Worked finishes on concrete

A. GENERAL

1.


2.


3.


4.

Worked finishes shall be executed such that a uniform finish is achieved over
the entire area to the satisfaction of the CLIENT.

Finishes shall be carried out at the optimum times in relation to setting and
hardening of the concrete.

Sample panels of each finish shall be supplied for the approval of the CLIENT
and no work shall be undertaken until these samples are approved.

Panels shall be stopped to clear margins at perimeters in neat straight
junctions.

B. EXPOSED AGGREGATE FINISH

1. Exposed aggregate finish shall be achieved by one of the following methods:

a. Aggregate transfer - Selected aggregate shall be stuck to the face of
the formwork which, if not plywood, shall be pre-lined with compressed fibreboard; when the
formwork is removed the surface of the concrete shall be brushed down to expose the aggregate.

b. Sand or shot blasting - This method shall employ the use of vacuum
removal techniques or water jet blasting in which the medium is dispersed in the jet of water.

c. Brushing using retarding agent - This method shall only be employed
with the written approval of the CLIENT; the retarder shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Care shall be taken, when placing the concrete, that the retarder is not
damaged or displaced. After removal of the formwork the retarded cement film shall be removed by
brushing followed by washing down from the top.








C. BUSH HAMMERING

1. The least thickness of material shall be removed commensurate with
exposing the aggregate but should approximate 3 mm.

2. Sharp and worn tools shall be used such that the appearance of variation is
avoided.

D. GRINDING AND POLISHING

1.





2.


3.



4.

Grinding and polishing shall be carried out using a computerised heavy duty
grinding polishing machine, electrically operated carborundum stone grinder
incorporating a water feed to the centre of the stone. As soon as the forms
can be removed the surface shall be wetted and the first grind completed.

The cement paste formed by grinding shall be removed periodically by
washing and brushing.

The second grind shall be applied immediately prior to handover and the
whole face brushed down and washed down to remove all loose particles and
paste.

Manual equipment such as terrazzo/marble polishing machines is strictly
forbidden.

E. TAMPED FINISH

1. Surfaces while still green shall be tamped with the edge of a board or beam
to give an even texture of parallel ribs.

F. SCORED FINISH

1. The surface while still green shall be scratched with the tool specified to give
a roughened texture.

G. BRUSHED FINISH

1. Surfaces while still green shall be brushed with a stiff broom or wire brush to
produce a lightly textured finish.

H. WOOD FLOATED FINISH

1. A wood floated shall be used to give an even slightly coarse texture with no
ridges or steps while the concrete is still green.

I. SMOOTH FLOATED OR TROWEL FINISH

1. Surfaces shall be finished by means of steel hand float, skip float or power
float to give a uniform smooth surface with no ridges, steps, trowel marks or
any other blemish.





J. DEWATERED TROWEL FINISH

1. A proprietary vacuum dewatering process shall be applied to the surface in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions immediately after compacting
and the surface floated without delay using sufficient pressure of the hand or
power float to achieve the same finish as in 3.2.9 above.

K. POWER GROUND FINISH TO FLOORS

1. When concrete is sufficiently hard such that sand particles are not torn from
the surface power grind to remove 1 - 2 mm from the surface to give an even
glass paper texture.

2. When complete the surface shall be thoroughly brushed and washed clean.

3.0 Construction joints

A. Construction joints shall be as specified in sub-division 03 30 00 - CAST IN PLACE
CONCRETE

4.0 Movement joints

A. Movement joints shall be carefully constructed in the manner and positions indicated.
Faces shall be true and vertical for the full depth of the joint.

B. Arises shall be sharp unless specified otherwise.

C. Fillers shall completely fill the void and shall be finished flush with adjacent faces.

D. Cover plates shall be securely fixed to straight true lines.

5.0 Crack inducing joints

A. Crack inducing joints whether formed or induced shall be constructed in the manner
and positions indicated.

B. Inserts shall be carefully aligned during casting and cut grooves shall be neatly
executed.

6.0 Mortaises, sinking, etc.

A. Mortises, sinking, etc. shall be formed in the concrete by means of fixing easily
removable inserts prior to casting.

B. Inserts shall be placed such that voids so formed shall have smooth flat faces with no
surface irregularities and shall be suitable for the purpose intended in terms of size
and positioning.


C. No cutting of hardened concrete shall be allowed except with the written approval of
the CLIENT.










PART 4 - DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS


1.0 General

A. Water stops, finishes on concrete, construction joints, movement joints, crack
inducing joints, mortises, sinking, ties, fixings, etc. shall be incorporated in the works
where required and as specified.




END OF SECTION


















































DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
0321 00 - REINFORCEMENT BARS


PART 1 GENERAL

1 .1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Related Work

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section
Section 03 30 00 - CAST-IN PLACE CONCRETE.
Section 03 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMING.
Section 03 15 00 - CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Section 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNITS MASONRY.
Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS.


1 .2 QUALITY CONTROL

A. References

1. General
a. All reinforcement for use in the permanent works shall be specified on the
drawings and shall comply with the British Standards as indicated below.

2. Type of Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall comply with the relevant British Standards as given below:

a.
b.
c.

d.
e.

High yield steel hot rolled deformed bars
High yield steel, cold worked deformed bars
Fabric reinforcement, indented or deformed welded
wires
Cold reduced steel wire
Deformed bars shall have Type 2 bond classification.

BS 4449
BS 4449

BS 4483
BS 4482
BS 4449


B.


C.

D.



E.


Provide the CLIENT with certified copies of mill test reports for reinforcing steel, showing
physical and chemical analysis, minimum 8 weeks prior to commencing reinforcing work.

Inform the CLIENT of proposed source of material to be supplied.

Two copies of certificates verifying that the reinforcement complies with this Specification shall
be given by the CONTRACTOR to the CLIENT in accordance with the British Standard as
appropriate for each consignment of reinforcement from each source.

All testing for reinforcement shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by the CLIENT. The
frequency of testing shall be as set out in BS 4449 or as approved by the CLIENT.








F. LABORATORY TESTING OF REINFORCEMENT


1. Reinforcement testing to be as follows: -
ITEMS TO BE
TESTED
RELEVANT
BRITISH
STANDARD

NUMBER OF TESTS




Minimum number of tests for
certification purposes to be

NOTES


1. Contractor to submit
manufacturer's and/or
supplier's certificates
as proof that material
(EN10002-1) 10 initially prior to 1
st
steel meets BS
fixing then testing as required requirements and is
BS 18 by the CLIENT but not less than representative of
Renforcement BS 4449 2 samples from each bar dia. materials used on site.
BS 4482 per delivery to site. 2. The acceptance criteria
BS 4483 for the reinforcement
(Tests shall include tensile, testing is to be in
bend, re-bend and chemical accordance with the
analysis) relevant British
Standards for the tests
being undertaken.



1 .3 SUBMITTALS

A.


B.





C.

D.

Submit shop drawings including placing of reinforcement in accordance with general conditions
of the Contract.

Indicate on shop drawings, bar bending details, lists quantities of reinforcement, sizes, spacing,
locations of reinforcement and mechanical splices if approved by the CLIENT, with identifying code
marks to permit correct placement without reference to structural drawings. Indicate sizes,
spacing and locations of chairs, spacers and hangers. Prepare reinforcement drawings in
accordance with the CLIENT's instructions.

Detail lap lengths and bar development lengths. Provide tension lap splices where indicated.

Bar Schedules

1.


2.




3.

The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the reinforcement in accordance with BS 8110 and
BS 8666, the information on the Drawings, this Specification, and subsequent
instructions.
The CONTRACTOR shall include for all necessary chairs and spacers, and his price
and rates for steel thus shown shall include for these.



The CONTRACTOR shall prepare reinforcement detail drawings and other relevant
shop drawings on reproducible negatives to the following scales:
Walls and slabs 1:50











Beam and column elevations 1:20
Beam and column sections 1:20 or 1:10
4. Sketches will not be acceptable.
5.

6.

7.




8.
These drawings shall show all openings for services, and upstands or plinths for
equipment and cast-in items.
Bending schedules and reinforcement detail drawings shall be submitted for the CLIENT's
approval. Two weeks shall be allowed for consideration of this initial submission.
The CONTRACTOR shall correct these schedules and resubmit as reasonably required
to ensure a high standard of work. He shall programme his work and submit schedules
for approval allowing time for such verification, rectification and resubmission as
necessary. Such approval shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility for
the accuracy of such schedules.
No concreting shall be allowed to proceed until such time that the drawings and
bending schedules for that particular section of works are approved. Any delay
incurred in obtaining approval shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.

E. Supplementary Drawings

1. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare any additional shop and fabrication drawings and
other details necessary to instruct his staff on the positioning, bending, supporting of
reinforcement and associated works. Two copies of such drawings and details shall be
submitted to the CLIENT with the bar bending schedules.





































PART 2 PRODUCTS

2 .1 MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing steel to standards identified in this section (see 1.2 above)

B. Where reinforcement couplers are specified or are permitted by the CLIENT they shall be used
in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

1. The tensile strength and the fatigue performance of coupled sections of bar should
comply with the relevant British Standard for the type of bar.


C.



D.


Tying Wire: tying wire shall be 1.6mm diameter black annealed mild steel wire. The use of any
other type requires the approval of the CLIENT. The ends of the wire shall be bent back away
from the surface of the member to avoid rust staining.

Spacers: the type of spacer requires the approval of the CLIENT. They shall be of durable
material and shall be designed to avoid corrosion of reinforcement and spalling of concrete.

1.



2.

Concrete spacer blocks shall be made from cement, sand and small size coarse
aggregate. The mix proportions shall match those of the surrounding concrete and the
blocks shall be comparable to the surrounding concrete in strength, durability and
appearance.
The spacer blocks, their positioning and fixing shall be in accordance with good practice
as recommended by the Concrete Society in their publication "Spacers for Reinforced
Concrete"


2 .2 FABRICATION

A.

B.


C.

D.

Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with specified standards.

Obtain the CLIENT's approval for locations of reinforcement splices other than those shown on
placing drawings.

Upon approval of the CLIENT, weld reinforcement in accordance with approved standards.

Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar bending details and
lists.





















PART 3 EXECUTION AND PROTECTION

3 .1 CUTTING AND BENDING

A.






B.


C.

The CONTRACTOR shall cut reinforcement to length and bend it to the shape shown on the
schedules within the dimensional tolerances given in BS 8666. Bars shall be bent cold by the
application of slow steady pressure. Hooks or right angle bends shall be formed where called for by
the schedules and to the dimensions and tolerances specified in BS 8666. In the unlikely event
of temperatures below 5C, in certain locations during the winter months, the rate of bending
shall be reduced if necessary to prevent fracture of the steel.

High tensile bars shall not be bent after placing in the works, unless shown otherwise on the
drawings or specifically approved in writing by the CLIENT.

After bending, bars shall be securely tied together in bundles or groups and legibly labeled as set
out in BS 8666.

3 .2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A.


B.



C.

D.

E.

Place reinforcing steel, as indicated on reviewed approved placing drawings, and in accordance
with specified standards.

Use plain round bars as slip dowels in concrete. Paint portion of dowel intended to move within
hardened concrete with one coat of asphalt paint. When paint is dry, apply a thick even film of
mineral lubricating grease.

Prior to placing concrete, obtain the CLIENT 's approval of reinforcing material and placement.

Ensure cover to reinforcement is maintained during concrete pour.

Protect coated portions of bars with covering during transportation and handling.

3 .3 FIELD TOUCH-UP

A. Not used

3 .4 CLEANING

A.





B.

All reinforcement shall be cleaned to ensure it is free of all oil, dust and deleterious material.
Concrete shall be subsequently placed within 24 hours. Cleaning shall be by wire brushing or grit
or sand blasting to the CLIENT's satisfaction. If blasting is required the blasting medium shall be
clean and salt free. If at any time the CLIENT is not satisfied with the result of mechanical
cleaning he may require the CONTRACTOR to adopt an alternative method.

Water cleaning of reinforcement to remove chloride contamination shall be carried out at the
CLIENT's discretion prior to pouring of concrete. Cleaning water shall comply with specification 03
30 0 0

3 .5 FIXING

A. Reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position within a dimensional tolerance stated in clause
3.12 of this specification.









B.




C.





D.

Unless otherwise agreed by the CLIENT, all intersecting bars shall either be tied together with
1.6mm diameter black annealed mild steel tying wire and the ends of the wire clipped short or
turned into the body of the concrete, or shall be secured with a wire clip of a type agreed by the
CLIENT.
Spacer blocks shall be used for ensuring that the correct cover is maintained to the
reinforcement. Blocks shall be as small as practicable and of a shape agreed by the CLIENT.
Wires cast into the block for tying to the reinforcement shall be 1.6mm diameter annealed mild
steel. Special provisions shall be made where special finishes are required and exposed spacer
blocks are not permitted.

Reinforcement shall be rigidly fixed so that no movement can occur during concrete placing. Any
fixings made to the formwork shall not be within the space to be occupied by the concrete being
currently placed.

3 .6 SPLICES
A. No splices shall be made in the reinforcement except where shown on the Drawings or agreed
by the CLIENT. Splice lengths shall be as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise directed by
the CLIENT.

1. Mechanical splices shall not be used unless the CLIENT agrees otherwise in writing.


3 .7 MESH FABRIC

A. Sheets of steel mesh fabric reinforcement shall overlap each other by at least twice the wire
spacing in the direction of the lap or as shown on the Drawings and shall be securely fastened at
the ends or edges.

3 .8 WELDING

A.

Reinforcement shall not be welded except where required by the Contract or agreed by the
CLIENT. If welding is employed, the procedures shall be as set out in BS 2640 for gas welding
or BS 7123 for metal arc welding. Full strength butt welds shall only be used for steel complying
with BS 4449. If high yield deformed bars are to be welded they shall have a carbon equivalent
of the steel less than 0.51%, and a nitrogen content less than 0.007%

3 .9 PROTECTION HANDLING AND STORAGE

A.





B.


C.

The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that reinforcement left exposed in the Permanent Works shall
not suffer distortion, displacement or other damage. When it is necessary to bend protruding mild
steel reinforcement temporarily, the radius of the bend shall not be less than four times the bar
diameter. Such bends shall be carefully straightened before concrete placing continues, without
leaving residual kinks or damaging the concrete round them.

Reinforcement shall be stored on site in racks within a building enclosure at a minimum of
150mm above the ground and shall be protected from wind-blown dust, sand and sea salts.

Reinforcement shall also be protected from the weather. Any reinforcement which has become
corroded or pitted to an extent which in the opinion of the CLIENT will substantially affect its
properties or its long term durability shall be removed from site.









3.10 CONTACT BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS

A. Where concrete members contain galvanized or stainless steel reinforcement, or embedded
items as well as ordinary uncoated mild or high-yield steel reinforcement, then contact between
dissimilar metals shall be prevented, if necessary by inserting electrically insulating material
between them.

3.11 STARTER BARS





3.12

A.


COVER

A.




B.

Starter bars shall be protected from wind-blown dust, sand and sea salts by wrapping with
approved means.



The required cover specified on the Drawings is the nominal cover. Nominal cover is the design
depth of concrete cover to all steel reinforcement, including links (stirrups). The sizes of spacers
and the dimensions of all reinforcement shall be based on this nominal cover. The fixing of
reinforcement and formwork shall also be such as to maintain the nominal cover.

The actual concrete cover to all steel reinforcement shall not be less than the required nominal
minimum cover minus 5mm.

1. Where reinforcement is located in relation to only one face of a member (e.g. a straight
bar in a slab) the actual concrete cover shall be not more than the required nominal
cover plus:
5mm on bars up to and including 12mm size.
10mm on bars over 12mm up to and including 25mm size,
15mm on bars over 25mm size.



C.




D.
Cover shall be maintained to all embedded fixings, conduits, etc., and at all chases and
pockets.

Spacers, and chairs, together with such other supports as may be necessary, shall be used to
maintain the reinforcement in its correct position. In a member where the nominal cover is
dimensioned to the links, spacers between the link and the formwork shall be the same
dimension as the nominal cover.

The position of reinforcement shall be checked before and during concreting, particular attention
being paid to the position of top reinforcement in cantilever sections.

3.13 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A.


B.


C.

All embedded items shown on the drawings shall be fixed in the positions shown within the
specified tolerances.

Where this necessitates the modification or displacement of the reinforcement the
CONTRACTOR's proposals for such work shall be approved by the CLIENT.

Embedded items shall not be supported by welding to reinforcement.











3.14 DOWEL BARS

A.


B.

Unless specified otherwise, dowel bars shall be straight round smooth mild steel bars complying
with BS 4449. The free end shall be sawn and free from burrs or other irregularities.

Where shown on the Drawings, dowel bars shall be de-bonded with an approved de-bonding
compound or proprietary dowel bar sleeve. The CLIENT may require the CONTRACTOR to
demonstrate the efficiency of the method of de-bonding by carrying out the test described below.

1.

The average bond stress on de-bonded bars cast into concrete specimen and
subjected to pull out tests at 7 days shall not exceed 1.4MN/sq.m and the total
movement of the dowel bar relative to the concrete shall be not less than 0.25mm at the
stress. The concrete specimens shall be 150mm x 150mm in section and 450 mm long
and made with the same mix proportions as used in the Works. The number of tests will
be at the CLIENT's discretion.

C. Compressible Caps

1. Caps shall be securely fixed and shall permit free movement of one end of the bar.


D. Workmanship

1. Dowel bars shall be rigidly supported so that they are correctly aligned.







END OF SECTION






























DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE


1.0 GENERAL

A.




B.


Introduction
This specification provides the requirements for the receiving, placing, and coating of cast-in-
place concrete.

Section Includes
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.

C. Reference Standards

1. BS or American Standards, as mentioned but not limited to the following :-


BS 12, BS EN 197-1
BS EN 197-1
BS 410-1: 2000
BS 812
BS 882


Portland Cement
GGBFS
Specification for Test Sieve
Specification for Testing Aggregates
Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete
BS 1881
















BS 3148
BS 4449
Part 5


BS EN 12350-1: 2000
BS EN 12350-2: 2000
BS EN 12350-3: 2000
Part 106


BS EN 12350-6: 2000


Part 108 to Part 113
Part 124
Methods of Testing Hardened Concrete for Other Than
Strength
Methods of Sampling Fresh Concrete
Methods of Testing Fresh Concrete
Method for Determining of Vebe Time
Methods for Determination of Air Content of Fresh
Concrete
Method for Determination of Density of Compacted Fresh
Air
Methods of Making & Curing Test Specimens
Analysis of Hardened Concrete
Tests for Water for Making Concrete
Carbon Steel Bars for Reinforcement of Concrete
BS 8666-2000 Bending Dimensions and Scheduling of Bars for the
Reinforcement of Concrete
BS EN ISO 4066
BS 4483 Steel Fabric for the Reinforcement of Concrete









BS EN 196
BS EN 934-2 : 2001


ASTM C 94/BS 5328
BS 5975



Methods of Testing Cement
Accelerating Admixtures, Retarding Admixtures and
Water Reducing Admixtures (Metric Units)
Ready Mixed Concrete
Code of Practice for False work
BS 8110
BS 8110
BS 8110


ASTM C 87
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
The Structural Use of Concrete
Code of Practice for Special Circumstances
Design Charts for Singly Reinforced Beams, Doubly
Reinforced Beams and Rectangular Columns
Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine
Aggregate on Strength of Mortar
ASTM C 142


ASTM C 150
ASTM C 289
Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Aggregates
Specification for Portland Cement
Test for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method)


2. Concrete work shall conform to all requirements of BS 8110, Structural Use of Concrete.

D. Submissions
Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples, showing all locations, markings, quantities, materials,
sizes, shapes and finishes, indicating all methods of connecting, anchoring, fastening and
attaching to the work of other Sections.

Submit shop drawings as specified in Contract documents.

1. Formwork

a- Designing of form work is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR.

b- Form drawings showing sleeves required through floors and roof to be submitted
for CLIENT approval prior commencing work of placing sleeves.

c- Submit shop drawings of formwork components which affect the final appearance
of architectural concrete

d- Design formwork, including supports, so that the final concrete structure is within
the dimensional tolerance specified. Allow for the worst combination of self
weight, formwork weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete
weight, and construction and wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic
effects caused by placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete.










2. Reinforcement and Bar Lists

a.






b.






c.



d.


3. Materials

Detailed R.C. shop drawings and bar bending schedules showing the size,
spacing, location, quantities and details of reinforcing steel in accordance with
approved Design drawings and specifications and prepared according to BS
8666 shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to CLIENT for
review and approval. Reinforcing steel shall be detailed and fabricated in
accordance with BS 4466.

Include necessary plans and elevations of walls and beams on the diagrams,
drawn to a scale of not less than 1:50 metric. Sections shall be drawn to a
scale of not less than 1:20 metric. Placing drawings shall include sufficient
details, dimensions and field instructions to permit complete setting of all
reinforcement without reference to the design drawings and shall show
location and lengths of lap splices.

Shop Drawings shall show all proposed construction joint locations and pour
sequences, location and size of all sleeves and openings through concrete
elements required for all trades and be submitted to CLIENT for approval.

No work shall commence until shop drawings have been approved by CLIENT.

Formwork
a. Submit representative samples of material to be used for formwork for
approval by CLIENT. Use only approved material for construction of formwork.

b. Submit formwork ties for approval by CLIENT.

Reinforcement

a.



b.


c.

Submit to CLIENT for each consignment of reinforcement from each source,
certificates verifying that the reinforcement complies with the requirements
of this Section, in accordance with Clause 15 of BS 4449: 1997 Amd. 1

In addition and upon request by CLIENT, submit copies of the reinforcement
manufacturer's routine test records.

CLIENT may ask CONTRACTOR to test the steel from CLIENT approved
laboratory at not additional cost to CLIENT.


E. Protection

1. Do not pile or store materials on slabs, or wheel or handle materials over such slabs until
the concrete has reached at least 50% of the design strength, and then only if the forms
and shores remain in place. Do not strip slabs with such loads applied. Do not apply loads
to unsupported slabs until the design strength is reached. In any case do not load in
excess of the design load.











2. Protect all exposed concrete work from staining and/or physical damage to structural
integrity or finish.

3. Replace damaged work as directed by CLIENT.




























































2.0 PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION

A. Materials for Concrete

1. Cement
General Requirement

The cement to be used throughout the work shall be Portland cement and shall be as
described under one of the following headings:
a. Cement complying with either BS EN 197-1:2000 or ASTM C150 Type I but containing not
less than 7% and not more than 12% by weight of tri-calcium aluminates (C
3
A).


b. 45% of Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBS) complying to BS EN 197-1 or
equivalent approved to be used with 55% of Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) ASTM
Type I, recommended for sub structure, unless otherwise mentioned in the soil report.

Any consignment of cement not used within six (6) months for date of manufacture will not be
allowed to be used in the Works.


Additional Requirement

In addition to the requirements in 2.1.1 for cement to be used in permanent works the acid
soluble alkali level measured as (Na
2
O + 0.658 K
2
O) shall not exceed 0.6% by weight.

Also the heat of hydration at 7 days in accordance with ASTM C-186 shall not exceed 290 kJ/kg
and the fineness (specific surface) in accordance with BS4550 shall not be less than 280 m
2
/kg.

Cement shall be free flowing and free of lumps. It shall be supplied in the manufacturer's sealed
and unbroken bags or in bulk.

Cement which has become hardened or lumpy or fails to comply with this Specification in any
way shall be removed from the site.

High alumina cement shall not be used.

Any consignment of cement not used within six (6) months for date of manufacture will not be
allowed to be used in the works.

2. Admixtures

a. Admixtures may be added to concrete in accordance with BS EN 934-2: 2001 to
provide the following specific qualities required or permitted by this Section:

- Workability

- Controlled rate of handling

b. Calcium chloride and chloride based admixtures shall not be used.









c. Admixtures shall not, individually or in combination, increase the shrinkage of the
concrete compared with a reference specimen of the same mix not containing
admixture.

d. Both the amount of admixture to be added and the method of use require approval by
CLIENT.

e. Air entrainment agents shall be such that the air content can be maintained within the
limits specified, even if the mixing time is extended to 30 minutes.

f. If two (2) or more admixtures are proposed for use in any one (1) mix, the
manufacturers of each shall be consulted and their advice and recommendations shall
be forwarded to CLIENT as evidence of suitability.

g.. The suitability of admixture shall be verified by trial mixes.

h. Admixtures shall be stored to avoid deterioration and segregation

i. Admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
unless directed otherwise by the CLIENT.

Contractor must submit three brands of product's samples for approval of CLIENT


3. Aggregates:

Normal weight Aggregates meeting the requirements of BS 882 shall be used in this project. The
following requirements to be met:
a. Maximum size of aggregates shall be: 20mm
b. Chloride: The maximum water soluble chloride ion content by weight of aggregate
shall be as follows:
20 mm aggregate: .005% 10
mm aggregate: .004%
Sand: .007%

c. Coarse Aggregate

- Specific gravity, saturated surface dry, not less than 2.59%
- Water absorption, for aggregates used in concrete above 2.5%
finish floor level of Ground Floor, not more than
- Water Absorption, for aggregate in foundations or 2.0%
concrete cast on the ground:
Nominal Size of Aggregate Maximum Permissible Shells Content

20 mm 05% 10
mm 15%
Shape Properties:
Elongation index maximum 25.0%








Flakiness index maximum 25.0%
- Silt, clay and dust, not to exceed, by weight: 1.0%
- Clay lumps (tested in accordance with ASTM C 142): max. 2.0% -
Sulfates, expressed as SO3, by weight, not to exceed 0.3%
- Soundness, maximum loss (in percent by weight) after five (5) cycles in
Sulphate solution:
- Sodium Sulfate: 10.0%
- Magnesium Sulfate: 15.0%
- Aggregates that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement in an
amount sufficient to cause excessive expansion of concrete shall not be used.
- Grading for Coarse Aggregates shall be within the limits given in the following
table (percentage by weight passing):

BS 410 Test Sieve
Mm
75.0
63.0
37.5
20.0`
14.0
10.0 5.0
2.36



20 mm
-
-
100
85-100
-
0-25
0-5
-

Nominal Size of Single Sized Aggregate
10 mm
----
100
85-100
0-25 0-5

LIMITS FOR PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL
PROPERTIES OF AGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE


Item


Requirement


Test Methods


Permissible Limits
No.
1

Grading
BS 812
Part 103 (dry)
ASTM Fines
Standard
Coarse
Standard
2 Material finer than 0.075 mm. Part 103 (wet)
Natural, uncrushed/Crushed Max. 3% Max. 1% Max.
Crushed rock Max. 5% 3%
3 Clay lumps and friable particles C142 Max. 3% Max. 2% 4
Lightweight pieces C123 Max. 0.5% Max. 0.5%
5 Organic impurities C40 Colour standard not darker than
Plate No. 3
6 Water absorption Part 2 C128/C127 Max. 2.3% Max. 2%
7 Specific gravity (apparent) Part 2 C128/C127 Min. 2.6 Min. 2.6
8 Shell content: Part 106
Coarser than 10mm Max. 3%
Between 5mm and 10mm Max. 3%
Between 2.36 mm and 5mm Max. 3%
Finer than 2.36mm









9 Particle shape:
Flakiness index Part 105.1 Max. 25%
Elongation index Part 105.2 Max. 25%
10 Acid soluble chlorides: Part 117
A. Reinforced concrete with SRPC
OPC and MSRPC Max. 0.06% Max. 0.03%
B. Mass Concrete with SRPC Max. 0.06% Max. 0.03%
OPC/MSRPC
C. Pre-stressed Concrete and Max. 0.06% Max .0.03%
Steam cured structural Concrete Max. 0.06% Max. 0.03%

Max. 0.01%
Max. 0.01%
11 Acid soluble sulphates Part 118 Max. 0.3% Max. 0.3% 12 Soundness
(MgSO
4
) Part 121 C88 Max. 10% Max. 10%
13 Mechanical strength:
10% fines value (soaked) Part 111 Min. 100 kN Impact value Part 112
Max. 30% Los Angeles abrasion C131/C535
Max. 30%
14 Drying shrinkage Part 120 Max. 0.05%
15 Moisture Content Part 109

16 Potential Reactivity:
of aggregates Chemical Method C289 Not reactive Not reactive
of cement aggregates combination C227 6 month expansion 0.1% Max.

d. Fine Aggregate

- Organic impurities: aggregates, when subject to colorimetric test producing a color
darker than the standard shall be rejected. However, such aggregates may be used,
provided that the relative strength of mortar calculated in accordance with ASTM C
87 is not less than 95% at 7 and 28 days.

Silt, clay and dust, by weight, not to exceed the following:
- Natural sand or crushed gravel: 3%
- Crushed rock 5%

Clay lumps (tested in accordance with ASTM C 142): maximum 3%.

Sulfate, expressed as SO3, by weight, not to exceed:

- for aggregates in concrete when 0.3%
Ordinary Portland Cement is used;
- for aggregates in concrete when 0.4%
Sulfate Resisting Cement is used;










Soundness, maximum loss (in percent by weight) after five (5) cycles in Sulphate
solution with:
- Sodium Sulphate: 10.0%
- Magnesium Sulphate: 15.0%

Aggregates that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in-the cement in an amount
sufficient to cause excessive expansion of concrete shall not be used.

Grading percentage, by weight, passing sieve No. 100, shall not exceed the following:

- Natural Sand 10.0% -
Crushed Rock: 15.0%

Drying shrinkage of aggregate shall not exceed: 0.05%

e. Sampling:

Aggregates shall be sampled in accordance with BS 812.

Recycled Aggregates

1
st
option at least 15% of all aggregates used on site (by volume), in structural and non-
structural applications are recycled.

2
nd
option only recycled aggregates and/or aggregates from industrial waste by-products
are used as base, sub-base or backfill.

4. Water:

Water shall be fresh, clean, cool and free from salt and other impurities and shall be
tested in accordance with BS 3148 and comply with requirements of Appendix A of
BS 3148.

B. Proportioning

1. General
a.



b.
c.
Concrete for all parts of the work shall be of the specified quality and capable
of being placed without excessive segregation or bleeding. When hardened,
concrete shall develop all characteristics required by these Specifications.
The mix shall have not more than specified Water Cement Ratio.
Submit mix designs for approval. Provide necessary evidence that the mix
design will provide the desired properties.


2. Design of Concrete Mixes















a.


General
1. The grades of concrete shall be shown on the Drawings to be
submitted for CLIENT approval, by reference to the 28-day
characteristic compressive strength in N/mm
2
and, when necessary,
followed by the nominal size of the coarse aggregate in millimeters - for
example C40- 20. Minimum Compressive Strength of cube at 28 days
for reinforced concrete shall be 40 N/mm
2
.
2. Design of mixes shall comply with the requirements of BS 5328. The
Contractor's mix proposals for each mix require the CLIENT'S approval.
Existing data provided as evidence of satisfactory previous
performance shall include the workability and water/cement ratio.
During production the Contractor shall inform the CLIENT of all
changes in sources of materials or cement content. Trial mixes shall be
made initially as well as before any substantial change is made. No
changes shall be made without CLIENT'S approval.

b.





c.

Cement Content
The cement content of all structure concrete elements shall not less than 400
kg/ cu m unless directed otherwise. Cement content in excess of 420 kg/cu m
shall not be used without the specific approval of CLIENT.

Water/Cement Ratio
The maximum free water/cement ratio shall be 0.40 unless prior approval of
CLIENT is sought. Free water/cement ratio shall be as defined in BS 5328 Part 4
Clause 3.14.2.


3. Durability




a.


b.


c.


d.



e.




The water-cement ratio for any concrete shall not exceed 0.40 by mass,
except for piles, for which the upper limit shall be 0.35.
The total water-soluble chloride content by mass of cementing material in the
concrete mix before exposure shall not exceed 0.10%.
The total acid-soluble sulfate content by mass of cementing material in the
concrete mix before exposure and expressed as SO3 shall not exceed 3%.
Concrete shall have a minimum cementing materials content of 400 kg/m
3
.
Cement content in excess of 420 kg/m3 shall not be used without CLIENT's
specific approval.
Concrete used in piles shall contain a minimum cementing materials content of
400 kg/ m3
Following are the durability criteria required for various Concrete mixes to be
used in the PROJECT:
Chloride Permeability to AASHTO- T-277







Maximum Charge Pass (Coulombs)
Type of Structure
At 28 Days
Superstructure 3,000
Substructure 1,500



Water Permeability to DIN 1048
Type of Structure Water penetration at 28 days
Superstructure 15 mm
Substructure 8 mm



30 Minute Absorption to BS 1881 Part 122
Type of Structure Water absorption at 28 days
Superstructure 3 .5 %
Substructure 2.5 %



4. Porosity:

The values of porosity should be not exceeding 12% @ 28 days.


5. Alkali Aggregate Reactions:

It is the responsibility of the Contractor to demonstrate to CLIENT that the alkali
receptivity of the complete concrete matrix will be stable and not liable in the future to
breakdown and lose strength.
The alkali content (Na
2
O and N
2
O) of the concrete shall not exceed 3kg/m
3
.


6. Total Alkali Content:

The alkali content (Na
2
O and K
2
O) of the concrete shall not exceed 3 kg/m
3
.



7. Air Content
a.


A.



B.
The average allowable air content of the fresh concrete (other than those from
air-entraining agents) shall be 1%.
The air content determined from individual samples taken at the point of
placing the concrete and representative of any given batch of concrete shall be
within 1.5% of the required value
The average air content from any four (4) consecutive determinations from
separate batches shall be within 1.0% of the required value.







C. Formwork

1. Fabrication:
Erect formwork in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.




2. Deflection and Camber
a.



b.
Make allowance for any deflection of formwork that is likely to occur during
construction, so that the hardened concrete conforms to the specified lines and
levels.
In the absence of any specified camber, the soffit of all beams more than five
(5) meters in span shall be laid to a camber where:
CAMBER = (SPAN)2
7200 X DEPTH
3. Removal of Forms
Forms and shoring in the formwork used to support the weight of concrete in beams,
slabs and other structural members shall remain in place until the concrete has
reached a minimum of 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Unless specified
otherwise, the following minimum periods shall apply to the removal of formwork.
Removal of Form work from Cold Weather Normal Weather
(Below 60
0
F or (above 60
0
F or 160


Sides of beams, slabs, walls and
Columns (unloaded)
Slab soffit forms (props left under)
Beams soffit forms (props left under)
Props to slab
Props to Beams
16
0
C)
72 hours


14 days
14 days
18 days
21 days
C)


48 hours


7 days
7 days
11 days
14 days



4. Re-shoring:
While re-shoring is under way, no live load shall be permitted on the new
construction.

5. Stripping of Formwork:
General
The CLIENT shall be notified in writing before the removal of any formwork.










Concrete shall be thoroughly wetted as soon as the forms are first loosened and shall
be kept wet during the removal operations and until the curing media is applied.
Potable water supply with hoses having the fine fog spray attachments shall be ready
at each removal location before operations are recommended.
The period of time elapsing between the placing of the concrete and the striking of the
formwork shall be approved by CLIENT after consideration of the loads likely to be
imposed on the concrete and shall in any case be not less than the periods shown in
section 2.3.3 above.
Re-shoring to beams and slabs shall be placed immediately after stripping formwork.

D. Reinforcement

1. Reinforcing Bars:
All reinforcement should be as per specifications of this section would be permitted to
be used for this PROJECT.

a.



b.


c.



2. Tying Wire:

All reinforcing bars shall be Type 2 high yield deformed steel bars complying
with British Standard 4449, with a characteristic strength not less than 460
MPa.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to British Standard 4483 and shall be
supplied in flat sheets.
Reinforcing steel (uncoated) shall be obtained from one of the approved
manufacturers.
Tying wire shall be 1.6 mm diameter black annealed mild steel wire or other type
approved by CLIENT.


3. Bar Support:
Side-form spacers used in walls, piles, columns and beams shall be plastic or another
dielectric material approved by CLIENT.
4. Placing:
a.




b.
c.
Support reinforcing steel in such a manner as to ensure that the spacing and
cover of the reinforcement is accurately maintained, taking into account the
proposed methods of placing and consolidation the concrete, and the weight of
the reinforcement supported.
Only tie the reinforcement and do not weld it in place.
For flat slabs, provide support bars for reinforcement and show on shop
drawings.










E. Slump of Concrete

1.



2.




F. Tolerances

Slump tests shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C 143.
Provide slump testing equipment on the site, readily available for this testing.
Concrete with excessive slump shall be removed from the site.
Unless otherwise permitted or specified, the concrete shall be proportioned and
produced to have a slump of 125 mm +/- 25 mm or less if consolidation is to be by
vibration, and 150 mm +/- 25 mm or less if consolidation is to be by methods other
than vibration.


1. Variation in Concrete:

a. Variation from the plumb:
In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, and in arises:
- in any storey or 6 m max 6 mm
- in 12 m or more 10 mm
For exposed corner columns, control joint grooves, and other conspicuous
lines:
- in any storey or 6 m max 6 mm
- in 12 m or more 12 mm

For elevator shafts and beams framing stair wells:
- in any storey or 6 m max 6 mm
b. Variation from the level or from the grade indicated on the approved drawings:
Floor level around perimeter of the building, at stairs and elevators, and similar
critical locations, shall not vary by more than 10 mm.
In floors, ceilings, beam soffits and in arises maximum difference between any
two (2) points:
- in 3 m 6 mm
- in any bay or 6 m max. 10 mm -
in 12 m or more 20 mm
For exposed lintels, sills, horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines:
- in any bay or 6 m max. 6 mm
- in 12 m or more 20 mm
c. Variation in plan dimensions from the established building grid lines to related
columns, walls and partitions:
- in any bay or 6 m max. 16 mm
- in 12 m or more 20 mm
d. Variation in the size and location of sleeves, floor and wall openings 6 mm.









e. Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams, and in the
thickness of slabs and walls:
- minus 6 mm
- plus 12 mm
f. Footings
Variation in plan dimensions:
- minus 12mm
- plus 50 mm
Misplacement or eccentricity:
- 2% of the footing width in the direction of misplacement but not more
than 50 mm.
Variation in thickness:
- Decrease: 5% of thickness but not more than 25 mm
- Increase: -
g. Variation in Steps
In a flight of stairs:
- rise 3 mm
- tread 3 mm
In consecutive Steps:
- rise 2 mm
- tread 3 mm


2. Welding of Reinforcement:

When welded splices are specified on the Engineering drawings, the welding shall
conform to AWS D1.4. Each rebar to be welded must be physically tested to AWS
D1.4 and the weld procedure must be reviewed and approved by the
CONTRACTOR.

Splices in welded wire fabric shall be made by lapping a minimum of one mesh plus
50 mm but not less than 300 mm.

G. Joints and Embedded Items

1. Construction Joints
a. Where construction joints other than those indicated on drawings are required,
locate in consultation with CLIENT.
b. The maximum distance between construction joints in walls shall not exceed
12 m, and in slabs 25 m or as agreed by the CLIENT.













c.



d.


e.



f.



2. Control Joints:

Unless agreed otherwise for specific locations by CLIENT, provide shear keys
in all construction joints. Construction of shear keys shall be as detailed on
structural drawings.
Construction joints shall be straight and plumb unless otherwise agreed to by
CLIENT for specific conditions.
Install water-stops in horizontal and vertical construction joints in perimeter
foundation walls at or below grade. Water-stops shall be continuous
throughout length of joint.
Unless otherwise detailed on the structural drawings, reinforcement shall be
continuous through construction joints.
In slab on grade floor, form or saw-cut control joints as detailed. Where "diamonds" or
other isolation joints are shown to be constructed around columns, place after the
floor has been concreted and saw-cuts have been made.
3. Expansion/Contraction Joints:

a. Prior to commencing work, submit shop drawings indicating installation details,
types of materials and their location of Expansion/Contraction Joints, for
CLIENT's review.

b. Provide Fire Barrier, Fire Barrier caulking, and Fire Resistant installation to
ensure a minimum two (2) hour fire separation, as per CLIENT's approval. Also,
provide in addition to the above a twelve (12) gauge (approx. 2.5 mm) galvanized
steel plate anchored only to one side of construction elements.

c. Provide joint filler conforming to ASTM D1752-96 and AASHTO M153-92 for
recovery and extrusion. The joint filler shall be non absorbent, semi-rigid, cellular
polyethylene with a nominal density of 60 kg/m
3
. It shall have recovery of 98%
after 50% compression and a minimum compressive strength of 0.15 N/mm2
when tested in accordance with ASTM D3575. It shall have a water absorption of
less than 0.05% by volume when tested in accordance with ASTM D3575 and be
resistant to weathering and chemical attack.

d. Joint sealant shall conform to the provisions of ACI 504R.

e. Joint sealant materials shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1190 for
horizontal joint, or ASTM D2628 for both vertical and horizontal joints.

f. For expansion and isolation joints the sealant shall be self-leveling 2-component
polyurethane.

g. For control and construction joints the sealant shall be a corrosion resistant
2-component resin hardener for joints cut with soft cut saws.








4. Isolation Joints:
Provide isolation joints at required locations as approved by CLIENT. Material for
isolation joint to be Cork Core, size to suite joint width and sealed at floor and wall
joints, as per CLIENT's approval.

5. Water-stops:
Water-stops for control joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
written instructions. Locations of control joints shall be as indicated on the
Engineering drawings.
Field splices for synthetic rubber water-stops shall be vulcanized or mechanical, using
stainless steel parts or shall be made with a rubber splicing union of the same stock
as the water-stop. Field splices for polyvinyl-chloride water-stops shall be performed
by heat sealing the adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's written
recommendations. All joints shall develop water tightness equal to that of the
continuous water-stop material.
H. Production of Concrete


1. Use ready-mix concrete throughout. All site-mixed concrete will be rejected.

2. Tempering and Control of Mixing Water:
At no time shall water be added to the concrete after it has left the mixer. Use only
high range water reducing admixtures (super plasticizers) for slump adjustment.

3. Hot Weather Concreting:

a.


b.


c.

Concreting shall not be allowed when the ambient air temperature exceeds
38 C.
In hot weather, take suitable precautions to ensure that the temperature of
fresh concrete as placed does not exceed 30 C.
Transporting, placing and finishing of concrete shall be done as quickly as
practicable during hot weather. Elapsed time between batching and placing
shall not exceed for concrete using only OPC shall be 120 minutes, unless
permitted by CLIENT. CONTRACTOR shall select such admixtures which
shall neither affect concrete properties nor delay setting time. Elapsed time
between batching and placing for concrete using combination of GGBS and
OPC, of
180 minutes can be accepted
















3.0 EXECUTION

A. Preparation for Placing Concrete

Before placing concrete, check that all forms are rigid and structurally safe, and that all
reinforcing steel, formwork, sleeves, anchor bolts and other items are installed in accordance
with the drawings and specifications. Ensure that all trades have checked the security and
location of all components required in the concrete by those trades.
B. Depositing


1. Notify CLIENT at least 24 hours before each day's operation of placing concrete.
2. Convey concrete form the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent:
a. The separation or loss of ingredients. Chutes, if used, shall be rounded in
cross-section and have a minimum diameter of eight (8) times the maximum
aggregate size.
b. Displacement of rebar and/or mesh from their specified location.
3. Do not deposit any concrete in the work which has partly hardened or which has been
contaminated with foreign matter.
4. Cast footings, beams and slabs with their full design depth in one operation. In up stand
beams, stepped footings and similar details cast the upper portion as soon as stiffening of the
lower portion will permit. Remove any free water or laitance from the lower portion before the
subsequent layer of concrete is placed.
5. Do not exceed 1.5 m for the free vertical drop of the concrete unless special measures are
taken to prevent segregation.
6. Unless otherwise agreed by CLIENT, consolidate concrete including slabs on grade in place by
means of internal vibrators.

7. When concrete is being placed in deep members (such as walls and footings) vibrators shall be
inserted and withdrawn vertically, and shall not be used to flow concrete into final position.
They shall be lowered the full lift of concrete into the lift below, so as to ensure blending of the
concrete in the two (2) lifts.
8. Apply vibrators systematically and at such spacing that the zones of influence overlap. The
vibration shall be of sufficient duration and intensity to compact the concrete thoroughly, but
shall not be continued so as to cause segregation. Do not over-vibrate.
9. Keep one spare vibrator for every three (3) vibrators in use, in case of breakdown.
C. Curing and Protection


Methods of curing and protection shall comply with the guidelines given in ACI 305R-99,
together with the additional requirements contained within the following paragraphs:

1. Protect and cure concrete in such a manner as to prevent evaporation of moisture from the
concrete and injury to the surface.







2. Immediately after completion of placement and finishing of concrete surfaces, curing shall
commence in the form of a complete covering of polyethylene sheeting. As soon as the
concrete has stiffened sufficiently (after not more than 24 hours), the polyethylene sheet shall
be removed and the surface covered with absorptive mats of fabric kept continuously wet. The
polyethylene sheeting shall be replaced to reduce evaporation from the fabric with additional
water being introduced frequently beneath the polyethylene to keep the fabric continuously wet.
This curing shall continue for a minimum of fourteen (14) days. Water used to keep the mats
moist shall meet the requirements of BS EN 1008:2002.
3. Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of (14) days. For concrete incorporating cement
replacements such as Micro silica, this period shall be increased to (17) days minimum. If a
change in curing method is made during this period, it shall only be done after the concrete is 3
days old.

D. Testing

The following testing services shall be performed by the designated testing agency:

MATERIAL AND REQUIREMENT


WATER AND ICE
Chemical limitations

Compressive strength versus
distilled water standard
Time of set versus distilled water
standard
Chlorides
Sulfates
PH
Total Solids

CEMENT AND CEMENT BLENDS
Standard physical and chemical
properties for Portland Cement
Standard physical and chemical
properties for Ground Granulated
Blast Furnace Slag
Sampling

Mortar cube strength

Heat of dehydration

Chlorides

AGGREGATES

Sampling

TEST METHOD or
BS EQUIVALENT



ASTM C94

ASTM C109

ASTM C191

ASTM D 512
ASTM D 516
ASTM D 1293
AASHTO T26



BS 4550 (See Clause
2.3 E. 3)
ASTM C 595,
ASTM C 989,
BS 146, BS 4247
ASTM C 183

ASTM C 109

ASTM 186

AASHTO T260



ASTM D75 and D3665


TEST FREQUENCY



Every two (2) months during production

Every two (2) months during production

Every two (2) months during production

Every truck delivery or once a week if piped
Every truck delivery or once a week if piped
Every two (2) months during production
Every two (2) months during production



Receipt and review of Manufacturer's Test
Certificate for each delivery of cement to site
Receipt and review of Manufacturer's Test
Certificate for each delivery of cement to site


As required by individual test

Three (3) tests for each batch or shipment

Three (3) tests for each batch or shipment

Three (3) tests for each batch or shipment



As required by individual test









Gradation


Moisture content


MATERIAL AND
REQUIREMENT

Material finer than 75 um


Organic impurities in sand




ASTM C33 and ASTM C
136

ASTM C70 and C 566


TEST METHOD or
BS EQUIVALENT

ASTM C 117 or BS 812


ASTM C40 or BS 1377




Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever is
more frequent.

Twice daily for sands and once daily for stone



TEST FREQUENCY

Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever
is more frequent.

Each month or per 200 m
3
whichever is more
frequent

Organic impurities strength of ASTM C87 Whenever ASTM C40 indicates the presence
mortar of organic impurities

Clay lumps and friable particles


Lightweight pieces


Los Angeles abrasion

ASTM C 142


ASTM C 123


ASTM C 131 or C535

Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever
is more frequent.

Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever
is more frequent.

Every 72 concrete days

Soundness (sodium sulfate at 5 ASTM C88 Every 48 concrete days
cycles)

Specific gravity absorption ASTM C 127 and C 128 Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever
is more frequent.

Alkali reactivity ASTM C 1260 Whenever there is a change in source of
supply

Alkali-aggregate reactivity ASTM C 227 and ASTM C 289 Whenever there is a change in source of
supply

Shell content and particle shape


Chlorides


Sulfates


Mechanical testing

Chemical testing









ASTM C 295 or BS 812


AASHTO T260 or BS 812


BS 812


See Clause 2.4 B.3

See Clause 2.4 B.3

Every two (2) weeks or per 100m
3
whichever is
more frequent.

Every delivery to site and one (1) per week
from site stock pile(s)

Every delivery to site and one (1) per week
from site stock pile(s)

See Clause 2.4 B.3

See Clause 2.4 B.3




ADMIXTURES


Standard physical and chemical ASTM C 494
properties of admixtures

FRESH CONCRETE



Receipt and review of Manufacturer's Test
Certificate for each delivery of admixture to
site


Sampling ASTM C31, C 172, and C 192 See Clause 3.4B
or BS 1881
Slump ASTM C 143 or BS 1881 See Clause 3.4B1
Temperature ASTM C 1064 Every 20m
3
during production
HARDENED CONCRETE


Sampling ASTM C 823 and BS 1881 Part See Clause 3.4.B.2
101

Strength (cubes)

Strength (drilled cores)



Cement content

BS 1881 Part 108

ASTM C 42



ASTM C 85 and C 1084

See Clause 3.4.D

As required if cube tests do not meet
acceptance criteria. No of cores as instructed
by the CLIENT.

As required if cube tests do not meet
acceptance criteria. No of cores as instructed
by the CLIENT.

Rapid chloride permeability test ASTM C 1202 Four (4) tests every month for the first three
(RCPT) months of production than every three (3)
months

Water penetration



Porosity



Water absorption



Total chlorides



Total sulfates

DIN 1048



RILEM CPC 11.3



BS 1881. Part 121



ASTM C 1152 and C 1218



ASTM C 856

Three (3) tests every month for the first three
months of production than every three (3)
months

Three (3) tests every month for the first three
(3) months of production than every three (3)
months.

Three (3) tests every month for the first three
(3) months of production than every three (3)
months.

Three (3) tests every month for the first three
(3) months of production than every three (3)
months.

Three (3) tests every month for the first three
(3) months of production than every three (3)
months.





E. Grout Testing and Frequency


The laboratory SUBCONTRACTOR shall perform the following grout tests at the frequency shown below:-


MATERIAL AND
REQUIREMENT

NON-SHRINK CEMENTATIONS
GROUT

Compressive Strength


Water Penetration


TEST METHOD or
BS EQUIVALENT




ASTM C 109


DIN 1048



TEST FREQUENCY





Nine (9) cubes taken once per day during
grout installation

Once per week during grout installation

Rapid chloride permeability test ASTM C 1202 Once per week during grout installation
(RCPT)


1. Review and/or check-test the Contractor's proposed materials for compliance with
Specifications.
2. Copies of certificates verifying that aggregates used comply with this Specification shall be
furnished to CLIENT for each 500 m3, or weekly, whichever is more frequent.
3. Copies of test certificates for water shall be submitted at the commencement of the Work, and
then monthly.
4. Review and check-test the Contractor's proposed mixture designs when required by CLIENT.
5. Secure production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during the course of the work
and test for compliance with the Specifications.
6. Inspect concrete batching, mixing and delivery operations to be extent deemed necessary by
CLIENT.
7. For each 20 m
3
of concrete placed, or fraction thereof, obtain three (3) samples of concrete at
point of placement. Obtain three (3) concrete samples from pours involving less than 20 m3.
Determine water-soluble chloride ion and acid-soluble sulfate content of concrete for each
sample as per ASTM test procedures. Report on none compliance with the specifications within
three (3) days of obtaining samples. Report shall also include location in structure where
samples were obtained.
8. Review the manufacturer's report for each shipment of cement and reinforcing steel and/or
conduct laboratory tests or spot checks of the materials as received for compliance with the
specifications.
9. For each strength test, report:
- Location in structure where concrete placed.
- Time mixer charged.
- Time of sampling.
- Concrete temperature




- Air temperature. -
Concrete slump. -
Type of failure.
F. Testing Agencies:

1. Testing Services shall be provided by one of the Approved Testing Agencies.
2. The cost of Testing Services shall be borne by the Contractor.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for all testing. Testing laboratories require the CLIENT
approval. The CLIENT shall be permitted access to the laboratories to witness any tests and he
may request further tests if necessary. Two copies of all test results shall be submitted to the
CLIENT within 48 hours.

4. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the CLIENT satisfaction that the production of concrete
cubes and the measurements of slump are being carried out only by persons competent in the
required techniques.

G. Massive Concrete

1. General: Curing, as described in Article 3.5, shall continue for a minimum of fourteen (14)
days.

H. Blinding

1. Blinding concrete and mass concrete to over-excavation shall be grade C20 and shall provide
a dense layer impervious to the fines of subsequent concrete placed thereon.


- END OF SECTION -

































DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 30 50 - CONCRETE FOR WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES



1 GENERAL


1.1 Scope

1.1.1 Compliance with related Sections of contract documents
1.1.2 This Part deals with the concrete to be used for Water/Liquid Retaining Structures.

1.2 General

1.2.1


1.2.2


1.2.3

The requirements of Parts 1 to 3 of Section 03 30 00 of this Specification shall apply
except as varied herein.

Structures for retaining or excluding water or other aqueous liquids shall be watertight
without the use of a separate waterproofing membrane.

The watertight structures shall and constructed in accordance with the requirements of
this Specification and with those of BS 8007. "The Structural Use of Concrete for
Retaining Aqueous Liquids".


1.3 Related Work

1.3.1 Reinforced Concrete: Section 03 30 00.


1.4 Materials

1.4.1 Aggregates

a) The maximum allowable drying shrinkage of aggregates shall be 0.04%.

1.5 Workmanship

1.5.1 General

a)

The CONTRACTOR shall take full responsibility for ensuring that the resulting
construction is completely watertight and free from penetration of moisture.
When, in the opinion of CLIENT, damp patches (and/or leakage of water) in the
finished work are due to failure of the CONTRACTOR to comply with this
Specification, the affected work shall be made good at the Contractors expense.

1.5.2 Joints

a) The maximum length of wall panels placed in one continuous pour between
vertical construction and/or movement joints shall be 5 meters. Where
intermediate crack inducing joints at 5 meters maximum centers are





incorporated in the work then the only restriction of the length of wall panels cast in
one operation shall be the centers of the construction and movement joints
shown on the Drawings or the Contractors capacity for making continuous
pours whichever is the lesser, but shall not exceed 10 m.

b) Kickers shall not be less than 150 mm high and shall be cast monolithically with
the base.

c) The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the approval of the layout and form of all
additional joints other than those shown on approved drawings prior to
commencement of the work.

1.6 Water Bars

1.6.1

1.6.2


1.6.3





1.6.4


1.6.5

Samples of the different types of water bars shall be submitted to CLIENT for approval.

Water bars shall be provided in all construction and day work joints, in addition to any
joint which may be detailed on the drawings.

Before commencement of work, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain CLIENTs approval
of the methods to be used to support and maintain the water-bars in the correct
location while the concrete is placed. Unless indicated otherwise on the drawings all
constructions joints in watertight concrete shall be formed as indicated on the
drawings.

All water bars will be jointed by welding but all multiple joints and special intersections
shall be as manufactured by the supplier.

Care shall be taken at all times to ensure that water bars are not punctured or
damaged in any way and the concrete shall be carefully placed and compacted around
the water bars to ensure dense void free impervious concrete.

1.7 Reinforcement

1.7.1 Reinforcing Bars:

Reinforcement bar must be bought from emirates steel industries and approved by
the CLIENT, which are complying with specifications of this section, would be permitted
to be used for this PROJECT.

a.



b.


c.

All reinforcing bars shall be Type 2 high yield deformed steel bars complying
with British Standard 4449, with a characteristic strength not less than 460
MPa.
Welded wire fabric shall conform to British Standard 4483 and shall be
supplied in flat sheets.
Reinforcing steel (uncoated) shall be obtained from one of the approved
manufacturers.





1.7.2 Tying Wire:






1.7.3




1.7.4

Tying wire shall be 1.6 mm diameter black annealed mild steel wire or other type
approved by CLIENT.
Bar Support:
Side-form spacers used in walls, columns and beams shall be plastic or another
dielectric material approved by CLIENT.


Placing:
a.




b.
Support reinforcing steel in such a manner as to ensure that the spacing and
cover of the reinforcement is accurately maintained, taking into account the
proposed methods of placing and consolidation the concrete, and the weight
of the reinforcement supported.
Only tie the reinforcement and do not weld it in place.
c. For flat slabs, provide support bars for reinforcement and show on shop drawing

1.8

Formwork

1.8.1 The formwork shall comply with the relevant clauses in this specification. Any bolt or
fastening embedded in or passing through the concrete shall be to the approval of
CLIENT and shall not impair the water tightness of the structure. The use of through bolts
and sleeves is strictly prohibited.

1.8.2 All cast-in service holes shall incorporate sleeves with puddle flanges, and temporary
openings for services should incorporate water bars.

1.8.3 Slotted inserts or sockets cast into the structural concrete shall be provided for all
fixings; including services. The cutting of holes in watertight concrete is strictly
prohibited.

1.8.4

Removal of Forms
Forms and shoring in the formwork used to support the weight of concrete in beams,
slabs and other structural members shall remain in place until the concrete has
reached a minimum of 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Unless specified
otherwise, the following minimum periods shall apply to the removal of formwork.


Removal of Form work from Cold Weather Normal Weather
(Below 60
0
F or (Above 60
0
F or


Sides of beams, slabs, walls and
Columns (unloaded)
Slab soffits forms (props left under)
Beams soffits forms (props left under)
Props to slab
Props to Beams
16
0
C)
72 hours


14 days
14 days
18 days
21 days
16
0
C)
48 hours


7 days
7 days
11 days
14 days




1.9 Curing and Protection

Methods of curing and protection shall comply with the guidelines given in ACI 305R-91,
together with the additional requirements contained within the following paragraphs:

1.9.1 Protect and cure concrete in such a manner as to prevent evaporation of
moisture from the concrete and injury to the surface.
1.9.2 Immediately after completion of placement and finishing of concrete surfaces, curing
shall commence in the form of a complete covering of polyethylene sheeting. As
soon as the concrete has stiffened sufficiently (after not more than 24 hours), the
polyethylene sheet shall be removed and the surface covered with absorptive mats of
fabric kept continuously wet. The polyethylene sheeting shall be replaced to reduce
evaporation from the fabric with additional water being introduced frequently beneath
the polyethylene to keep the fabric continuously wet. This curing shall continue for a
minimum of seven (14) days. Water used to keep the mats moist shall meet the
requirements of BS EN 1008:2002.
1.9.3 Concrete shall be cured for a minimum of (14) days. For concrete incorporating
cement replacements such as Micro silica, this period shall be increased to (17) days
minimum. If a change in curing method is made during this period, it shall only be done
after the concrete is 3 days old.


1.10 Testing for Water tightness

1.10.1 General

a)





b)

The Contractors programme and method of construction shall allow for the
satisfactory completion of tests for water tightness on each water retaining or
water excluding structure following completion. Completed parts of structures
may be tested subject to prior approval by CLIENT but no part shall be tested
until all the concrete in a structure has reached the specified strength.

When filling is complete the structure shall be kept full for an absorption period
of seven (7) days before the test commences. On satisfactory completion of
these tests, the water shall be disposed in a manner approved by CLIENT.

1.10.2 Water Excluding Structures

a)

The term Watertight as applied to any wall, floor or other member shall mean
that six (6) calendar months after the completion of the whole of the works
including the superstructure (or 6 calendar months after the cessation of all
pumping of ground water on site, whichever is the latest) there shall be no
seepage of water through any wall, floor or other member nor any damp patch in
excess of 0.50 m
2
in area visible on its internal face. The number of damp
patches shall not exceed 1 for every 200m
2
(or part of 200 m
2
) of the total
internal surface area of walls, floor and other elements of the structure, the
external surfaces of which are in contact with water.

b) These conditions shall be achieved without artificial heating or ventilation.
Seepage of water shall be deemed to exist when sufficient flow occurs to form a
visible pool or film of water on the concrete surface. A damp patch shall be



deemed to exist when the colour of the concrete is darkened by saturation but
no visible pool or film of water is present.

1.10.3 Water Retaining Structures

a)



b)











c)

Covered structures will be deemed watertight if the drop in water level does not
exceed 10 mm at the end of seven (7) days following an absorption period of
seven (7) days.

For uncovered structures, where the plan area of the water does not exceed
1000m2, after the Water Retaining Structure has been filled with water, and at
the end of the absorption period, and open topped steel tank shall be filled with
water to the same depth as the structure and shall be placed in the structure.
This water tank shall have a plan area of at least 1.5m
2
and a capacity of at
least 1.8 m
3
and shall previously have been proved to be watertight. The levels
of the water in the structure and in the tank shall be equalised and recorded at
intervals of 24 hours for 7 days following an absorption period of 7 days. The
structure will be deemed to be watertight if the difference between the water
levels does not exceed 10mm at the end of the 7 days test period.

When the uncovered plan area of the water exceeds 1000 m
2
the Contractor
shall record the wet and dry bulb temperatures, the humidity, the wind speed
and the rainfall at 24 hour intervals for the test period of 7 days following an
absorption period off 7 days. From the information recorded the Contractor shall
calculate the variation in the depth of water due to rainfall, sunshine, etc. during
these 7 days, making allowance for the degree of exposure of the site. The
resultant drop in water level due to leakage along shall then be calculated. The
structure will be deemed to be watertight if the approved calculations show that
the drop due to leakage is equivalent to a depth of less than 10mm. Should the
leakage exceed this amount but is decreasingly daily the structure will be
deemed to be watertight if the limit is achieved in the subsequent 7 days.

1.10.4

Durability


a. The water-cement ratio for any concrete shall not exceed 0.38 by mass.
b. The total water-soluble chloride content by mass of cementing material in the
concrete mix before exposure shall not exceed 0.10%.
c. The total acid-soluble sulfate content by mass of cementing material in the
concrete mix before exposure and expressed as SO3 shall not exceed 3%.
d. Concrete shall have a minimum cementing materials content of 380 kg/m3.
Cement content in excess of 420 kg/m3 shall not be used without CLIENTs
specific approval.
Following are the durability criteria required for various Concrete mixes to be
used in the PROJECT:
Chloride Permeability to AASHTO- T-277
Maximum Charge Pass (Coulombs)
Type of Structure
at 28 Days




All water retaining 1,500
structures


Water Permeability to DIN 1048
Type of Structure Water Permeability at 28 Days
All water retaining 8 mm
structures


30 Minute Absorption to BS 1881 Part 122
30 Minute Absorption
Type of Structure
at 28 Days
Superstructure
2%
Substructure


1.10.5 Porosity
The values of porosity should be not exceeding 12% @ 28 days.




END OF SECTION



DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 35 00 - CONCRETE FINISHING

1. GENERAL

1 .1 Section Includes
1 .1 .1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
1 .1 .2 Finishing and curing of cast-in-place concrete mortar beds & topping for flooring, stairs
and roofs.

1 .2









1 .3



1 .4
Reference Standards


The work under this section shall comply with the following:-

CP 204 for "In-situ floor finish"
CP 202 for "Tile flooring slab flooring"
B5 8203 "Sheet tile flooring"
Related Work


Reinforced Concrete: Section 03 30 00.
Quality Assurance


1 .4 .1



1 .4 .2

Coordination: It is mandatory for the Contractor to fully coordinate concrete work with
the forming trades, the concrete placing trades, the electrical and mechanical trades,
to ensure work of this Section is properly performed in a timely manner.
Mechanical, Electrical and Cast-in Fixings: Contractor to co-ordinate the installation of
all mechanical and electrical pipes, conduits and boxes; all cast-in fixing plates to
ensure the work of this Section is complete.
Concrete to Receive Finishes: Co-ordinate with and refer to Section 07 10 00
Dampproofing and Waterproofing and Division 9 Finishes, for references to finish
substrate of concrete.




















2.

PRODUCTS

Surface Hardener: Pre-mixed, quality control abrasion resistant powder to BS EN 13813 & BS EN
13892-7. Colour as designated by CLIENT from the manufacturer's standard colour range.
Cement: Ordinary Portland gray cement to BS 12.
Sand: Natural sharp angular to BS 882, graded 3 mm down, washed free of chlorides and free of
Sulphate, sampled and tested to BS 812.
Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of Sulphate, Chlorides, Organic and other deleterious matter as
per BS 3148.
Grout Mix for Filling Cracks, Saw Cuts and Tooled Joints: 1 part cement to 2 parts fine concrete sand
wetted with latex additive to provide a thick pour able mix.
Foaming Light Weight Screeds: Light weight screed to be produced by mixing foaming agent into C20
grade concrete conforming to Section 03 30 00 except maximum size of coarse aggregate to be 5 mm.
Add foaming agent to concrete mix in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. Light
weight screeds must have a density of 4500 kg/m3.


Hard trowel screed (free of trowel marks): with monolithic surface floor hardner for Service room floors
(finish-epoxy resin based coating, Refer to Section 09 96 00).
Concrete floors shall be surfaced with a non-metallic monolithic surface floor hardening compounds
containing rust free, hardwearing aggregates. The aggregates shall have a Moh's hardness of not less
than 7. Monolithic surface floor hardening compounds shall possess a minimum compressive strength
of 90 N/mm
2
tested as per BS 1881, Part 116, 1983.

































3. EXECUTION

3.1 Tolerances
Completed surfaces shall not vary more than 6 mm in 3000 mm from dead level, non-
accumulative, except where slopes and slopes to drains are required as shown on the drawings.

3 .2

Mix Proportion
3.2.1 Mix Proportions

The screed should be of C20 concrete using coarse aggregate with max size 10 mm (BS
410 test sieve) and fine aggregate in proper proportion to give required strength of the mix.
Apply Polypropylene fiber 0.6 kg/m
3
as reinforcement. The cement should be batched by
weight, but the sand may be either weight- or volume-batched. Allowance should be
made for the bulking of damp sand. A free water/cement ratio of 0.6 by weight should not
be exceeded.
3 .2 .2











3 .2 .3
Laying, Bay Sizes and Joints

The screed should be laid and thoroughly compacted in bays not exceeding 3.0 - 4.0 m
wide. The length shall be agreed with the CLIENT. Where movement joints (expansion or
contraction joints) occur in the structural slab, these should be carried through the screed
and the bay sizes in the screed adjusted accordingly.
In the presence of conduits and ducts within the thickness of the screed, a strip of
expanded metal (BS 405) or wire netting (BS 1485) not less than 450 mm wide shall be
laid across. There should be a minimum thickness of screed of 20 mm over the top of the
duct.
Curing

As soon as each bay is completed, it must be covered with polythene sheets and subsequently
complete floor shall be cured by pounding the finished floor with water. The curing should
continue for not less than 4 days.
3.3 Floor Finishing

3 .3 .1 Floors shall be finished to a hard, dense surface free from pinholes and imperfections.
3.4 Hardened Concrete

3 .4 .1 Apply surface hardener and finish concrete to surface hardener manufacturer's printed
instructions.
3 .4 .2 Apply surface hardener in two shakes to total coverage of 5 Kg/m sq. of floor surface.




3.5 Control Joints

3 .5 .1 Provide saw-cut or hand edger trowel tooled control joints may be provided wherever
required with prior approval of CLIENT








3 .5 .2 After cutting the joints, clean them and fill with grout mix and strike off flush with surface
of floor after mortar beds have fully cured.
3 .5 .3 Control joints shall be 12 mm filled with filler between each two panels. Size of the
panels shall not exceed 3 m X 3 m.
3.6 Roof Screeds


3 .6 .1


3 .6 .2

Provide lightweight cellular concrete screeds to concrete roof slabs where required to
provide slopes to drains.
Lightweight screed to be produced by mixing foaming agent into C20 grade concrete
conforming to Section 03 30 00 except maximum size of coarse aggregate to be 5 mm.
Lightweight screeds to have a density of 650 - 750 kg/m
3
.
Maximum slump shall be 50 mm.
3.7 Schedule




Surface




Curing
Method




Concrete
Finish




Thickness

Screed topping to receive moist cure power trowel 80 to 100mm
paint, ceramic tile, smooth steel trowel and
waterproofing, roofing, and finish
exposed floors.




- END OF SECTION -






























DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 41 00 - PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE



PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 Summary

Precast Concrete work where required shall consist of furnishing all materials and constructing
structures of the forms, shapes and dimensions directed in accordance with the details shown on the
Drawings and these Specifications.

1 .1 .1 .



1 .1 .2 .

Precast Concrete shall generally follow the provisions of Section 03 30 00 Cast-in- Place
Concrete and shall be manufactured off-site in a facility adequate for the puprose.

Related Sections:

Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, Section 03
30 00 : Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.2 References

1.2.1. Standards References as Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 Submittals

1 .3 .1 .




1 .3 .2 .



1 .3 .3 .

Prior to starting work on the contract the Contractor shall submit for approval by the CLIENT
details of the proposed sources of all materials, and place of manufacture, together with full
documentary evidence that the materials and manufacture will comply with the specification.

Further submissions shall be made for any change of material quality or source and the CLIENT's
approval obtained before the new materials or place of manufacture are used.

Before manufacturing precast concrete components, the Contractor shall provide shop
drawings for the approval of the CLIENT. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate information
including, but not limited the following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

Location of each unit in the completed structure.
Dimensions of each unit including holes, irregularities and thickness of facing unit.
Reinforcing details, including grade of reinforcement.
Concrete strength and details of any admixture proposed.
Joint clearances and clearances between units and structural building framework.
Connection and insert details including materials, size and length of welds, etc.
Identification mark, finish designation number and location of each precast unit.
Location and details of lifting and handling points.
Erection sequence and any special handling instructions or bracing required.




j. Joint sealant details.
k. Special precautions to be taken by other trades affecting work of this Section.

1 .3 .4










1 .3 .5



1 .3 .6

Two copies of each document shall be submitted to the CLIENT for his approval and fabrication
shall not be commenced until such approval has been given in writing. The drawings shall be
submitted in related batches sufficiently in advance of the scheduled manufacturing date to
ensure that the CLIENT has sufficient time and information to give full consideration to the
proposals on the documents and for any changes to be incorporated and re-submitted for
approval. Unless otherwise specified or agreed in writing, a period of at least 14 days shall be
allowed from receipt of the documents by the CLIENT to their return. These approval copies
shall be additional to the number of copies of final drawings to be supplied.

All documents submitted for approval shall have already been checked by the Precast
Concrete Manufacturer and certified accordingly.

Approval of the documents by the CLIENT shall not relieve the Contractor of his obligations. The
Contractor shall be entirely responsible for his drawings including their accuracy (relative to the
CLIENT'S drawings) the correctness of detail and the proper design of connections and joints and
shall be responsible for any additional work required as a result of defects in his drawings.

1.4 Delivery, Storage & Handling

1 .4 .1 .



1 .4 .2




1 .4 .3



1 .4 .4

1 .4 .5




1 .4 .6

Precast concrete components are to be manufactured, delivered, handled and tored in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's quality procedures and method statements.

When components are stored, either in the place of manufacture or on site, they shall be
supported at such bearing positions as will ensure that any stresses induced in the elements
are always less than the permissible design stresses.

Avoid bearing on elements which will be exposed to prevent discolouration of exposed
surfaces.

Components to be adequately restrained during transit to prevent damage.

Components are to be handled safely and carefully with suitable lift equipment and supports.
Components shall be handled or supported only at the points described in the working
drawings and shall be handled and placed without impact.

Any precast concrete component that is damage during manufacturer, delivery or construction
shall be removed from site and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The CLIENT shall be
afforded an opportunity to inspect all precast concrete units before the application of finishes
that may hide defects.














PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.5 General

2.1.1

2.1.2.





2.1.3.






2.1.4.


Concrete generally shall be in accordance with Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

For exposed faces, constituent materials must be carefully controlled to ensure consistency of
colour and appearance. Aggregates must comply with the relevant parts of Section 03 30 00
and must be free from absorbent materials or other particles such as coal or iron sulphide which
may cause unsightly staining.

Cast in items, fixings, restraints

All cast in items for handling and lifting, and all fixings and restraints shall be grade 316 (marine
grade) stainless steel. Care shall be taken to prevent bimetallic reaction between stainless and
mild steel.

Cover spacers

2.1.4.1. Cover spacers may not be used on exposed faces with specialised finishes
(exposed aggregate, polished, etc.).



































PART 3 EXECUTION

1.6 GENERAL

3.1.1.


Design

3.1.1.1.





3.1.1.2.




The Contract Drawings indicate the location, sizes and structural requirements of
the precast elements. The Contractor will design the elements for all permanent and
temporary loads and submit calculations and shop drawings for the CLIENT'S
approval, as detailed in the submission sub-section of this specification.

All lifting devices shall be designed for all loads caused by lifting and placing plus an
additional allowance for impact of 100%.

3.1.2. Mould Construction

3.1.2.1. Moulds shall be constructed from materials which shall ensure a consistency of
appearance on all exposed surfaces. Casting surfaces and profiles for features shall
be checked and replaced whenever necessary. The proposed construction of
moulds and number of uses shall be submitted for the CLIENT'S approval.

1.7 Workmanship

3.2.1. Construction Joints

3.2.1.1. Construction joints will not normally be allowed on a precast element. Where the
element cannot be cast in one operation, the Contractor shall submit details of
construction joints for the CLIENT'S approval.

3.2.2. Surfaces Finishes

3.2.2.1. Refer to relevant Architectural drawings for details of surface finishes.

3.2.3. Dimensional Tolerances in casting




3.2.4.





3.2.5.


3.2.3.1.

Curing

3.2.4.1.



Cutting

3.2.5.1.


Comply with pertinent provisions of the following specification sections.




Curing by high pressure steam, steam vapour or other accepted processes may be
used to accelerate hardening or striking times with the CLIENT'S approval.




No element shall be cut, drilled or chased without the CLIENT'S approval.









3.2.6. Protection

3.2.6.1. The precast elements shall be protected at all stages of manufacture, handling and
storage and also during and after erection on site.

3.2.7. Marking

3.2.7.1. Units shall be indelibly marked during manufacture in a place which will not show on
finished elevations as follows:

a. Location or identification mark shown on Contractor's working drawings b.
Date of casting
c. The way up for handling, transportation and building into the Works d.
Lifting points

3.2.8. Repairs

3.2.8.1. Repairs will not be permitted without the CLIENT'S prior approval, either at the point of
manufacture or on site.

1.8 Inspection And Testing

3.3.1. Inspection

3.3.1.1. The CLIENT shall be afforded the facility to inspect the materials and workmanship at
any time during the manufacture or installation of precast elements and shall have
the right to reject any unit for reasons including (but not limited to) any of the
following:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Broken edges, whether the reinforcement is exposed or not
Cracks, other than hair cracks (hair cracks defined as less than 0.1 mm wide).
Unauthorised repairs
Inadequate or no cover to reinforcement
Failure to comply with Architectural requirements for finishes





3.3.2.


3.3.1.2.



Testing

3.3.2.1.

3.3.2.2.

Rejected units will be clearly and indelibly marked, removed and replaced at the
Contractor's expense.




Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

The CLIENT may instruct the Contractor to carry out tests on completed precast
elements.











1.9 Erection

3.4.1.


General

3.4.1.1.





3.4.1.2.




3.4.1.3.




The precast elements shall be erected to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings. Where elements are bedded in mortar or where in-situ joints are made
after installation, such work shall be carried out to details shown on the Contractor's
working drawings.

The elements shall be lifted and supported in the final position both temporarily and
permanently, in such a way that they shall be stressed only in the manner for which
they have been designed.

The units shall be adequately braced and supported during erection to ensure
correct alignment and safety and such bracing and support shall be maintained until
adequate permanent connections have been made.

3.4.2.


Dimensional Tolerances in Erection

3.4.2.1. Unless specified otherwise, the precast elements shall be erected or located such that
each surface edge or corner of a unit shall be not more than the following distance
from its true intended position in space:

a. 8 mm for units more than 1m overall in any direction
b. 10 mm for units more than 1m but not more than 6m overall in any direction c.
15 mm for units more than 6m in any direction.

3.4.2.2.




3.4.2.3.

In addition to the above, each surface edge or corner shall not be more than 5 mm
from its true position in space relative to the corresponding surface, edge or corner of
the adjacent units or units.

Any or all the above requirements may be varied by the consultant if the accuracy of
the position of the units is not suitable for structural reasons, for reasons of
appearance or for the proper assembly of the unit or other adjacent units or
components.

3.4.3. Erection Mock-up

3.4.3.1. Where units are to be erected together to form a larger unit the Contractor shall
arrange a trial assembly to verify the suitability of erection methods and tolerances.




END OF SECTION










DIVISION THREE - CONCRETE
03 45 00 - PRE CAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE


PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section

B. Supply and installation of GRC panels, to the Buildings, as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 REFERENCE

A.


B.

C.

Cast-in-place concrete and setting inserts in cast concrete: co-operate with Cast in Place
Concrete Section 03 30 00.

Dampproofing and Waterproofing under Section 07 10 00.

Sealing of joints, other than those specified in this Section - under joint sealants Section 07
92 00.

1.3 DESIGN AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.



B.



C.


D.

E.


F.



G.

Unless otherwise stated in this Specification, all testing shall be carried out by the
appropriate method described in the CEM-FIL Quality Control Test Booklet published by
the Licensor. Alternatively the appropriate GRCA Code of Practice may be used.

Reinforce units to withstand wind loads (160 Km/h basic wind speed) of pressure and
suction determined in accordance with CP3: Chapter V: Part 2, and other forces induced by
other elements supported by the panels. Submit calculations and data regarding loads.

Fire Performance: The panels are to be formed of wholly non-combustible material, when
tested to BS 476 Part 4, and shall have a Class 0 surface, as tested to BS 476 Part 6.

Maximum deflection not to be more than 1/360 of the span for any precast unit, fully loaded.

Provide anchors, lifting hooks, shear bars, spacers and other inserts or fittings which are to
be designed by the manufacturer to effect a complete installation.

Design all anchorage and fastenings. Show details of such fastenings on the shop
drawings. Submit calculations with each detail. Anchorage and fastenings shown on the
drawings are diagrammatic only.

Design and construct connections to permit movement where sliding is to occur.


1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Work of this Section shall be carried out by an organization having not less than five years
of proven experience in this type of work, acceptable to CLIENT.







B.


C.


The organization to have the capacity to perform, with its own personnel and equipment,
the engineering drafting, detailing, fabrications and erection of the work to be constructed.

Manufacturer to have all design calculations, design details and shop drawings signed by
their engineer and stamped with the seal of a professional engineer meeting the
requirements specified in General Conditions, at no additional cost to the contract.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

A.

B.



C.


D.

E.

Comply with requirement of General Conditions.

Show each item of precast GRC: surface finishes, connecting hardware, connecting steel
(including shim plates), reinforcing, anchorage, setting and bracing, jointing method and
sealant. Indicate strength of concrete, grade of reinforcement, concrete cover.

Identify each unit by a standard mark shown on the shop drawings and place legibly on
each unit at the time of manufacture.

Drawings to be reviewed by CLIENT prior to commencement of any fabrication of elements.

Co-ordinate with related stages of the work to ensure complete installation of all associated
elements of the building.

1.6 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY

A.




B.

Warranty GRC work to be colouring fast and to be free of spalling, cracking, splitting,
deformation and loosening for a period of 3 years from the date of Completion Certificate of
the Work. Warranty also to cover the installation of joint sealant provided under this
Section against staining, adhesion and cohesion failure.

Upon being notified by CLIENT that defects or failure exist, promptly replace defective parts of
this work at no additional cost to the Contract.

1.7 SAMPLES

A.



B.



C.


D.

Submit three samples, 300 x 300 mm, of each type of precast GRC finish for CLIENT's
approval, before casting the larger samples specified below. Samples must have
appropriate thickness as stated by proposed finished of product.

After approval of the 300 x 300 mm samples, cast one sample of each type and finish to
conform to Article 2.3 of this Section.


The larger samples will be inspected by CLIENT at the plant. If sample is not approved make
a new sample until approval is obtained.

Deliver approved larger samples to the site, prior to first delivery of precast GRC for
erection.

1.8 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE







A.


B.

C.



D.


E.



F.

Prevent units coming into contact with earth or other materials which may soil or damage
the facing material. Protect units with weatherproof coverings.

Contractor is fully responsible for the delivery, handling and storing of the units.

Any dirt on the units due to storage, handling, transportation and erection shall be capable of
removal by washing. Any unit which has dirt which are un removable shall be removed from
the site at the expense of the contractor.

Deliver precast panels to site and on arrival inspect each unit as it is removed from the
truck. For the repair of damaged units, see 'Installation' article.

Panels must be handled, stored and transported in such a way that no damage or marking of
architectural surfaces occurs and so that the screens are not subject to undue stress.
Delivery must be timed to coincide with construction programs.

All GRC panels shall be marked by some method of individual identification, which shall
also indicate the type and date of moulding.


1.9 SUPPORTING STEEL

A. Supply and install necessary galvanized supporting steel and stainless steel accessories
except steel forming part of a structural system and/or shown and identified on the
Structural Drawings.




































PART 2 RODUCTS

2.1 PROPERTIES:

A. Flexure: The GRC from which the panels are made shall have the following properties
measured on coupons cut from 10 mm thick test boards cast and vibration - compacted in
the same manner as the panels and then cured for 28 days in the same curing
environment.

1. Modules of Rupture (MOR) 9 N/MM2.

2. Limits of Proportionality (LOP)

a. 5.0 N/mm 2 on J.J. Lloyd T 5000/SS Test Machine or similar (CEM/QC/003)
b. 6.0 N/mm2 on Monsanto Tensometer Type W or similar (CEM/QC/007)

B.


C.




D.

E.

Density: The wet bulk density of the finished GRC checked from samples cast and vibrated
in the same manner as the panels shall be not less than 1900 kg/M3

Composition: 96-98% silica, 2% maximum moisture, 1% maximum soluble salts, 0.5%
maximum loss on ignition, 0.5% maximum clay and organic material. Other sands may be
acceptable, however test reports of such samples must be submitted to CLIENT for approval
prior to use.

The maximum particle size shall be 2.4 mm and the fine fraction shall not exceed 10%

Mix Design:

1.







2.

The mix shall be determined by the manufacturer in conjunction with the Licensor and
submitted to CLIENT for acceptance before work commences. The proportions shall be
chosen to achieve the performance and the quality control requirements specified.
The following limitations to the mix design shall be observed.

a. Glass content 4% by weight of total wet mix
b. Sand content minimum 30% by weight of total wet mix to 55% maximum.

If the admixtures to aid workability are used, and manufacturing takes place in a hot
environment. Additional steps may be taken to delay setting of the GRC. The use of
retarders and chilling of the water used in the mix must be in accordance with the
Licensor's requirements and recommendations.

F. Mould Release Agent: The use of a mould release agent will be permitted provided it is
compatible with the architectural finish specified. The manufacturer shall submit full details of
the type of release agent proposed, for acceptance by CLIENT.

2.2. MATERIALS:

A. GENERAL

1. Cement:
2.








a. The cement shall be White Portland Cement to BS 12, ASTM C 150 Type 1, DIN
1164, or equivalent, and shall be obtained from one source throughout
manufacture.

2. Glass Fiber:

a. The glass fiber shall be Cem-FIL Alkali Resistant Glass Fiber as supplied by
Fiber glass Limited or approved equal. The chopped strand shall have a nominal
length of 12mm.

3. Admixture:

a. Admissible if normal practice for the mix being employed. Calcium chloride and
chloride admixtures shall not be used.

4. Sand:

A. Sand shall be washed and dried silica sand, free from soluble salts, clay particles
and organic matter.

5. Fixings:

A. All fixings shall be stainless steel.

6. Sealant / Joints:

a. Sealant:

High Performance Deoxidized polyurethane approved from the CLIENT.

b. Joint backing:

Closed cell polyurethane foam, as recommended by sealant manufacturer.


B.


C.




D.

E.


Density: The wet bulk density of the finished GRC checked from samples cast and vibrated
in the same manner as the panels shall be not less than 1900 kg/M3

Composition: 96-98% silica, 2% maximum moisture, 1% maximum soluble salts, 0.5%
maximum loss on ignition, 0.5% maximum clay and organic material. Other sands may be
acceptable, however test reports of such samples must be submitted to CLIENT for approval
prior to use.

The maximum particle size shall be 2.4 mm and the fine fraction shall not exceed 10%

Mix Design:

1.

The mix shall be determined by the manufacturer in conjunction with the Licensor and
submitted to CLIENT for acceptance before work commences. The proportions shall
be chosen to achieve the performance and the quality control requirements specified.
The following limitations to the mix design shall be observed.

a. Glass content 4% by weight of total wet mix










2.

b. Sand content minimum 30% by weight of total wet mix to 55% maximum.

If the admixtures to aid workability are used, and manufacturing takes place in a hot
environment. Additional steps may be taken to delay setting of the GRC. The use of
retarders and chilling of the water used in the mix must be in accordance with the
Licensor's requirements and recommendations.

F. Mould Release Agent: The use of a mould release agent will be permitted provided it is
compatible with the architectural finish specified. The manufacturer shall submit full details of
the type of release agent proposed, for acceptance by CLIENT.

2.3 FINISH OF PRECAST GRC ELEMENTS

A.


B.


C.




D.


E.

Shape: The wall panels are to be formed in GRC to achieve the profiles indicated on the
Drawings.

Finish: The colour and texture shall match those of sample prepared by the manufacturer
and approved by CLIENT.

The finished units shall be free from surface imperfections such as blowholes, void, ridges
or any other defects that will be visible in the finished condition, as the approved samples.
Fibers in the surface of the moulding will be acceptable, providing the appearance so
achieved is uniform and to CLIENT'S satisfaction, but bare fibers are not to be visible.

Making-good of architectural surfaces shall only be permitted on approval by CLIENT and
provided that agreed standards are achieved. Structural making-good will not be permitted.

Any panel not complying with the Specification may be declared unacceptable by CLIENT.

2.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING

A.


B.




C.

Quality control of the consistency of GRC being produced shall generally be carried out by
monitoring 28 day MOR test results on a statistical basis.

Test for glass content MOR, LOP and Density shall be carried out on test coupons cut from
test boards produced during the beginning and end of each day's production, as described in
Article 2.3.8. These coupons shall represent that day's production of units. Initially, an
increased sampling rate may be required to provide sufficient data to establish compliance.

Preliminary testing shall be carried out before manufacturing commences with the actual
mix, equipment, personnel and technique proposed for manufacture. The following factors
shall be established by this work:

1. That the modulus of rupture and quality control requirements can be achieved (the
average 28 day MOR or preliminary tests shall be equal to or greater than the Target
Mean MOR).

2. A relationship between 7 day and 28 day quality control MOR.

D. One sample of a typical unit shall be manufactured to the agreed detailed construction and
submitted to a recognized testing authority for load testing. The cost for testing to be borne in
this Section by the contractor.





PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.



B.


C.


D.


E.


F.



G.


H.


I.


J.


K.

L.

M.

Do not erect any panel which has chips, spalls, cracks or other deficiencies on surfaces
exposed in the finished work. Immediately remove units damaged during installation and
replace.

If it is considered that a damaged section can be successfully patched, remove the panel
from the work and patch elsewhere, for future consideration and use.

CLIENT will determine whether damaged or patched units are accepted or rejected. If the
unit is rejected, remove from the site.

Take down and replace any unit erected contrary to these requirements and make good to
other units and work disturbed by the replacement, at no cost to the Contract.

Be fully responsible for closing-in areas of work where panels have to be replaced and be
liable for damage arising out of neglecting to provide and maintain the protection in place.

The safety and protection of GRC units shall be ensured throughout the whole of the
building contract. No approval will in anyway absolve the Contractor from the responsibility
for protection.

Where shrinkage of panels will occur after erection, make final restraining connections after
shrinkage is substantially complete.

Set work plumb, true and square, with joints parallel and uniform; check alignment of joints at
each floor level by instrument.

Fill holes around anchors with cement mortar, where allowance for movement is not
required.

Erect wall panels and adjust anchors to set units plumb, level and in true planes, with
correct joint widths.

Insert all necessary sealant and flashings, as noted here and on shop drawings.

Coordinate work with adjacent surfaces and back-up construction.

Install neoprene compression seals, of cross section required and as shown on the shop
drawings. When inserted in the joint, install gasket seal with 50% compression of the
original dimension.


3.2. SEALING

A.

Seal all joints between GRC panels, between GRC coping and concrete parapet, between
GRC panels and louver and door frames, and between bottom of GRC panels and concrete
base wall. Provide 15 mm x 15mm P.V.C. Vent/Weep holes through sealant assembly at
600 mm O.C. maximum to joint assembly at joint between GRC panels and concrete base
wall.





B.



C.


D.

E.

F.


Before application of sealant, clean and dry thoroughly, joints of units. Surfaces which are
to receive sealant to be free from parting agents or other treatments which may affect the
bond. Prime surfaces to receive sealant, if so directed by the Sealant Manufacturer.

Use continuous sealant backing material of size to suit depth and width of joint. Install
backing under 25 to 30% compression, to prevent dislodgement or falling out.

Apply primer and sealant in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

Depth of sealant bead to be 2/3 the width of the joint. Tool sealant after installation.

Submit samples of typical joint sealing for approval by CLIENT.


3.3 FIXING AND ANCHORAGE DEVICES TO BE BUILT INTO CONCRETE BUILDING FRAME

A. Supply fixing and anchorage devices to be built into the cast-in-place concrete, complete
with setting plans.


3.4 CLEANING

A. Return to site at Final Completion or when instructed, and thoroughly clean down the entire
area of the GRC works. Cleaning agents for the purpose must be approved by the GRC
manufacturer.



END OF SECTION
































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 04 00 00 - Masonry
- 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry






















































DIVISION FOUR - MASONRY
04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3
1.1.4

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
Supply and installation of concrete block masonry and related accessories necessary
to complete the Works, to CLIENT's approval.
Supply and installation of reinforced concrete lintels.
Fire Rated Walls: Generally are required at service shafts, storage rooms, at
electrical and transformer rooms and as required by Authorities having jurisdiction.

1.2 Reference Standards

1.2.1 The work under this Section shall comply with BS 8000 Part 3, BS 6073 Parts 1 & 2,
BS EN 772 - 2 : 1998 and 2, BS PD 6472 and BS 5628.
1 .2 .2 The work under this section shall comply with Local Municipality Applicable Advisory
Notes and regulations.


1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Samples:
a.


b.


c.
Submit for approval by CLIENT three samples of each type of masonry unit
and
accessory, before delivery to the site.
After approval, samples will be retained on site for use as standard of
acceptance until completion of Contract.
Materials built into the Work shall match approved samples.
1.3.2 Testing: Perform compressive strength tests in accordance with BS 6073 for
concrete blocks and submit results for CLIENT's review and approval.
Testing Mortar on Site
Preparation of Samples:
The specimen size shall be any of the following three:
75 mm cubes 100
mm cubes
100 x 25 x 25 prisms
A set of six specimens shall be prepared for every 150 sq.m. of wall, for









each class of mortar, or for every storey of the building, whichever is more frequent.
The specimens shall be made and stored accordingly to the method given in BS
4551.

Testing of Samples
At the end of seven days three of the mortar specimens shall be tested for strength in
accordance with BS 4551. Work may proceed if the 7 days strengths are in excess of
those specified. In the event of the 7 days sample failing to meet the strength
requirements the Contractor may elect to continue work at his own risk, while
awaiting the results of the 28 day test. If the 28 days site samples fail to meet the
requirements, the Contractor shall take down and rebuilt the work affected.

The required 7 and 28 days strengths are as follows:

Designation Mean Compressive Mortar
Strength (N/mm)
7 days 28 days
(ii) 3.0 4.0
(iii) 1.7 2.5






1 .3 .3



The required 7 days strength shown above are for guidance only and are valid for
Portland Cement without any additives.
Certification: Submit manufacturer's certificates attesting that materials supplied are
as per referenced standards.
On Completion of works, submit a certificate signed by the installer, which states that
the work of this Section is installed as specified in this Section. No final payment for
work of this Section will be made without receipt by CLIENT of this certificate.

1.4

Mock-up

1.4.1




1.4.2




Construct a mock-up wall of a typical wall type. The wall shall be floor to floor in
height. Location shall be as designated by CLIENT. Modify the mock-up wall as may
be necessary to obtain approval by CLIENT. Approved mock-up wall may remain as
part of the completed building.
Mock-up shall contain approved materials. Concrete block masonry work shall match
approved mock-up wall.















2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials, Concrete Block

2.1.1
















2.1.2




2.1.3

Concrete Blocks: To BS 6073, Parts 1 & 2 and BS EN 772-2 to suit applicable
conditions, hollow, normal weight, average compressive strength of 12.5N/mm
2
with a
minimum individual strength of not less than 10N/mm
2
for load bearing blocks, and an
average strength more than 10N/mm
2
with a minimum individual strength of not less
than 7.5N/mm2 for non-load bearing blocks. The average transverse strength of
5blocks shall not be less than 0.65N/mm
2
.Water absorption shall be 15% or less of
dry weight. Shrinkage, when measured in accordance with the method given in BS
6073, shall not exceed 0.05%. Blocks shall be cured to max 20% moisture content,
fully cured at least 28 days prior to delivery to the site, complete with all special
shapes and sizes required, including bull-nose block and 100% solid blocks for
corners and for support of wall-mounted items. Blocks exposed in the completed
Works shall be free from cracks, splits, spall, chippages and other defects. Blocks in
contact with ground shall be solid sulphate resisting concrete blocks coated with thick
black bitumen or tar composition unless otherwise stated.
Hourdi Blocks: Dimensions 400/360 x 200, 250 or 300 mm height with max weight
of 20, 23 & 26 kg/block respectively to be used. Compressive strength should not be
less than 7.0 N/mm
2
. Max percentage of solid in the block is 60%.

Tolerances: Dimensions of block in any direction (length, height and thickness) not
to vary from nominal size by more than 3 mm.

2.1.4







2.2

Concrete Block for Fire-rated Construction: As per ANSI/UL 263, BS 6073, Part 1 & 2 and
BS EN 772-2, normal weight, min. compressive strength of 7.5 MPa and at least 75% solid
cured to max. 20% moisture content, fully cured at least 28 days prior to delivery to the site,
complete with all special shapes and sizes required, including bull-nose block and 100%
solid blocks for corners and for support of wall-mounted items. Blocks exposed in the
completed work shall be free from cracks, splits, spalls, chippages and other defects.

Materials, Mortar and Rendering

2 .2 .1


2 .2 .2


2 .2 .3


Cement: Cement shall be Portland, grey/white (as required) normal complying with BS
PD 6472.
Masonry Cement: Bagged masonry cement equivalent to 1:3 mix specified may be
used in lieu of cement/lime mortar.
Aggregates
a. Aggregate shall consist of naturally occurring crushed or uncrushed materials,
which shall fully comply with BS 882.
b. The salt content shall not exceed the following limits:











Aggregate
Salts as % wt. Of Aggregate
Fine Coarse
0.03 0.02
Acid soluble chlorides (C1)% max.
0.05 0.04
Acid soluble sulphates (SO3) of max. 0.30 0.30


c. Coarse aggregate used for the manufacture of concrete blocks shall be 10mm
nominal size aggregate for standard blocks.
d. Sand shall be clean, sharp, and free from salt and organic matter. It shall
conform to BS 1200 and shall not contain any harmful materials that will
adversely affect the hardening, strength, durability or appearance of the finished
work.


2 .2 .4 Water
a. Water shall be as described in Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.
b. Water shall be clear and free from organic impurities, having a pH value in the
basic range of 7-9. The organic impurities should not exceed the following limits:




1.
2.
3.
4.


Maximum Concentration
Chlorides as C1
Sulphates as SO3
Alkali carbonate and bicarbonates
Total dissolved ions, incl. 1, 2 and 3 above


Limits, ppm
250
350
500
2000


2 .2 .5







2 .2 .6



2 .2 .7


Admixtures
a. Admixtures shall comply with BS 5075 Part 1, and shall be used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
b. Plasticizers shall conform to BS 4887.
c. Admixtures shall not contain any chlorides.


Pigments
a. All pigments shall comply with BS 1014.


Damp Proof Course
a. Where the blockwork is required to stand on the ground slab, ground beams or
foundations, the Contractor shall provide a damp proof course in the lowest
blockwork course consisting of one layer of tropical quality bituminized fiber felt
complying with Type B of BS 73 and weighing not less than 3.3kg/sq.m. The













2 .2 .8











2 .2 .9

damp proof course shall be well lapped at corner and joints and bedded in
cement mortar and pointed both sides.


Wall Ties
a. Ties for cavity walls shall be of austenitic stainless steel to BS 1243, double
triangle table 2, wire diameter 4.5mm, or flat double fish tail type of minimum
2mm thickness. Flat ties are to have a full twist or propriety water drip placed
centrally in any cavity.
b. Minimum length of ties shall be 100mm in excess of the width of the cavity.
c. Ties from block work to structure shall be Galvanized Steel (for internal walls) /
austenitic stainless steel (for external walls) fish tail anchors 2mm thick in
accordance with BS 5628, Table 8b.


Movement Joint Filling Sealant


a. Two part poly sulphide based sealants shall be to BS 4254.
b. Joint filler shall be a compressed sheet of wood fiber impregnated with bitumen
emulsion. The filler may alternatively be a compressed sheet of cork granules
bonded with bitumen or synthetic resins.
Ordinary insulation board dipped in creosote will not be accepted.


2.3 Materials, Miscellaneous Materials

2.3.1


2.3.2




2.3.3




2.3.4

Strap and Frame Anchors: Stainless steel in accordance with BS 1449: Part 2:1993 to
Grade 304S15.
Insulation Between Tops of Concrete Block Partitions and Underside of
Structure: Mineral wool or fibrous glass board of 1.1 lb density, machine cut,
recessed each side of wall to accept caulking/smoke seal, placed under minimum 25
% compression when installed.
Horizontal Reinforcing Galvanized Steel Mesh for internal wall: To BS EN 10142
of Fe PO2G quality coating type Z275 and mild steel rods complying with BS 4449,
hot dip galvanized to CLIENT's approval.

Horizontal Reinforcing Stainless Steel Mesh for external wall: Stainless steel
mesh complying with BS 1449, shall be used for horizontal reinforcing for external
walls.

2.4 Mortar Mixing and Proportions

2.4.1



2.4.2

Proportion mortar dry, 1 Part cement, and 6 parts fine aggregate and mix thoroughly.
Add and mix thoroughly and uniformly in enough water to make mortar tightly ball in a
man's hand and to lightly ooze through fingers as the hand is closed.
Mix no more mortar at a time than can be used within one half hour. Mortar not used
within the one half hour time shall be disposed of. Do not re-temper mortar.







2.4.3 Only mechanical mortar mixing shall be permitted.

2.5 Rendering, Mixing and Proportions

2.5.1


2.5.2


2.5.3

General: Proportion and mix materials in accordance with manufacturer printed
instructions.
Bonding Slurry: Proportion 1 to 2 parts cement to 1 Part latex admixture and mix
to a creamy consistency free of lumps.
Rendering: Proportion 3parts sand and 1part cement with 10litres of approved latex
admixture per each 50Kg of cement.


















































EXECUTION

3.1 Placing of Masonry


3.1.1
3.1.2


3.1.3


3.1.4







3.1.5






3.1.6
3.1.7


3.1.8


3.1.9






3.1.10


First layer of blocks to be solid blocks.
Units shall be laid on solid beds of mortar, webs and shells of hollow units to be
covered, vertical joints between units shall be solid filled.
Masonry units shall be set out with a storey rod so that coursing lines up at steel shelf
angles, sills, heads of windows and doors with full courses.
Walls shall be kept level at all times. Do not install any portion of wall more than 1.2
m in height in any particular day. Carry up walls in a uniform manner, no part being
raised more than 1000 mm above any adjacent un-built course, and no area of
walling higher than 600 mm, above any course which is not fully set. Angles and
reveals shall be kept true, square and plumb. Broken walls must be laid up with a
lead.
Walls shall be constructed as true planes and when tested with a 3000 mm straight
edge placed anywhere on the wall in any direction shall be true to place within 3 mm
and plumb within 4 mm. Each horizontal joint shall be level and at same height in all
walls around the room and true to the lines and dimensions indicated on the
drawings. Unsatisfactory work shall be removed and replaced.
Intersecting concrete block walls shall be tied together in a masonry bond.
Where fire-rated walls are called for, construct walls with block of proper solids
content to provide the required rating.
Provide special units at jambs, heads, sills, corners and bonding blocks as required.
External corners shall be bull-nosed throughout.
Extend masonry partitions, unless shown otherwise, to within 20 mm of underside of
structure. Fill the 20 mm gap with insulation under 25% compressions, so placed that
space is left each side of the finished wall to accept joint sealant. At fire-rated
enclosures ensure gap at top is filled and sealed to meet wall fire rating and BS 476
part 20 fire resistances, whichever is grater.
Install in masonry all nailing plugs, ground, inserts, anchors and other items supplied
by other trades, and where required so as to receive anchor bolts for the securing of
wall cabinets, shelves, vanities, etc.
3.2 Joint Finishing
3.2.1


3.2.2



3.2.3
Unless otherwise specified, rod all joints in exposed masonry work (concave). Use a
plastic pointing tool which will not cause staining of the mortar.
Concrete block which is to be plastered directly or which is to receive tiles applied
with a mortar bed, shall have the joints raked back 12 mm for the full thickness of the
joint.
Use flush joints for concrete block walls which are not exposed in the finished work,
or plastered direct.








3 .2 .4 Rake-out joints where interior walls and partitions butt to concrete columns to a depth
of 12 mm on sides, full height, ready to receive sealants, specified under Section 07
92 00.
3.3 Lintels and Bearing Blocks
3.4.1.1 Install reinforced concrete lintels over openings in concrete block walls. Lintels shall a
minimum of 200 mm bearing on supporting masonry.
3 .4 .1 .2 Install solid concrete masonry bearing blocks at the jambs of all concrete block. The
bearing blocks to be of the same material as the adjacent wall surfaces.
3 .4 .1 .3 Contractor, at his option, may provide cast-in-place concrete lintels, or precast
concrete lintels with the approval of CLIENT.
3.4





3.5
Grouting
3.4.1


3 .4 .2
Anchors
3.5.1


Grout pressed steel frames in masonry walls to full height of jamb, using 6 mm
gravel, sand and cement.
Grout with 25 N/mm
2
concrete with 6 mm aggregate all voids containing rebars.


To Provide Lateral Support:

a.



b.

Intersecting bearing walls shall be tied together with a prefabricated "Tee
Section" of wall reinforcement or strap anchor set in the second bed course
and every third course thereafter, full height of wall.
Tops of masonry walls shall be secured to cast-in-place concrete slabs above
with strap anchors securely fixed to the slab and securely embedded into
mortar joints of the wall. Space anchors not more than 600 mm apart.

3.6 Horizontal Reinforcing
Reinforce all concrete block walls and partitions with horizontal reinforcing bars as follows:

3 .6 .1

3 .6 .2
3 .6 .3


3 .6 .4
3 .6 .5

Reinforcement to be set in mortar bed joints and lapped at least 300 mm at all splices
and at corners and intersections.
Reinforcement to terminate at each side of expansion & control joints.
Reinforcement to be continuous and set in the second bed course at 200 mm height
from slab and in every third bed course @ 600 mm thereafter, to full height of wall or
partition.
Bed joint of the top course of block is to be reinforced in all cases.
Reinforcement to be set in the second and third bed joints 200 mm apart immediately
above lintels and below sills of openings and shall extend at least 900 mm beyond
the jambs.
3.7 Vertical & Horizontal Stiffeners
3 .7 .1 Block work:
Generally all the block work including solid, hollow, and reinforced block work shall be
constructed as per contract specifications.









- All 200 mm thick block work shall be non-load bearing hollow block work unless
mentioned otherwise
- All the partition walls shall be in 100 mm/200 mm thick solid/hollow blocks as
detailed on relevant architectural drawings and shall be built as per contract
specifications
- Block work below ground and in contact with soil shall be in 200 mm thick load
bearing solid SRC blocks and protected as per specifications.
- Approved wall ties shall be provided between alternate course of block work fixed to
the adjacent R.C. columns or walls
- All 100 mm thick hollow block partition walls having height of more than 2100 mm
shall be provided with an intermediate stiffener beam of size 100x200 mm deep
(reinforcement 1-Y12 top/bottom, Y8-200 c/c links)
- Bed joint reinforcement shall be provided in block work as per specification
- concrete band beam 200x200 mm reinforced with 4T12 & T10@200c/c links should
be provided at the middle height of block work or at lintel level if height of block wall
exceeds 3.5 m
- Reinforced concrete band column 200x200 mm reinforced with 4T12 &
T10@200c/c links should be provided in block wall with spacing not exceeding 5.0 m
band column should be provided at the corners and ends of block walls.
Reinforcement of column should be anchored in the beam or slab below.

3 .8 Control Joints
3.8.1 Construct vertical control joints in masonry walls at maximum 6000 mm o.c. and/or
where directed by CLIENT. Joints shall be constructed full height of the walls or
partitions. Joints shall be formed by using one half and full blocks to form a
continuous straight vertical joint and placing continuous tarred or waxed paper or
asphalt emulsion on the end half-cells of the blocks; the resulting center key cavity is
to be completely filled with mortar as each course is placed. Vertical joint between
the block ends shall be raked out to a depth of 12 mm full height, both sides and left
ready to receive caulking specified under Section 07 92 00.

3 .9

Cleaning
3.9.1



3.9.2



As the work proceeds, carefully remove mortar splashes from masonry surfaces and
adjoining surfaces. After completing each section of the wall, clean down surfaces
and make good where required.
In all cases, first clean a sample area of masonry in an approved location and obtain
approval of CLIENT, before completing work.

- END OF SECTION -




















CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 05 00 00 - Metals
- 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications






















































DIVISION FIVE - METAL
05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
1.0 GENERAL


1.1 Summary
1.1.1 This Specification includes the following:
a. Metal fabrication works.
1.2 Related Work
1.2.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section
1.2.2 Work of this section is considered as specialist work.
1.3 References
1.3.1 Comply with all requirements of the Local Regulations.


1.3.2 Unless noted otherwise in this specification, works of this section is to be carried out in
accordance with relevant British standard specifications.


1.3.3 Referenced Standards:
1.3.3.1
1.3.3.2
1.3.3.3
1.3.3.4

1.3.3.5
1.3.3.6
1.3.3.7

1.3.3.8
1.3.3.9

1.3.3.10
1.3.3.11

1.3.3.12

1.3.3.13
1.3.3.14
BS 4 Part 1: Hot rolled section.
BS 5950: Structural use of steelwork in buildings.
BS 3692: ISO Metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nuts.
BS EN499: 1995: Covered electrodes for the manual metal arc welding of
carbon manganese steels.
BS EN ISO 1461: 1999: Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles.
BS4570: Specifications for fusion welding of steel casting.
BS EN ISO 1011-2: 2001: Process of arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels.
BS EN 287: Approval testing of welders for fusion welding.
BS 4395: High Strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for
structural engineering.
BS 4604: The use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steel work.
BS 7079: Preparation of steel substrates before application of paints and
related products.
BS 5493: Codes of practice for the protective coating of iron and steel
structures against corrosion.
ASTM A 786: Steel floor plate.
ASTM A 569: Steel Grating


1.4 Quality Assurance
1 .4 .1 The work of this section shall be designed, fabricated, installed and erected by a firm
(Steel Work Contractor) approved by CLIENT. The steelwork Contractor shall provide a
full














1 .4 .2





1 .4 .3


1 .4 .4


1.4.5

time, senior, experienced and qualified representative, acceptable to CLIENT, to direct work
on site.

Information to be submitted involves engineering services including design, execution,
operations procedures and shop drawings which shall be prepared by or under the direct
supervision of a professional engineer. He shall check all drawings and calculations before
submission to CLIENT, and shall certify that he has made such checks by stamping and
signing the information submitted.

Structural steel supplied under this section shall be manufactured in England, Germany,
France, Canada or the United States of America or approved equal.

Quality System: Comply with ISO 9001/9002 Quality System as a minimum. Incorporate
all the standard procedures supplied by the CLIENT.

Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
a.
b.
c.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code Steel"
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel"
Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed A WS qualification tests for
welding processes involved Engineer and, if pertinent, has undergone re-
certification.
1.4.6 Mockups:
a. Offsite Mockup for Review and Testing: Use the same installation methods and
materials as required for the Work. Schedule construction so that it may be
reviewed, and any necessary adjustments made, prior to commencing fabrication of
the Work.

1.5 Source Quality Control
1.5.1 Inspection and testing of materials and shop fabrication of works of this Section, and field
quality control specified elsewhere in this section, will be performed by an inspection and
Testing Engineer approved by CLIENT.


1.5.2 Inspection and Testing Engineer shall carry out.
1.5.2.1 Mill Inspection: Check that materials conform to specified standards. Mill test
reports, properly corrected materials will be accepted in lieu of physical tests.
1.5.2.2 Shop Inspection: Verify that:
- Structural Steel is fabricated in accordance with shop drawings.
- Specified fabrication, welding, cleaning and painting procedures are
followed.

- Surfaces inaccessible for cleaning and painting after assembly are
treated before assembly.
- For surfaces painted with zinc-rich paint or zinc primer, specified surface
preparation is followed, and specified paint thickness is applied.

1.5.2.3 Shop Inspection: Verify that:
- Carry out non-destructive testing of welded connections in accordance
with Section 5.5 of National Structural Steelwork Specification for
Building Construction.





1.6 Submittals
1.6.1 Product Data: For steel floor plate, paint products, and grout.
1.6.2 Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include
plans, elevations, Specifications, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.
Show anchorage and accessory items.
a. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other
Specifications.

1.6.3 Engineering Calculations:
a. Include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed
for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the structural engineer
who was responsible for their preparation.

b. Calculation and shop drawings to be submitted simultaneously.
1 .6 .4


1 .6 .5


1 .6 .6




1.6.7
Samples representative of materials and furnished products as may be requested by the
CLIENT.

Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel and
welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of engineers and owners, and other
information specified.

As-Built Drawings: At project close out, submit Record (As- Built) Drawings of completed
work products.

1.7

Warranty
General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive CLIENT of other
rights;
CLIENT may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and
run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.


























2 .0 PRODUCTS
2.1 Metals, General
2 .1 .1 Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed
Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use
materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or
roughness.

2.2 Ferrous Metals
2.2.1 Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36M.
2.2.2 Rolled Steel Floor Plates: ASTM A 786.
2.2.3 Steel Tubing:
a. Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.
i. Provide tubing with hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 53.
2.2.4


2.2.5
2 .2 .6


2 .2 .7
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or
required by structural loads.
Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47M, Grade 32510.
Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48M, Class 200, unless another class is indicated or required
by structural loads.

Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of
4, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
a. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 27/ A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims
as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2 .2 .8 Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
2.3 Paint
2.3.1 Primers:
a. Interior Priming as per the specification
b. Exterior Priming as per the specification
2 .3 .2


2 .3 .3



2.4 Fasteners

2.4.1
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for re galvanizing welds in steel,
complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except
containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D
1187.



General: Provide Galvanized-Iron fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with
coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select
fasteners for type, grade, and class required.





2.4.2


2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7
2.4.8
2 .4 .9

Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6; with hex
nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Machine Screws:
ASME BI8.6.7M. Lag Bolts: ASME BI8.2.3.8M.
Wood Screws: Flat head, carbon steel, ASME B 18.6.1.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME BI8.22M.
Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B 18.21.2M.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when
installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in
concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified
independent testing agency.
a. Interior Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
b. Exterior Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F
738M and nuts complying with ASTM F 836M.

2.4.10 Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed.

2.5 Grout
2.5.1 General: Grout shall meet the specification "Cast-in-Place Concrete"
2 .5 .2 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by the
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.


2.6 Concrete Fill
2.6.1 Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in the Specification "Cast--
in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum
28-day cube compressive strength of 28 MPa, unless approved otherwise.


2.7 Fabrication, General
2 .7 .1




2 .7 .2

2 .7 .3



2 .7 .4
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1 mm, unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: Use materials and
methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base
metals.

a. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

b.
c.



2 .7 .5





2 .7 .6


2 .7 .7


2 .7 .8





a.

2 .7 .9

Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.

Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place
and to support indicated loads.

Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish
hardware, screws, and similar items.

Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner so as to exclude water, or
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

Allow for thermal movement resulting from the maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base
engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

Temperature Change (Range): Refer to the Specification

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and
straight sharp edges.

2.7.10 Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces

2.7.11 Form exposed connection with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not
indicated, Phillips flat head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.

2.7.12 Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but
not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work
to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various
components of each metal fabrication.

2.8 Finishes, General

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 Steel and Iron Finishes

2.9.1 Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed
below:
a. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
b. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel
products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and
strip 0.76 mm thick or thicker.
- Coating Thickness Grade: 85






2.9.2 Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and
environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:
a. Exteriors (SSPC Zone IB): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." b.
Interiors (SSPC Zone lA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2.9.3 Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be secured to concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. I," for shop painting.
a. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.


2.10


Aluminum Pipe Railings and Handrails

Construct railing and handrails to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Provide
handrails and railings complying with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance,
based on testing performed according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. Fabricate pipe
handrails and railings to interconnect members with concealed internal welds that eliminate
surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings. Provide
inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railings to concrete or
masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by
handrails and railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure. Provide
complete assemblies, railings, posts and other components necessary.

2.11 Cat ladders

Fabricate and install Cat ladder 700/800mm wide, shall be constructed with Aluminum tube
50mm dia. strings and 20mm dia rungs as indicated on the drawings. Finish: Powder coated.


































2 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1 Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions,
and directions for installing anchorages, including anchor boIts, and miscellaneous items
having integral anchors that are to be secured to concrete or masonry construction.
Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.2 Project Conditions

3.2.1 Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other
construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
a. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

3.3 Coordination

3 .3 .1 Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be secured to concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

3.4 Installation, General

3 .4 .1




3 .4 .2




3 .4 .3


3 .4 .4




3.4.5

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood
screws, and other connectors.

Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.

Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
a.

b.
c.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.





d.


e.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into
contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat
of bituminous paint.

3.5 Adjusting and Cleaning

3.5.1 Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.

3 .5 .2 Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in the painting specification.

3.6 Defective Work

3.6.1



3.6.2

3.6.3

Variations in excess of specified tolerances, and failure of materials or workmanship to
meet requirements of this specification, and which cannot be repaired by approved
methods, will be considered defective work performed by this Section.

Replace defective work, as directed by CLIENT.

Contractor shall pay for additional inspection and testing and related expenses.





END OF SECTION
































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 06 00 00 - Wood, Plastic and Composites
- 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
- 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry
- 06 41 16 - Plastic Laminated Architectural cabinets
- 06 61 16 - Solid Surfacing Fabrications














































INDEX CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 1




DIVISION SIX - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY



1. PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes
1.1.1

1.1.2



1.1.3
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
Supply and installation of wood grounds and nailing strips necessary for secure of
work of others, wood blocking, wood cants, plywood, mounting boards, backing, and
strapping.
Supply plywood or lumber with grade stamp applied to end or back of each piece.

1.2 Submittals
1.2.1 Comply with requirements of: Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples - Submittals.
1.2.2 Manufacturer's Product Data: submit a complete set of data for all materials,
accessories, chemicals, etc. used for work described in this Section, for review and
approval of CLIENT.





































2. PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1


Materials

2.1.1



2.1.2




2.1.3




2.1.4



2.1.5



2.1.6




Plywood: To BS 6566 WBP bonded, Grade 11, 18 mm thick. To be treated with
preservation & flame retardant treatment.

Ground, Nailing Strips, Blocking and Strapping: European Redwood, Long leaf
Pine or Douglas Fir, not more than 15 % moisture content. Minimum thickness of
nailing strips 6 mm. To be treated with preservation & flame retardant treatment.

Screws, Nails, Bolts: Screws shall be non-corrosive and comply with BS 1201. Nails
shall be spiral non-corrosive and comply with BS 1202. Bolts shall be non-corrosive
and comply with BS 916.

Wood Preservative: To BS 5056, 8% copper naphthenate solution for treatment of
wood exposed to exterior conditions.

Fire Retardant Treatment: In accordance with the BWPDA manual Type B, and to
comply with the requirements of BS 476.


Fire retardant chemicals used for treatment shall be free of halogens, sulphates,
ammonium phosphates and formaldehyde.



































3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Fabrication

3.1.1

3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8



3.2 Strapping

3.2.1

3.2.2

Use running members in longest lengths obtainable. Provide four (4) sides dressed
lumber.
Allow for expansion and contraction of the materials.
Accurately cut and join similar members, in similar thickness.
Erect work plumb, level, square and to the required lines.
Provide rough framing as required.
Install wood grounds and nailing strips for attaching the work of other Sections.
Make and install wood blocking, cants and parapet caps continuous.
Apply moisture barrier film to masonry, plaster, concrete prior to installation of any
wood strapping or plywood.




Provide and install wood strapping where required. Unless otherwise noted install
strapping at 400 mm o.c. using nails or screws 65 mm long minimum.
Shim out strapping to form a true and uniform surface over the entire area of
strapping.

3.3 Plywood Backing

3.3.1

3.3.2






3.3.3

Provide and install 18 mm thick Plywood backing on wood framing, where shown.
Provide and install 18 mm thick plywood backing for washroom mirrors.
Install all backing boards as required by Mechanical, Electrical and Communication
trades for mounting of controls, panel boards, pull boxes, splitters, switches, wall
mounted switchgear, junction boxes, meter cabinets, breakers, audio/visual
equipment, electrical cabinets, contractors, data control equipment, disconnect
switches, fire alarm control equipment, GFI equipment, L. V. lighting control
equipment, sound/communication equipment. etc. Coat wood backing with clear wood
preservative.

3.4 Miscellaneous Carpentry Work
3.4.1 Supply and install all other carpentry indicated on Drawings or as required for
completion of work. Co-operate with other trades in installing items supplied by other
Sections, cut openings in woodwork when so required and make good disturbed
surfaces.



END OF SECTION











DIVISION SIX - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 20 00 - FINISH CARPENTRY



1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Reference


1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section

1.2 Work Included in this Section

1.2.1

1.2.2

Fabrication, supply and installation of all finish carpentry and millwork items indicated
on the Drawings.
Where timber is specified to treat external structures where there is frequent and
intimate contact, such as -but not limited to- shading devices, playground equipment
and handrails that no chromated copper arsenate (CCA)-treated timber is used on the
project.

1.3 Works under Other Sections

1.3.1 Wooden Doors: Section 08 14 00.
1 .3 .2 Hardware (Ironmongery): Section 08 71 00.
1 .3 .3 Painting: Section 09 91 00.


1.4 Submittals
1.4.1
1.4.2




1 .4 .3



1.4.4
Comply with requirements of Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples - Submittals.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with: Shop Drawings, Product
Data & Samples. Show large scale details of construction. Indicate profiles of
members, jointing, fastening, strapping, cut-outs for mechanical and electrical services
and related items.
Samples: Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples of wood species plastic laminates and
solid surfacing material for review before proceeding with the work. The samples shall
show colors, finish and details of edging, forming and construction.
Manufacturer's Data Sheets:
a. Submit data sheets for all materials used for work under this Section for review
and approval by CLIENT.
b. Submit data sheets on fire and flame retardant treatments, which shall be
totally compatible with the base and applied finishes.
1.4.5 Certification:
a. The Contractor shall provide a Certificate of Assurance stating that works has
been carried out as specified.
1.5 Quality Assurance
1 .5 .1 Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.





1.5.2

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials are indicated,
provide materials with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency on
surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.


1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.6.1 Deliver work items to the site and store in a dry and clean location. Provide protective
coverings during shipment and storage for all items. Cover items with 6 mm plywood
or similar suitable sheet material. Pad all corners vulnerable to damage with suitable
material. Do not deliver items until required for erection and until the relative humidity of
the area of installation has been below 55% for minimum 10 days.
1.7 Project Conditions
1 .7 .1 Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally
dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at
occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.8 Coordination
1.8.1 Coordinate installation of anchorages for finish carpentry items. Furnish setting
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete
inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

Materials
2 .1 .1


2 .1 .2


2 .1 .3


2 .1 .4


2 .1 .5
2 .1 .6




2 .1 .7
2 .1 .8


2 .1 .9



Wood Framing Members: Clean, seasoned, straight, square and true on all four sides.
Kiln dry wood materials for interior use to a moisture content of 4% to 8.
Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): to BS 1142, BS EN 120 & BS EN 317, HMR (high
moisture resistance type), with average density of 780-800 kg/m3
Plywood: to BS 6566 WBP, BS 1455, BS EN 313-2, BS EN 635-1, BS EN 635-2 & BS
EN 365-3, bonded type, Grade 1 for paint finish.
Wood Veneers: To BS 6566 Part 8(85) and BS 1455 as shown on Drawings, with a
minimum thickness of 0.6 mm.
Solid Hardwood Edging: To BS 6566 & BS 1455, to match wood veneers.
Plastic Laminate: standard general purpose grade (HGS) for flatwork, standard post
forming grade for shaped profiles and bends (HGP) and backing sheet (VGS), having
Class 1 Fire classification as per BS 476.
Colours as selected by CLIENT.
Wood Adhesive: As recommended by wood adhesive manufacturer to suit end use
Preservative Coating: To BS 5056, 8% copper naphthenate solution for treatment of
wood exposed to exterior conditions.
Polyurethane Lacquer: As recommended by the specified manufacturer.





2.1.10


2.1.11
2.1.12




2.1.13





2.1.14


2.1.15

Plastic Laminate Adhesive: As recommended by plastic laminate manufacturer to suit
end use.
Stainless Steel Adhesive: As recommended by stainless steel manufacturer.
Wood Architraves: Wood architrave and door finish and colour to CLIENT's approval,
free from knots, free of scrap, free of sap, free of bark, free of wane, free of twist and
wrap, kiln dried, consistent and uniform grain direction, to CLIENT's approval, for
finishes as shown on Drawings and Schedules.
Fire Resistant and Flame Retardant Treatment: All timber, plywood and boarding
where required to meet flame spread requirements to BS 476: Part 7 and Fire
Resistance under BS 476: Part 8, shall be treated with approved preservative to meet
BWPDA (British Wood Preserving and Damp-Proof Association) specification for Class
1 rating.
Stainless Steel Sheet and Trim: to be to AISI Type 316, satin polished (No. 7) finish.
See Drawings for locations and sizes.
Glass: in accordance with Section 08800 related to "GLAZING" glass/vision panels.

2.2 Fabrication - General
2.2.1


2.2.2


2.2.3




2.2.4






2 .2 .5




2.2.6




2.2.7



2.2.8
As far as practical, assemble work at the workshop and deliver to the job site ready for
installation. Leave ample allowance for fitting and scribing on the job.
Fabricate work square and to the required lines. Recess and conceal fasteners and
anchor heads.
Provide wooden members free from bruises, blemishes, mineral marks, knots, shake
and other defects and select for colour, grain and texture. Machine and hand sand
surfaces exposed in the finished work to an even, smooth surface free from defects
detrimental to appearance.
Provide running members in the maximum lengths obtainable. Provide thickness of
members in maximum dressed size of standard lumber. Where thickness or width
indicated is not available in hardwoods, use glue lamination to obtain sizes required.
Spline or key solid boards 150 mm and wider and glue under pressure. Provide
unexposed backs of veneers having the same physical characteristics as the face
veneer.
Design construction details for expansion and contraction of the materials. Unless
otherwise specified, work shall be glued, and blind screwed or nailed. Properly frame
material with tight, hairline joints and hold rigidly in place. Use glue blocks where
necessary.
Conceal joints and connections wherever possible. Locate prominent joints where
directed. Glue and pin mortise and tenon joints. Intermediate joints between supports
will not be permitted. Set and fill surface nails. Prevent opening-up of glue lines in the
finished work.
Comply with glue manufacturer's recommendations for lumber moisture content, glue
shelf life, pot life, working life, mixing, spreading, assembly time, time under pressure,
ambient temperature and humidity.
Provide exposed end grain of solid members and edges of exposed plywood with
matching solid wood edging at least 6 mm thick.









2 .2 .9 Seal finished carpentry items before they leave the fabricating shop. For surfaces to
receive a natural finish, ensure that the sealer is compatible with the final finish. Co-
operate with Section 09900 Painting and obtain written Approval of proposed sealer.

























































3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1


3.1.2


3.1.3



3.1.4
3.1.5

Maintain minimum surface and ambient temperatures of 20
0
C at a relative humidity
between 20 to 60%.
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas
prior to installing.
Before proceeding with woodwork required to be fitted to other construction, obtain
measurements and verify dimensions of shop drawing details as required for accurate
fit.
Coordinate work with other Sections affected by installation.
Discard units of material which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly
treated, not adequately seasoned, or are too small to fabricate work with a minimum of
joints or optimum joint arrangement, or which are of defective manufacture with
respect to surfaces, sizes and patterns.
3.2 Installation

3.2.1
3.2.2



3.2.3


3.2.4




3 .2 .5


3.2.6
3.2.7

Install work plumb, true and square, neatly scribed to adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged
finish at cuts. Attach woodwork securely in place with uniform joints. Provide for
thermal expansion.
Make allowance around periphery and where fixed objects pass through or project into
or veneer work to permit normal movement without restriction.
Secure work by concealed means in an approved manner (or as detailed). Fasteners
shall not be more than 600 mm o.c. and 150 mm from edges and ends. Where
concealed fastening is not possible use stainless steel trim threaded screws with
matching cup washers or other approved means.
Sand or chamfer site cut edges of the laminate veneers free from chips. Radius any
internal angle cuts. Seal core edges.
Install wood glazing stops of same wood species as door facing.
Apply one coat of wood preservative to all concealed wood surfaces.


3.3 Cleaning

3.3.1 On completion, remove manufacturer's identification markings and clean finished
surfaces.
3.4 Completion and Adjusting

3.4.1


3.4.2


3.4.3






On completion of all work in the building, all woodwork shall be checked carefully for
defects.
All interior work shall receive a final hand sanding to smooth off projections, butt
marks and other minor defects.
All working parts shall be adjusted and refitted and refinished as required.


END OF SECTION





DIVISION SIX - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 41 16 - PLASTIC LAMINATED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
1. GENERAL

1.1 Description of Work

i.



ii.

This Section covers Pantry cabinet and accessories. Items not mentioned specifically herein,
which are necessary to make a complete installation, shall also be included as implied in
normal practice.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
a. Division 9 Section 09 30 33.
b. Division 6 Section 06 10 00 & 06 20 00. c.
Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures"
1.2 Submittals

i. Submit latest catalogue in accordance with general conditions. ii.
Submit Shop Drawings

1.3 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

i. Delivery of Materials
1. The materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's original product packing.

ii. Storage of Materials:
1. The materials and fixtures shall be stored off the ground in a dry place



2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Pantry Counter

a. Built-in 30mm thick granite surface counter including all fixtures, fastenings and support works as
per drawings, and stainless steel sink.

2.2 Pantry Cabinet

- Pantry cabinet with stainless steel sink and mixer, drawers and cabinets.
- Cabinet shall be 18 mm thick MDF with 0.7mm thick HPL finish on both sides.
- Size and height of the cabinets shall be as per the drawing.
- All fasteners shall be stainless steel.
- Hinges shall be stainless steel automatic spring type
- Handles shall be aluminum PVC coated.










3. EXECUTION

3.1 Installation/ Application/ Performance/ Erection

A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the CLIENT & Manufacturer complete recommendations.
B. All working parts shall be adjusted, refitted, and refurnished as required.



- END OF SECTION -




















































DIVISION SIX - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 61 16 - SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS


1. GENERAL

1 .1 Summary
1 .1 .1 Section includes: Furnishings and installing solid polymer fabricating products,
as indicated and as specified.
1 .1 .2 Work Specified in this Section:
a. Counter Top. b.
Installation
1 .1 .3 Related Sections:
a. Division 06.


1.2 References
1 .1 .1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
C501


D256
D570
D638
D696
Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the
Taber Abrader
Impact Resistance of Plastics and Electrical Insulating materials
Water Absorption of Plastics
Tensile Properties of Plastics
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics
D2583 Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
1 .1 .2 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
LD.3 High Pressure Decorative Laminates


1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Samples: Comply with Section 01330: submittals, submit a 300 x 300mm
sample of the selected color. If color is not indicated on drawings, submit
manufacturer's standard color book showing colors of actual material.
Following selection of colors, submit samples as specified above.

1 .3 .2 Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit complete manufacturer's fabrication
and installation instructions.
1 .3 .3 Upon completion, furnish to CLIENT one set of manufacturer's recommended
cleaning procedures.


1 .4 Quality Assurance











1 .4 .1 Installer Qualifications: Installation of solid polymer fabrications shall be by
a firm that is authorized by the original material manufacturer to fabricate and
install the work, and that can demonstrate successful experience in installing
items similar in type and quality to those required for this Project.


1 .5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1 .5 .1


1 .5 .2
Transport and handle sheets and fabricated items by methods that will
prevent damage and defacing.
Storage: If units are not installed immediately upon delivery to site, store in
covered location, off the ground or floor, and cover with moisture and stain-
resistant paper or plastic.


1 .6 Environmental Conditions
1.6.1 Obtain and comply with manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and
humidity conditions for storage and installation.


1.7 Warranty
1.7.1 Furnish the manufacturer's ten-year warranty against defective materials and
workmanship.


2. PRODUCTS

2 .1

Materials
2 .1 .1




2 .1 .2



General: Solid polymer fabrications shall be non-porous, homogeneous blend
of polyester/acrylic alloys and fillers to create a materials that looks like stone,
but cuts like wood. The color and pattern shall extend throughout the
material. The material shall be 30 mm thickness.
Properties: The material shall conform to the following properties:



TECHNICAL DATA

PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST METHOD
Specific Gravity 1.6min. ASTM D792
Hardness (Rock well)
Elongation (%)
Tensile strength (psi)


Tensile modulus (psi)

Abrasion resistance

Water absorption after 24 hours, (%)
90
0.3
4,000


50,000

Pass

0.04
ASTM D2583
ASTM D638
ASTM D638


ASTM D638

ANSI Z 124

ASTM D570









Izod impact foot pounds per inch

Impact resistance pound


Linear thermal expansion

High temperature resistance

Boiling water resistance

Stain resistance
Fungi and Bacteria

Flame spread classification



0.25

No
fracture

3.5 x 10E5

No
effect
No
Effect
Pass Rating 41
No Growth

I



ASTM D256

NEMA LD3


ASTM D696

NEMA LD3

NEMA LD3

ANSI Z 124
ASTM G21, G22

ASTM E84


2 .1 .3





2.2 Fabrication


2 .2 .1
2 .2 .2



2 .2 .3
2 .2 .4



2 .2 .5
2 .2 .6
2 .2 .7
2 .2 .8




2 .2 .9


Fabrication and Installation Materials:
a. Joint Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer.
b. Silicone Sealant: Type recommended by manufacturer.





Solid polymer fabrications shall be fabricated by authorized fabricator.
Solid polymer fabrications countertops thickness shall be as indicated, one piece
wherever possible, and with flush joints sealed with joint adhesive where required.
Shop fabricate in largest sections possible for transporting and building access.
Ease top and front edges and corners.
Solid polymer fabrications shall be fabricated to field measurements. Seams shall
be located where shown on approved shop drawings. Provide seam blocks under
all seams where necessary in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Edge detail shall be as selected by CLIENT.
Backsplash height shall be according to drawings.
Backsplashes shall be field installed, with tight, sealed joints.
Coves: Provide shop fabricated, integrally molded coves at back and ends where
against walls or other vertical surfaces, with 10 mm radius between top and
splash.


Finish of exposed surfaces shall be polished according to the methods prescribed
by the manufacturer.


3. EXECUTION

3 .1 Examination







3.1.1 Verify that counters and supports are suitable for installation in accordance with
shop drawings.


3.2 Installation
3 .2 .1



3 .2 .2


3 .2 .3
Install vanities in locations indicated, conforming to manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures. Set tops on supports, and anchor using fasteners shown
on approved submittals.
Use silicone sealant for attaching backsplashes and reveal edges. Seal all joints
with sealant.
Field joints shall be hard seamed unless otherwise specified.


3.3 Cleaning
3.3.1 At completion of work, remove all excess material, dirt, dust, trash and other
materials resulting from the installation. Clean surfaces, remove all labels, and
leave the area clean.


3.4 Protection
3 .4 .1 Provide suitable protection on surfaces to protect the installation from damage until
final acceptance.





END OF SECTION

































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 07 00 00 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
- 07 10 00 - Water proofing/Thermal Insulation
- 07 10 50 - Underground Water Tank GRP Lining
- 07 84 00 - Fire stopping
- 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants



















































DIVISION SEVEN - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 10 00 - WATER PROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 Description of Work

1.1.1 General

This section covers the provisions for applied elastomeric waterproofing.

1.1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

Concrete Work is specified in Division 03, concrete.


1.2 Quality Control

1.2.1



1.2.2


1.2.3


1.2.4



1.2.5



1.2.6




1.2.7

Provide products for the waterproofing systems that have been produced and installed to establish
and maintain watertight seals. Materials for waterproofing shall comply with specified performance
requirements.

Waterproofing shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and by an
applicator approved by the manufacturer, and the CLIENT.

Proceed with waterproofing Work only after substrate construction and all roof-opening Works have
been completed by enclosing with finish items.

Obtain waterproofing materials of each type required, from a single manufacturer to the greatest
extent possible. Provide secondary materials as recommended by the manufacturer of primary
materials.

Installing company shall be a firm with not less than six waterproofing projects similar to the
requirements of this Project, with satisfactory in-service performance. The installing company shall
be acceptable to the primary waterproofing materials manufacturer.

Prior to installing waterproofing and associated work, meet at Project site with installer of each
component of associated Work, and installers of work requiring coordination with waterproofing
Work. Review material selections and Procedures to be followed in performing Work. Notify the
CLIENT at least 36 hours before conducting meeting.

Standards

The standards listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The standards
are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a- Liquid Applied - Elastomeric Membrane
i. ASTM C 957 Specification for High-solids content, cold liquid-applied elastomeric
waterproofing membrane with integral wearing surface.









ii.


iii.


iv.



v.
vi.
vii.
viii.

ASTM D 412


ASTM D 624


ASTM D 822



ASTM D 903
ASTM D 1335
ASTM D 2240
ASTM E 96

Test methods for Vulcanized rubber and thermo-plastic rubbers and
thermoplastic elastomers-tension.
Test method for test strength of conventional Vulcanized rubber and
thermoplastic elastomer
Practice for conducting tests on paint and related coatings and
materials using filtered open-flame carbon arc light and water
exposure apparatus
Test method for peel or stripping strength of adhesive bonds.
Test method for tuft bind of floor coverings.
Test method for rubber property - Durometer hardness.
Test method for water vapor transmission of material.


b- Sheet water proofing


i. ASTM D 146 Methods of sampling and testing bitumen-saturated felts and fabrics
used in roofing and waterproofing.
ii. ASTM D 412 Test methods for vulcanized rubber and thermo-plastic rubbers and
thermoplastic elastomers - tension.
iii. ASTM D 570 Test method for water absorption of plastics. iv.
ASTM E 96 Test method for water vapor transmission of material.


c- Filter Fabric Membrane


ix.
x.
xi.


xii.


xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.


xvii.


ASTM D 1621
ASTM D 3776
ASTM D 3786


ASTM D 4355


ASTM D 4991
ASTM D 4533
ASTM D 4632
ASTM D 4716


ASTM D 4751


Test method for compressive properties of rigid cellular plastics.
Test methods for mass per unit area of woven fabrics.
Test method for hydraulic bursting strength of knitted goods and
nonwoven fabrics.
Test method for deterioration of geotextiles from exposure to
ultraviolet light and water.
Test methods for water permeability of geotextiles by permittivity.
Test method for trapezoid tearing strength of geotextiles.
Test method for grab breaking load and elongation of geotextiles.
Test method for constant head hydraulic transmissivity of geotextiles
and geotextile related.
Test method for determining the apparent opening size of a
geotextile.
xviii. ASTM D 4833 Test method for index puncture resistance of geotextiles,
geomembranes and related products.
xix. ASTM D 4886 Test method for abrasion resistance of geotextiles (sand paper /
sliding block method)









xx1v. ASTM G 21 Practice for determining resistance of plastics to bacteria.
d- General Directives for the Assessment of Roof Waterproofing Systems MOAT 27, January 83
e- Special Directives for the Assessment of SBS Elastomer bitumen MOAT 31, August 84
f- Published Agreement Certificates
UEA tc, c/o BBA, P.O. Box 195, Bucknalls Lane, Watford, WD2 7NG U.K
g- BSI (British Standards Institute)
BS 8102: 1990 - Protection of structures against water from the ground
CP 144 - Roofing Works
BSI - 2 Park Street, London, W1A 2BS - U.K
h- CSTB (Scientific and Technical Center for Construction)
DTU 20-12 - Code of Practice - Concrete roofs to receive waterproofing
DTU 43-1 - Code of Practice - Roofing over concrete deck
DTU 14.1 - Code of Practice - Below grade Tanking works
FIT Classification for roof waterproofing - Sept. 89
j- Published Agreement Certificates
CSTB - 4 Avenue du Recteur Poincare 75016 PARIS France


1.2.8










1.2.9


Waterproofing contractor certification:

The Waterproofing Contractor is required to:
Submit manufacturer's approval of applicator.
Submit complete details about the contractor's company: company profile, list of specialized staff
with their respective qualification and experience in the U.A.E. climatic conditions, references
(minimum 5 years), evidence of their ability to handle projects of a similar volume, specific
experience in the U.A.E. or in the Gulf and list of equipment.


Job Conditions

a- Environmental Requirements:
i- Weather Conditions. Proceed with waterproofing Work only when weather conditions
comply with manufacturer's recommendations, and which will permit materials to be
applied in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
ii- Do not apply membrane primer to damp or wet surfaces.
b- Protection and Safety on Site:
i.

ii.
iii.
iv.
v.

vi.
The Contractor shall abide by all means to National and International Labor and health
regulations. Safety precautions on Site shall incorporate, but are not limited to:
All roofs to be fitted at the perimeter with handrails with safety nets.
All ladders and temporary stairs to be well secured at top and bottom.
Sufficient number of fire extinguishers to be available.
Required polyethylene sheet or tarpaulin to prevent spraying on adjacent structures or
equipment.
Workers to wear safety gloves and protection clothes.










1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Submit the following items in accordance with Conditions of Contract.

i.





ii.

PRODUCT DATA:





SHOP DRAWINGS:

Manufacturer's printed specification and installation
instructions, including procedures and materials for
termination, penetrations, flashing, compatibility and bonding.
The Contractor shall provide with his submittals all the relevant
Standards documentation.
Indicate layout of sheets including side and end laps
mechanical equipment flashing, parapet flashing, drain details.
iii. SAMPLES :
a- Membrane Samples: Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples
b- Flash membrane Samples: Three 300 mm x 300 mm samples
c- Any other components required by the CLIENT.


iv. Accepted samples will be retained to serve as a basis for checking at the time of delivery of
materials to site. The manufacturer shall furnish, when requested, proof of origin and quality of
the materials that will be used or details of where it has previously been applied. Only
materials specified or approved by the CLIENT will be permitted to be used. The CLIENT will
stipulate acceptance tests and their mode of operation to be carried out on materials supplied
by the contractor.



1.3.2



Certification

i. Submit manufacturer's certification stating materials ordered and supplied are compatible with
each other, suited for locations and purpose intended and shipped in sufficient quantity to
ensure proper, timely installation.
ii. Submit a certificate signed by the manufacturer of the materials specified which states the
materials installed on the works meet manufacturer's published performance standards and the
requirements of the specification.
iii. Submit waterproofing subcontractor qualifications indicating related experience and equipment
and available manpower.


1.4 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling


Materials shall be delivered to the Job Site in unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name,
brand name, and description of contents. Membrane, flashing, and adhesives shall be stored in clean,
dry areas. Storage temperature for adhesives shall be between 16 and 27 degrees C. Protection
boards shall be stored flat and above the ground surface.

1.5 Warranties and Guarantees









1.5.1 Warranty / guarantee shall be made in the name of COMPANY and shall be signed by the
membrane manufacturer and applicator agreeing to repair or replace defects in material and
workmanship and failure of waterproofing to prevent water from entering into the building: for
period of ten (15) years from date of the Provisional Acceptance Certificate.

Under the warranty, the membrane manufacturer and applicator shall be responsible for all costs
of removal and replacement of all work required to make good the repair and / or replacement of
defective works.

The warranty shall clearly include the following:

i. All materials in the water proofing systems shall be free from manufacturing defects and
comply with manufacturer's published technical specifications.
ii. All workmanship in water proofing systems shall be free from any defects and comply in all
respects with the manufacturer's technical instructions and control.
iii.This warranty becomes operative from the date of issue of the preliminary handing over
certificate of the contract and shall be valid for a period of ten (15) calendar years.
iv. Within this warranty the contractor is liable for the cost of repair of defective materials or
installation of replacement materials or system.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 Waterproofing system for the under-ground structures within the ground using externally applied,
water proof membrane.

i.



ii.

The materials that comprise this system shall meet the following criteria or be of an equal or
better specification. All materials are subject to the CLIENT'S approval before they can be
included within the work.
Waterproofing system shall be carried out by application of a solvent free SBS elastomeric
bitumen jellified emulsion with an elongation at break of at least 1000 % with 100 % elastic
recovery and thixotropic performances
iii. The Waterproofing shall be applied over a clean, dry and smooth concrete finish.
iv. Waterproofing system shall be laid with brush or roller in two coats , at total rate of 1.5 kg/
sq.m, on all surfaces, allowed to cure, before backfill.
MEMBRANE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS (Characteristics of dry film):
i) Tensile strength : >20 N/cm2
ii) Elongation : >1000%
iii) Heat resistance : 2 hours, 100 deg.C, no flow vertically iv)
Cold temperature flexibility : < 0 deg.C
Adhesion on concrete Peeling of dry film from asbestos, cement plate at 10mm/mn
at 90 Deg.C : 210 N/50mm at
180 Deg.C : 190 N/50mm.











2 . 1. 2 Waterproofing system for roofing.

i. The materials that comprise this system shall meet the following criteria or be of an equal or
better specification. All materials are subject to the CLIENT'S approval before they can be
included within the work.
ii. One layer Polyurethane foam average thickness of 155mm thick, 45-50 Kg/m3.
iii. UV resistant protective coating 600 mic. thick
iv. Geotextile separation and protective layer 120gm/m
2
.
v. Concrete screed 25N/mm
2
, OPC, 80mm average thickness. vi.
SBR bonding agents.
vii. Combo top coat 800 mic. thick.
viii. Waterproofing system selection subjected to CLIENT approval on material and technical
specifications.
2.1.3 Damp Proofing System for concrete surfaces behind facades, liquid applied.

i.



ii.

The materials that comprise this system shall meet the following criteria or be of an equal or
better specification. All materials are subject to the CLIENT'S approval before they can be
included within the work.
Application of a solvent free SBS elastomeric bitumen jellified emulsion with an elongation at
break of at least 1000% with 100% recovery with good thixotropic performances. Water
proofing material should have minimum properties, as specified under section 2.1.1 above.
iii. Application to be with a brush or roller, at the rate recommended by the manufacturer with
minumim 500 g/m2 (on smooth surface) to 750 g/m2 (rough conc. Surface or block work) and
allowed to cure.


2.1.4 Waterproofing system for wet areas using brush or roller applied bitumen jellified emulsion.

i.



ii.

The materials that comprise this system shall meet the following criteria or be of an equal or
better specification. All materials are subject to the CLIENT'S approval before they can be
included within the work.
Application of a solvent free SBS elastomeric bitumen jellified emulsion with an elongation at
break of at least 1000% with recovery with good thixotropic performances, as specified 2.1.1
above.
iii. Provide all accessories including metal sleeves as recommended by the membrane
manufacturer for the application shown on the Drawings and specified herein.
iv. All components that comprise the system must be obtained from the same manufacturer and
be installed by the same applicator. e.g. skirting, flashings, primers, mastics, tapes, sealants,
membranes, fillet pieces, cover strips etc.


2.1.5 Damp proofing and slip membrane system for ground bearing slabs on grade using polythene
sheets.









i. The materials that comprise this system shall meet the following criteria or be of an equal or
better specification. All materials are subject to the CLIENT'S approval before they can be
included within the work.
ii. 2 layers of polythene sheeting with a minimum gauge thickness of 1000.
iii. 50mm thick protection screed or a protection board as recommended by the manufacturers.
iv. Waterproofing of slab on grade shall be carried out by application of a solvent free SBS
elastomeric bitumen jellified emulsion (Refer clause 2.1.1).


2.1.6


Damp-Proof Course on Ground R.C. Beams below Block Work.

Damp-proof course shall consist of one layer of tropical quality bituminized fiber felt complying with
type 5B of British Standard No. 743: 1951 weighing not less than 3.25 Kg/sq.m (6 lb/sq.yd)/ the
damp-proof course shall be well lapped at corners and joints and bedded in cement mortar (1.4)
mix and pointed both sides.


Where shown on drawings the CONTRACTOR shall similarly provide and build in a vertical damp-
proof course at jambs of openings in walls and a horizontal damp-proof course above such
opening and to parapet walls.

2.2 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE TANK WATER PROOFING

Slabs and walls of underground RCC tanks shall be carried out by application of a 4 mm thick SBS
elastomeric bitumen membrane, with double reinforcements (180g non woven polyester and an anti-
puncture polyester film surfacing) prefabricated flexible panels.
The System shall be applied over clean, dry and smooth concrete surface. All preparatory works
(blinding, gunnite etc.) must be executed prior to any membrane laying.
The membrane shall be loose laid with 100mm side laps and 150mm end laps torched, seamed and
protected with 3mm thick protection board.
Horizontally, the membrane shall be loose laid over a 100g/m2 non woven synthetic Geotextile and
covered with a 140 g/m2 non woven Geotextile before pouring a 50 mm thick mortar protective screed
to receive reinforced concrete structure, membrane dimension shall be 4meters width by 80 meters
max. length to reduce the numbers of overlaps ( possibility of workmen-ship error)
Vertically, the membrane can be laid either on structural walls after building erection or on permanent
shuttering ( secant piles, diaphragm wall,...) before building erection.
Where permanent shuttering is used, the membrane shall be loose laid a 100 g/m2 non woven
synthetic Geotextile, nailed on top-laps every 4 metres vertically and protected with 3mm thick bitumen
impregnated protection board, before concreting.
Where structural walls to be water proofed, the membrane, shall be fully bonded over ASTM D41
primer, nailed on top-laps every 5 metres vertically and protected with 3mm thick bitumen impregnated
protection board, before backfill.












Membrane Technical Characteristics:
i) Nominal thickness (mm) : 4
ii) Surfaced : Polyester film with highly resistant to root
penetration
iii) Weight : 5.1 Kg/m2
iv) Dimensional stability : 0.3 %
v) Heat flow test : 100C
vi) Tensile strength at break : 1000 x 700 N/50mm
vii) Elongation to break : 50 x 50 %
viii) Cold bending flexibility : -20 C
ix) Static puncture resistance : Kg
x) Dynamic puncture resistance : 20 J
xi) Resistance to nail tearing : 200 x 250 N


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation
All products and system shall be applied / installed in strict accordance with the product/system's
manufacturer's directions and to be taken to at least 300mm above finished floor level, unless shown
otherwise on the drawings.




End of Section
07122

























DIVISION SEVEN - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 10 50 - UNDERGROUND WATER TANK GRP LINING


1. GENERAL

1.1. Section Includes

1 .1 .1 .
1 .1 .2 .


1 .1 .3 .

Compliance with related sections and General conditions of the contract.
This Section governs GRP lining system installed by all trades throughout the building,
including work under Division 7.
Provide a 6 mm minimum GRP lining required for insulation the internal walls of the
underground water tank. GRP lining is made from fiberglass strands chopped to length and
bonded together with powder binder. Chopped strand mat is used primarily for hand lay-up
processes.
1.2. Related Work

1.2.1. Work specified under Division 07.


1.3. Quality Assurance

1 .3 .1 .





1 .3 .2 .


1.4. Submittals

1 .4 .1 .





1 .4 .2 .




1 .4 .3 .

Install GRP lining system specified in this section only by a firm who has adequate
equipment, and skilled tradesmen to perform it expeditiously, and is known to have been
responsible for satisfactory applications of GRP lining system for a period of at least the
immediate past five years.


Apply GRP lining only by an applicator approved by the manufacturer of the material.




Samples


Submit 300 m x 300 mm samples including all colors available of GRP lining with all its
layers shall be used.

Method statement and risk assessment plan shall be submitted by the contractor for the
approval of the COMPANY. Details of the layers shall be submitted by the contractor in
accordance with the design recommendation of the product's manufacturer.


Shop drawings showing water bar layout with all GRP lining layers to be provided.


1.5. Delivery, Storage and Handling

1 .5 .1 . GRP packing shall be in rolls, each roll is wrapped in waterproofing materials, multiply
corrugated cartoon box. And identify on attached labels the manufacturer, contents and
material specification number.








1.6. Guarantee

1 .6 .1 .



1.7. Standards

1 .7 .1 .


1 .7 .2 .

Include GRP lining materials, layers and installation under guarantee of waterproofing for a
minimum of 15 years.




GRP lining mats to be manufactured in accordance with specification laid down in BS 3496 / IS
11551.
GRP lining mat to meet the requirements of GB/T17470-1998 codes, EMC300, EMC450,
EMC600 and EMC900.







2. PRODUCTS

2 .1 . Materials Component

2 .1 .1 .
2 .1 .2 .



2 .1 .3 .
2 .1 .4 .
2 .1 .5 .
2 .1 .6 .

Glass chopped strand mat conforming to BS: 3496
Resin used pre accelerate thixptroice, Orthophthalic acid based unsaturated polyester resin
with good mechanical properties. The elongation at break is similar to that of the glass
reinforcement. .
Catalyst for curing of polyester resin (Metheyl Ethyle Ketone Peroxide).
Titanium Dioxide.
Aerosil Power (Fumed Silica).
Total material layers thickness shall be at least 6mm thick.


2 .2 . Resin Specifications

2 .2 .1 . R
2
O < 0.80%
2 .2 .2 . Compatible Resin Polyester
2 .2 .3 . Fiber Diameter 13 m
2 .2 .4 . Moisture Content < 0.20%
2 .2 .5 . LOI 2.0%-8.0%
2 .2 .6 . Binder Type Powder or emulsion polyester (as required).


2 .3 . Gel Coat Performance

2 .3 .1 . Heat Resistance
2 .3 .2 . Boiling Water resistance






2 .3 .3 . Non wax and non promoted


2 .4 . Gel Coat Specifications

2 .4 .1 .
2 .4 .2 .
2 .4 .3 .
2 .4 .4 .
2 .4 .5 .

Appearance
Color
Viscosity at 25
0
C,
Gelling time at 25
0
C,
N.V. 105
0
C, 3 hrs

Turbid
Pale
2800-3200 cPs 20-
25 minutes
57-61%
2 .4 .6 . Acid Value <22mg KOH/g


2 .5 . Examination

2 .5 .1 .



2 .5 .2 .

Ensure that surfaces to receive materials are clean, smooth, firm, dry, and free of moisture,
voids, projections, loose material, oil, grease, curing compounds and other foreign matter.


Defective layers installation resulting from application to unsatisfactory surfaces will be
considered the responsibility of those installing the materials specified in this section, who
shall submit proposals for making good to the COMPANY satisfaction.








3. EXECUTION

3 .1 . Preparation

3 .1 .1 .



3 .1 .2 .



3 .1 .3 .

All the concrete surface imperfection on the substrate such as pin hose, etc. shall be
rectified prior to cleaning and application of the GRP lining material.


During application, remove all dust and dirt from substrate surfaces, using an industrial type
vacuum cleaner or by blowing clean with an a air compressor.


Take particular care to prevent staining of adjacent property, construction and surfaces by
GRP lining materials.
3 .2 . Application

3 .2 .1 . Cleaning: The concrete surface shall be cleaned by removing loose material, dirt and any
other foreign material. The surface shall be totally dry with no traces of moisture.


3 .2 .2 . Priming: A thin coat of catalyzed resin is applied on the entire surface to be lined.








3 .2 .3 .



3 .2 .4 .




3 .2 .5 .




3 .2 .6 .

Application of Laminate (1
st
Layer): A layer of fiberglass chopped strand mat while giving
due overlaps impregnated with unsaturated polyester resin is applied on the entire surface.


Application of Laminate (2
nd
Layer): Second layer of fiberglass chopped strand mat
impregnated with unsaturated polyester resin is applied on the 1
st
layer. The application of
laminates depends upon the total thickness which shall be minimum of 6 mm thick.


Inspection: Lining shall be inspected visually to ensure freedom from poorly wet-out glass,
entrapped air and exposed fibers. Defects are repaired by sanding a generous area around
the defect and applying a layer of glass mat saturated with activated resin.


Top Coating: -A wax added- unsaturated polyester resin top coat is applied to obtain the
lining with maximum corrosion resistance and to obtain fairly smooth surface.


The ceiling slab of the water tank shall have a coat of FGRP wax added top coat only.



END OF SECTION










































DIVISION SEVEN - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 84 00 - FIRE STOPPING


1 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
This Section governs fire stopping system installed by all trades throughout the
building, including work under Division 8, 9, mechanical and electrical divisions.
Provide fire stopping and smoke seals required for the Works and not part of the
work of other Sections.

1.2 Related Work

1.2.1 Work specified under Sections 03 30 00, 07 92 00, Division 8, 9, mechanical and
electrical divisions.

1.3 System Description

1.3.1





1.3.2

Provide fire stopping and smoke seal materials and/or systems to act as fire stopping
and smoke seals at openings around penetrations, at un-penetrated openings, at
projecting or recessed items, and at openings and joints within fire separations and
assemblies having a fire-resistance rating, including openings and spaces at
perimeter edge conditions.
Provide seals to form draft free and effective barriers against passage of fire, smoke
and gases, and to provide and maintain fire resistance ratings not less than the fire
resistance ratings of the surrounding floor, wall or other assembly. (120 min).


1.4 Regulatory Requirement

1.4.1


1.4.2

Provide work of this Section to requirements of and acceptable to the authorities
having jurisdiction & CLIENT.
Fire stopping and smoke seal materials shall conform to both the temperature and
flame ratings of U.L.C. and, where applicable, to ASTM E814 or equivalent BSI
standards (BS 476 Part 20 and BS 5889) and other requirements of Authorities
having Jurisdiction.



1.5 Quality Assurance

1.5.1 Applicator: Use competent installers, experienced in the application of the materials
and systems being used, approved and trained by the material or system
manufacturer.

1.6 Submittals

1.6.1 Comply with requirements: Shop Drawings, Products Data & Samples - Submittals.


1.6.2




1.6.3



1.6.4



1.6.5



1.6.6

Shop Drawings: Indicate Test assembly number from a recognized Fire Testing
Laboratory, the required temperature and flame rating, thickness, installation methods
and materials of fire stopping and smoke seals, damming materials, anchorages and
fastenings for each condition to be connected on site.
Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit complete set of data for materials and
prefabricated devices. Include manufacturer's printed instructions for preparation,
installation and curing instruction.
Samples: Each type and color of fire stopping and smoke seal material. Install fire
stopping and smoke seals samples in a 12 mm wide joint found between two (2) 150
mm long strips of material.
Manufacturer's Certification: Fire stopping and smoke seal materials comply with
specified requirements for hardness stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile
strength, elongation, flexibility, water absorption and resistance to heat.
Safety Data Sheets: Submit Safety Data sheets for inclusion in works record
documents.



1.7 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1.7.1 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's
seals and labels intact showing manufacturer product name, color, expiration date,
mixing instruction and curing time. Protect from damage and environmental
conditions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.8 Site Conditions

1.8.1 Comply with manufacturer's recommended requirements for temperature, relative
humidity, and substrate moisture content during application and curing of materials.
1.8.2 Do not proceed with installation of fire stopping where joint width is less than allowed
by through penetration fire stopping manufacture.


1.9 Warranty

1 .9 .1 Warranty the work of this Section for a period of five years from date of issuance of
taking over certificate.















2 PRODUCTS

2.1































2.2

Materials

2.1.1





2.1.2



2.1.3
2.1.4


2.1.5



2.1.6


2.1.7
2.1.8



2.1.9
2.1.10


Mixing

2.1.1


2.1.2



Fire stopping and Smoke Seal Materials and Systems: Certified in accordance with BS
476 Part 20 DIN 4102 Part 1 or approved similar agency, asbestos free, and complying
with standards specified herein, by one or more of the specified acceptable
manufacturers, installed in accordance with tested assemblies acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
Service Penetration Assemblies and Fire Stop Components: To meet BS 476 Part
20, NES 711 and 713 and product to meet the requirements of the above for each
field of application.
Materials at openings intended for re-entry such as cables: Elastomeric seal.
Materials at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical
items requiring sound and vibration control: Elastomeric seal.
Materials at movable joints and space: Flexible, Elastomeric seal suitable to
withstand the required movement and capable of returning to original configuration
without damage to the seal and without adhesive or cohesive failure.
Primers: To manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, sub-strate and
end use. Compatible to seals.
Water: Potable clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.
Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: To manufacturer's
recommendations and in accordance with the tested assembly being installed as
acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction.
Materials at vertical joints: Non-sagging type.
Intumescent Strips: To fire rated doors.




Mix components in a mixer clean and free of used and set materials and surface
contaminants.
Thoroughly mix components in accurate proportions.




















3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1


3.1.2


3.1.3




3.1.4




3.1.5
3.1.6

Examine sizes and conditions of joints and spaces to be filled to establish correct
thickness and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are dry.
Clean bonding surfaces to remove deleterious substances including dust, paint, rust,
oil, grease and other foreign matter which may otherwise impair effective bonding.
Do not apply fire stopping and smoke seals to substrates and surfaces previously
painted or treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings
unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove
coatings as required.
Remove insulation from insulated pipe and duct where such pipes or ducts penetrate
a fire separation unless the certified assembly permits such insulation to remain
within the assembly. Ensure the continuity and integrity of thermal and vapor barriers
where such are removed or altered, to the CLIENT's approval.
Prepare surfaces and prime in accordance with manufacturer's direction.
Use masking tape where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining
surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.


3.2 Application

3.2.1



3.2.2


3.2.3


3 .2 .4
3 .2 .5
3 .2 .6

3.2.7




3.2.8





Apply fire stopping and smoke seals in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and tested designs to provide the required temperature and flame rated
seal, and to prevent the passage of smoke.
Apply mixed materials within time limit recommended by the manufacturer. Prime
surfaces where indicated.
Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have
gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.
Completely fill and seal voids with fire stopping and smoke seal materials.
Tool or trowel exposed surfaces.
Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

Allow materials to cure. Do not cover up materials until full curing has taken place.

Vertical through penetration fire stopping system by natural means, and where this
inadequate by forced air.

Notify CLIENT when completed installations are ready for inspection and prior to
concealing or enclosing fire stopping and smoke seals.










3.3 Clean Up

3.3.1 Remove excess materials and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after
application.
3 .3 .2 Remove temporary barriers after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.


3.4 Schedule of Locations

3.4.1 Provide fire stopping and smoke seal materials at openings and penetrations in fire
resistance rated assemblies, including but not limited to, the following locations:

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Penetrations through fire resistance rated masonry, concrete, and partitions.
Top of fire resistant rated masonry cement partitions.
Intersection of fire resistant rated masonry partitions.
Control and sway joints in fire resistance rated masonry partitions.
Penetrations through fire resistant rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire resistance rated
separations.




END OF SECTION




































DIVISION SEVEN - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANT



1 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Compliance with related specification sections and General conditions of the
contract.
Joint sealants and expansion joints required for the Works, and not part of the
work of other Sections.
Coordinate with Sections 03 30 00 - Cast in place Concrete; 07 84 00 - Fire
Stopping; 07 10 00 - Waterproofing & Thermal insulation; 08 81 00 - Glass and
Glazing.

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1



1.2.2




1.2.3

Have Work performed by a recognized established sealant subcontractor with at
least five years experience and having skilled mechanics thoroughly trained and
competent in the use of sealant equipment and the specified materials.
Arrange with the sealant manufacturers for visits at the job site by their technical
representatives before beginning the sealant installation to discuss the
procedures to be adopted, to analyze site conditions and to inspect the surfaces
and joints to be sealed, so that recommendations may be made.
Discuss following with the representative of manufacturer:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Weather conditions under which work will be done.
Anticipated frequency and extent of joint movements.
Joint design.
Suitability of Durometer hardness and other properties of material to be
used.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1


1.3.2



1.3.3




1.3.4

Comply with requirements of section 01 33 00: Shop Drawings, Products Data &
Samples - Submittals.
Samples: Submit samples of each type of compound, recommended primers,
joint back-up and fillers proposed to be used and installation details for approval
and later colour selection by CLIENT.
Manufacturer's Literature: Submit manufacturer's literature describing each
material used in work of this section and application instructions. Literature shall
contain statement that material complies with standards specified for material.


Warranty: Warrant the work of this section against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of 5 years and agree to make good promptly any
defects which occur within warranty period. Defects shall include but shall not be
limited to drying and failure in adhesion or cohesion, air and moisture leakage,
discolouration and staining of adjacent materials.






1.4 Environmental Conditions

1.4.1 Apply sealants at air and material temperatures as set by the manufacturer's
specifications and only to completely dry surfaces.




2 PRODUCTS

2.1

Materials

2.1.1
2.1.2



2 .1 .3


2 .1 .4


2.1.5


2.1.6
2.1.7


2.1.8


2.1.9



2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13



Sealants: Non-bleeding and capable of supporting their own weight.
Joint Filler: between concrete slab on grade and foundation walls sealed at slab
finish level with 2 part elastomeric sealant complying to BS 5212 to min. 20 mm
depth and compatible with filler boards.
Acrylic Sealant: To US Federal Specification TT-S-00230, one part acrylic
polymer sealant, solvent curing type. Mono.
Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant: To BS 5889; Type B, one component silicone
base mildew resistant sealant, solvent curing type containing fungicides.
Modified Polyurethane Sealant: To ASTM C920-1 979 and US Federal
Specification TT-S-00230C, one component modified polyurethane sealant.
Silicone Sealant: One part elastomeric low modulus silicone rubber sealant.
Fire Resistant Sealant: One component high quality fire rated silicone sealant to
BS-476 Part 20 and BS : 5889.
Primers for Sealant: As recommended by the specified sealant manufacturers
and to suit the various job conditions.
Joint Backing: Non-absorbent closed cell foam polyethylene. Compatible with
joint substrate Filler diameter shall be 25% greater than joint width before
installation.
Bond Breaker: Tape of type supplied or recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Expansion Joints: In floor, wall and ceiling shall be filled with 20mm deep sealant
Cleaning Materials: as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
All Sealants Cleaning Solvents, Filler and Primers: Compatible with each other.





3 EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

3.1.1




3.1.2

Clean joints and surfaces and ensure that surfaces are structurally sound, free
from grease or other contaminants which may adversely affect the adhesion of
the sealing materials. Use dry clean compressed air stream if necessary to clean
out the joint.
Clean surfaces with a solvent or cleaner recommended by the manufacturer of
the sealing materials.






3.1.3 Install when surfaces and ambient temperatures are between 40
o
F and 95
o
F
during the 24 hours application and curing period.
3.1.4 Test materials for indications of staining or poor adhesion before any sealing is
commenced.

3.2 Priming

3.2.1 If recommended by the sealant manufacturer prime joints to prevent staining, or
to assist the bond, or to stabilize porous surfaces.
3.2.2 Apply primer with a brush which will permit the priming of all joint surfaces.

3.3 Installation

3.3.1


3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6


3.3.7


3.3.8

Install joint backing materials at locations as detailed or where required by
sealant manufacturer's printed directions.
Install a bond breaker tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
Ensure that the correct sealant width/depth ratio and profile is maintained.
Finish joints free of wrinkles, sags, air pockets, ridges and embedded impurities.
Tool all sealant surfaces to produce a smooth surface.
Remove droppings and excess sealant as work progresses and before material
sets.
Use sealing materials of gun grade or tool grade consistency to suit the joint
conditions.
Commence sealing of joints prior to painting of surfaces.

3.4





3.5

Masking

3.4.1



Cleaning

3.5.1



Where necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent surfaces, mask the areas
adjacent to the joints with masking tape. Remove the tape immediately after the joint
has been completed.



Immediately clean adjacent surfaces which have been soiled and leave work in a
neat, clean condition. Remove excess materials and droppings using cleaners
and solvents recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

3.6 Location Schedule

3.6.1 Seal following joints with acrylic sealant:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Interior door frames and flooring junctions.
Interior window and screen frames, both sides.
Interior non-moving joints.
Interior joints to receive paint finish.
Interior and exterior joints with low movement
3.6.2 Seal following joint with mildew resistant silicone sealant:

a. Underside of rims of sinks and between sink rims and counters

.






b.


c.

d.



e.


f.



Around pipes, conduits, etc. passing through walls and ceilings in
bathrooms and kitchens. Conceal sealant with escutcheons.

Joints between ceramic tile and other
walls.
Joints in ceramic tile where joints occur over control joints in back-
up walls.

Junctions of counters/vanities/millwork with abutting
surfaces.
Other locations where non-staining mildew resistant sealant is
required.

3.6.3 Seal following joints with one component modified polyurethane sealant:
a. Interior masonry and gypsum board control joints.
b. Interior moving joints.
c. Exterior joints in masonry and concrete.

3.6.4 Seal following joints with exterior one part elastomeric silicone:
a. Exterior door and window frames.

3.6.5 Silicone sealant is not acceptable for horizontal traffic joints, or in joints between
marble panels.






END OF SECTION
































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 08 00 00 - Openings
- 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames
- 08 11 16 - Aluminium Doors and Frames
- 08 14 00 - Wood doors
- 08 32 13 - Automatic sliding doors
- 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows
- 08 62 13 - Domed Unit Skylights
- 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
- 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing














































DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES



1 GENERAL

1 .1 Section Includes

1.1.1


.1.2


1.1.3

Fabricate, supply and install steel doors and frames specified under this Section
and indicated in the Door Schedule drawings.
Refer to Door Schedule for Door and Frame types, size, finish, fire-ratings and
location.
Co-ordinate with Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware.


1 .2 Related Work

1.2.1 Grouting and filling of door frames, under Concrete Masonry Units, Section 04 22
00.

1.2.2 Sealing around frames and sidelights, under Joint Sealants, Section 07 92 00.
1.2.3 Supply of Door hardware, Section 08 71 00.


1 .3


Reference Standards

BS 6496 and 6497
ASTM E 152
NFPA 80
NFPA 105 Vol. 9


NFPA 252
BS 476 Part 20 (1987)
& Part 22 (1987)
BS 476 Part 31 (1983)
BS 5588
BS 1245
BS 5750
UL 10(b)


1.4 Quality Assurance




Powder organic coatings
Methods for Fire Tests of Doors Assemblies.
Standards for Fire Doors and Windows Installation
Recommended Practice for the Installation of
Smoke Control Door Assemblies
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies


For Fire Test of Door Assemblies
Smoke Penetration for Doors
Fire Precautions
Steel Doors Frames Part
1 Metal Doors
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

1.4.1 Door and hardware installer to have minimum of five years successful experience
installing doors and hardware in buildings of this type and size.









1.4.2 Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.

1.5 Submittals

1.5.1






















1.5.2

Shop Drawings

Submit shop drawings for CLIENT's review in accordance with Section 01300:
Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples; Submittals.
Clearly indicate the type and size of each door and door frame, the materials
being supplied, the type of primer, cut outs and reinforcement for the hardware,
anchors and locations of exposed fastenings.
Clearly indicated installation details for frames in each type and size of wall.
Show anchors, and relationships of frame to applied finishes to walls.
The shop drawings shall be in the form of detailed drawings and in the form of
schedules. Schedules shall be similar in format to those approved by CLIENT.
Have the shop drawings reviewed and approved by the finish hardware supplier
prior to submitting them to CLIENT. The hardware supplier's approval shall be
indicated by CLIENT stamp and signature on every page, sheet and drawing,
with their comments marked.

After approval of the shop drawings a reduced size sample of the different door
types shall be submitted to CLIENT for approval


Certification

Submit Certificates and Fire Test Reports indicating the specified Fire Rating of
Fire Rated Doors and Frames which are to be used for the Works.
On completion, submit a certificate signed by the supplier stating that all the work
of this Section is fabricated and supplied as specified. No final payment for work
of this Section will be made without receipt by CLIENT of the Certificate.
On completion submit a certificate signed by the hardware supplier certifying to
CLIENT that the hardware is properly installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.


1 .6 Site Storage and Protection of Materials

1.6.1



1.6.2



1.6.3

All materials shall be thoroughly inspected upon receipt by the Contractor and all
discrepancies and/or damages shall be immediately reported, in writing to the
supplier.
Doors shall not be removed from their wrappings upon receipt on site, shall be
stored in a vertical position, spaced with blocking to permit air circulation between
them in a dry and clean storage area.
All materials shall be properly stored on planks or damage, out of water, off soil
(earth, sand, aggregates, salts, concrete, etc.) and covered to protect from
damage from any cause.









2 PRODUCTS

2.1

Materials

2.1.1



2.1.2


2.1.3
2.1.4



2.1.5
2.1.6



Steel: Cold rolled sheet, rolled to stretcher levelled flatness tolerances suitable for
forming and bending without metal or coating facture with powder coating to BS 6496
and 6497.
Door and Frame Finish: Pre-painted Doors shall be cleaned and shall be given a
heavy coat of electro-statically applied finish paint, baked-on.
Steel plate and sheet thickness prior to powder coating shall be as per Drawings.
Insulated Cores: Provide doors with pre-foamed polystyrene slab of 1.0 # test
density filling, secured with adhesive to face skins. Performance requirements U.
Factor 0.24 C, R. Factor 4.17 C and STC of minimum 45.
Primer: Rust inhibitive suitable to application on powder coated metal.
Door Silencers: Single layer stud rubber/neoprene type.

2.2 Fabrication, Frames

2.2.1

General
Frames shall be welded type construction.
Frames shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for mortise, templates
hardware. Co-ordinate this work with Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".
Mortise cut-outs for frames in masonry and concrete walls shall be protected with
steel guard boxes.
Reinforce units for surface mounted hardware. (Drilling and tapping by hardware
installation trade).
Provide for anchorage to floor and wall constructions. Each wall anchor shall be
located immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and
directly opposite on the strike jamb. For rebate opening heights up to and including 1
520 mm provide two anchors and an additional anchor for each 760 mm of height or
fabrication thereof, except as indicated following:
- Frames in previously placed concrete or masonry shall be provided with anchors
located not more than 150 mm from the top and bottom of each jamb, and
intermediate anchors at 660 mm on centre maximum.
Each door opening shall be prepared for stud rubber door silencers, three for single
door openings and six for double door openings.
Provide factory-applied touch up primer at areas where powder coating has been
removed during fabrication.
Fire labelled frame products shall be provided for those openings requiring fire
protection ratings, as scheduled. Such products shall be tested in strict conformance
with UL 10(B), ASTM E 152, NFPA 252, BS 476 Part 20 and 22 (1987), BS 1245 and
BS 5588 and listed by an internationally recognized agency having a factory
inspection services and shall be constructed as detailed in follow-up service
procedures/factory inspection manuals issued by the listing agency to individual
manufacturers.








2.2.2


Welded Type
Frame products shall be accurately mitred and either mechanically jointed or securely
welded on the inside of the profile.
Butt joints of rails and jambs shall be coped accurately and securely welded.
Welded joints shall be ground to a smooth, uniform finish.
Where frames terminate at finished floors provide anchorage plates to suit floor
construction and securely weld to inside of each jamb profile.
Provide two channel or angle spreaders per frame to ensure proper alignment. Weld
in spreaders where frames extended below finishes doors.


2.3 Fabrication, Doors

2.3.1

General
2.3.1.1




2.3.1.2


2.3.1.3


2.3.1.4





2.3.1.5


2.3.1.6


2.3.1.7



Doors shall be swing type, flush as indicated on Schedules and of hollow
steel construction with insulated core for interior and exterior doors and
temperature rise rated core for fire-rated doors. Provide UL labels for all
Fire Rated Doors.
Longitudinal edges shall be welded. Seams shall be welded, filled and
sanded flush
Doors shall be blanked, reinforced, drilled and tapped for mortise, template
hardware.
Holes 12 mm diameter and larger shall be factory prepared, except
mounting and through-bolt holes which shall be done on site by the
hardware installer. Holes less than 12 mm diameter shall be factory
prepared only when required for the function of the device or when these
holes over lap function holes.
Doors shall be reinforced where required for surface mounted hardware.
Drilling and tapping shall be by the hardware installer on site.
Top and bottom of doors shall be provided with inverted, recessed, spot
welded channels. Provide top caps for exterior doors.
Door face flatness tolerance shall be 2.4 mm maximum variation when
checked with a 900 mm steel straight edge.
2.3.2 Hollow Steel Construction

2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2


2.3.2.3


2.3.2.4

Each face of the door shall be formed from a sheet of steel.
Doors shall be reinforced with vertical stiffeners, securely welded to each
face sheet at 150 mm o.c. maximum.
All voids between stiffeners shall be filled with temperature rise rated core
for fire-rated doors.
All voids between stiffeners shall be filled with insulated core for interior
and exterior doors.
2.3.3 Sound Retardant / Frames










2.3.3.1 Fill voids in doors and frames with sound retarding material full
thickness of door to give an STC rating of 45.
3 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation, Frames

3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4




3.1.5


3.1.6

Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.
Fire labelled frames shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80.
Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Remove temporary steel shipping
jamb spreaders. Install wood spreaders at third points of frame rebate height to
maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at center of head for openings
exceeding 1 200 mm in width. Remove spreaders after frames have been built-in.
Make allowance for deflection to ensure building structural loads are not transmitted
to frame product.
Install door silencers.


3.2 Finish Hardware

3 .2 .1 Door hardware to be supplied under Section 08 71 00.
3 .2 .2 Finish hardware supplier will include wrapping all items in separate packages,
complete with all trim and screws required for each location, distinctly labelled
and numbered.


3.3 Installation, Doors

3.3.1.1
3.3.1.2


3.3.1.3

Install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
Install doors to ensure true alignment with frame, correct fit and smooth
operation.
Install hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3.1.4 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and flooring or
thresholds as follows:
Hinge side: 2 mm
Latch side and Heads: 2 mm
Flooring or Thresholds: 12 mm
3.3.1.5 Adjust operable parts for correct function.


3.4 Field Touch-Up

3.4.1 Touch-up surface of doors and frames with primer, where scratched during
installation.

END OF SECTION








DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 11 16 ALUMINIUM DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.0 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

A. Door Hardware: Section 08 71 00.

B. Glazing: Section 08 81 00.

2.0 Submittals

A. Shop Drawings: Show details of each frame type, elevation and construction for each
door type, conditions at openings, location and installation requirements for finish
hardware (including cutouts and reinforcements), details of connections, and
anchorage and accessory items.

1. Include a schedule of doors and frames using the same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on the Contract Drawings.

B. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications, and installation instructions for each
type door and frame specified.

C. Samples:

1.


2.


3.

Frames: Corner sample of each type, 18 x 18 inches, with mortises,
reinforcements, and specified finish.

Doors: Corner sample of each type showing construction, 18 x 18 inches, with
mortises, reinforcements, and specified finish.

Color Samples: Manufacturer's standard colors showing maximum variation of
each color. Submit actual production sections large enough to establish the
allowable color shade range.

D. Certificate: Fire Door Requirements. Where fire doors exceed the size for which testing
and labeling is available, submit certificates stating that the doors and hardware is
identical in design, materials, and construction to a door that has been tested and
meets the requirements for the class indicated.







PART 2 PRODUCTS

1.0 Materials

A. Aluminum:

1. Extruded Shapes: 6063 alloy, T5 temper.

2. Rolled Shapes: 6061 alloy, T6 temper.

3. Sheet, and Shapes Formed of Sheet: 1100 alloy, H14 temper.

4. Color Anodized Aluminum: 5005 alloy of temper for required shapes.

B. Steel Sub-frames: ASTM A 36 plates, shapes and bars.

C. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel units, of shapes,
plates or bars; galvanized after reinforcement fabrication, ASTM A 123.

D. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel, or other non-corrosive metal
fasteners compatible with aluminum door components and other items to be fastened;
Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners (if any), finished to match fastened item.

1. Do not use exposed fasteners except for necessary application of surface
mounted hardware. Use concealed screws when required for application of
glazing stops.

E. Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, 12 gage galvanized steel, ASTM A 153, for required
anchorage to concrete or masonry Work.

F. Expansion Anchor Devices: Stud type expansion shields FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type
4, Class 1.

G. Machine Screws for Steel Sub-frames: FS FF-S-92, steel, galvanized ASTM A 153.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-PAINT 12,
compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat.

I. Compression Weather-stripping: Replaceable stripping of either molded neoprene
gaskets complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded
PVC gaskets complying with ASTM D 2287.

J. Sliding Weather-stripping: Replaceable stripping of wool, polypropylene or nylon
woven pile, with nylon fabric and aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.1.







K. Sealants and Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard for the fabrication, assembly and
installation of the Work; guaranteed by the manufacturer to remain permanently
elastic, non-shrinking, non-migrating and weatherproof.

L. Glazing Gaskets: Stripping of molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000,
Designation 2BC415 to 3BC620, or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287, or
molded closed-cell neoprene complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, for glazing factory-
installed glass and panels, and for gaskets which are factory-installed in a "captive"
assembly of glazing stops.

2.0 Fabrication

A. Frames:

1.


2.





3.

4.



5.

6.


7.

Fabricate door frames, and frames combining transoms, sidelights, and panel
framing of formed or extruded aluminum not less than 0.125 inch thick.

Door Stops: Solid aluminum, not less than 1/2 inch thick x 1-3/4 inches wide
with integral weather-stripping on door edge. Provide 1-3/4 inches wide
continuous 1/4 inch aluminum reinforcing plate located within frame, aligned
with door stop.

Door Stops: Manufacturer's standard integral extruded shapes.

Glazing Beads: Formed or extruded, not less than 0.05 inch wall thickness.
Fabricate formed beads of sheet aluminum. Fasten glazing beads to frames
with self-tapping screws spaced not more than 12 inches apart.

Glazing Beads: Manufacturer's standard integral extruded shapes.

Sub-frames: Fabricate sub-frame assemblies and accessories, as shown, of
materials specified herein.

Thermal Break: Manufacturer's standard continuous thermal barrier.

B. Glazed Doors:

1.



2.






Fabricate stiles and rails of extruded aluminum tubular shapes, 1/8 inch min
wall thickness, not less than 3 inches wide. Attach extrusions together by
means of concealed mechanical fasteners and concealed welding.

Glazing Beads: Formed or extruded, not less than 0.05 inch wall thickness.
Fasten glazing beads to frames with self-tapping screws spaced not more than
12 inches apart.







3.

4.



Glazing Beads: Manufacturer's standard extruded shapes.

Door Edges: Lock stile edge of single acting doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in
2 inches. Double acting doors shall have 4 inch radius rounded edges.
Meeting stile edges of pairs of single acting doors shall be "V" beveled or
rounded, as indicated.

C. Flush Doors: Fabricate doors with continuous, flush, unbroken surfaces without visible
seams.

1.


2.


3.




4.


5.

6.




7.

Inner Construction: Heavy extruded stiles and rails joined by welding, by steel
tie rods, or both.

Core: Additional extruded tubing, foamed-in-place urethane foam, or phenolic
resin honeycomb.

Face Sheets: Minimum .081 inch fastened directly to core, or minimum .040
inch laminated to 1/8 inch tempered hardboard, No. 10 pattern/smooth
aluminum sheet.

Glass Frames: Manufacturer's standard extruded channel, continuous around
opening, with formed or extruded glazing beads.

Louvers: Manufacturer's standard extruded and formed assemblies.

Door Edges: Lock stile edge of single acting doors shall be beveled 1/8 inch in
2 inches. Double acting doors shall have 4 inch radius rounded edges.
Meeting stile edges of pairs of single acting doors shall be "V" bevel.

Astragals: Aluminum astragals, where indicated, shall overlap 3/4 inch.

D. Aluminum Tempered Glass Doors: Manufacturer's standard aluminum top and bottom
rail or corner assemblies permanently fastened to 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch tempered float
glass.

E. Finish Hardware Preparation: Attach concealed reinforcements and cut mortises of
sizes required and where located by the approved hardware schedule, for the proper
installation of finish hardware.

1. Reinforcements: 1/4 inch thick aluminum.

2. Install reinforcements within mortises at the depths required to bring the
hardware surfaces flush with the door and jamb surfaces.







3.


4.

Extend reinforcements for hinges, pivots, floor hinges, 4 inches above and
below mortises on side jambs and door edges.

Reinforce all doors not mortised for concealed door closers on both sides for
surface door closer application; and all frames on both sides for closer arm
application.

F. Fire Doors


1.


2.


3.






4.

5.


Fire doors shall be complete with hardware, accessories, and automatic
closing device as required by NFPA 80.

Equip fire doors with an automatic closing mechanism actuated by fusible links
to release at 54
o
C (130
o
F).

Doors shall be forced into a closed position by an auxiliary spring in the barrel
which is inoperative during normal operation and when activated will not affect
the adjustment of the counterbalance spring. The auxiliary spring shall exert
pressure on the curtain until the release device is reset. Door shall come to
rest on the floor without impact.

Control descent of curtain by an oscillating governor.

Provide handles for push up operation.

G. Sandwich panel doors
Alloy Composition: AA6063 BS1474
Ultimate Tensile: 150 Mpa
Extrusion in line with: BS1474-1987
Wall Thickness: Variable from 1.6mm to 3.2mm in same profile
Profile Width: 45mm
Sandwich Panel: 18mm thick rigid expanded polyurethane (CFC Free)
Aluminum Sheet: 1.5mm thick
Alloy Chemical Composition : ASTM B209M H-14
Contact Adhesive Bonding Time: 2 Hrs. under 2 Ton Press
Frame Fixing Screws: 10mm x 120mm Electro Plated Countersunk head,
Rough Multi-cores thread
Hinges (3wings): Adjustable extruded aluminum hinges with neoprene insert
and stainless steel shaft 10mm Dia. with Stainless Steel Allen
fixing screws.
3.0 Finishes








A. Preparation: After fabrication of doors and frames, but before lamination of panels (if
any), prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the Aluminum
Association recommendations and standards. Process all components of each
assembly simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color.

B. Finish exposed aluminum door and frame components as follows:


1.








2.


Powder coating: Corro-Coat PE-SDF, polyester TGIC. The raw materials for
powder coating should provide uniform flow and finish, weathering and
corrosion resistance to AAMA 2604-98 standards.

The powder coating colour should have a Total Solar Reflectance TSR 0.25
as per ASTM C 1549.


Color and Gloss: As selected by the CLIENT from manufacturer's full range.






































PART 3

EXECUTION

1.0 Installation

A. Securely anchor sub-framing to supporting structures, plumb and level and properly
prepared to receive aluminum doors and frames.

B. Protect areas of frames and panels to be in contact with sealants and surfaces of
glazing rebates and glazing beads with protective, strippable tape. Do not apply
lacquer to such areas. Remove tape immediately before application of caulking or
glazing compound.

C. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry and incompatible metals with a
bituminous coating.

D. Door Installation: Fit doors accurately in their frames, with the following clearances:

1. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch.

2. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch.

3. Bottom; no Threshold or Carpet: 3/8 inch.

4. Bottom, at Threshold or Carpet: 1/8 inch.


2.0 Protection

A. Provide protective covering to protect aluminum doors and frames from damage or
defacement after erection.

3.0 Adjusting And Cleaning

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items just prior to
final inspection. Leave Work in complete and proper operating condition.

B. When directed, or just prior to final inspection remove protective coverings and clean
aluminum surfaces with products specifically formulated for aluminum and known to be
compatible with finishes specified herein.



END OF SECTION







DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 14 00 WOOD DOORS

1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1 .1 Section Includes

1 .1 .1




1 .1 .2
1 .1 .3
1 .1 .4

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section Fabricate supply
and install wood doors specified herein and indicated in Door Schedule and other
Contract Drawings.
Fabricate, supply and install wooden frames at places as shown on the drawings.
Co-ordinate with Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware (ironmongery).
Refer to Door Schedule for door and frame types, sizes, finishes, fire-rating and
locations.

1 .2 Quality Assurance

1 .2 .1



1 .2 .2

Door and hardware installer to have minimum of five years successful experience
installing doors and hardware in buildings of this type and size.

Inspect the door and hardware installation and provide certification to CLIENT
that the hardware is properly installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

1 .3 Submittals

1 .3 .1


1 .3 .2



1 .3 .3



1.3.4

Comply with the requirements of Volume 2, Annexure Q: Shop Drawings,
Product Data & Samples - Submittals.
Samples: Submit two corners 600mm x 600mm samples of each type of door to
show finish and construction, including face veneer, door face, core and solid
edge strips. Submit door frame sections for 300 mm length.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings clearly indicating door and frame
construction, type sizes, reinforcement for location of hardware, quality of
materials, and cutouts. Cross reference each door to Door Schedule.
Certification


1 .3 .1



1 .3 .2

Submit Certificates and Fire Test Reports indicating the specified fire
rating of Fire Rated Doors and Frames which are to be used for the
Works.
On completion, submit a certificate signed by the contractor which
states the work of this Section is provided as specified in this Section.







1 .3 .3



No final payment for work of this Section will be made without receipt
by CLIENT of the certificate.
On completion, submit a certificate signed by the hardware supplier
certifying to CLIENT that the hardware is properly installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.4


Extended Warranty

1 .4 .1







1 .4 .2




Warrant the work of this Section against defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of ten (10) years from the date of
Completion Certificate, including but not limited to warping, cupping,
twisting, shrinkage, swelling, delamination, splitting and telegraphing
of core. Provide written warranty made in the name of CLIENT and
jointly signed and sealed by supplier and Contractor.
Warranty shall include removal and replacement of hardware, fitting
and hanging new unit and finishing to match original unit, all at no cost
to CLIENT and at times convenient to CLIENT.

1 .5 Referenced Standards

1 .5 .1


1 .5 .2
1 .5 .3
1 .5 .4
1 .5 .5
1 .5 .6

BSI Standards: BS 5588; BS 476 Part 8 and Part 22 - for fire test of door
assembly.
BSI Standards: BS 476 Parts 31.1 and 31.2 - Smoke Control.
BSI Standards: BS 4787 Part 1 and BS 459 Part 2 for door-set dimensions.
BSI Standards: BS 4965 (91) for hard lamination.
Underwriters Laboratory: UL 10(b) Fire Test Door Assemblies.
NFPA105-Vol.9


























2. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 .1 Materials

Unless otherwise specified herein, comply with the requirements of BS 4787 and BS
4787 Part 1.
2 .1 .1 Wooden Doors:
44 mm thick solid core with well polished teak wood veneer finish, framing as per
drawings, polyurethane lacquer finish.


2 .2 Doors Fabrication

2.2.1



















2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4


General
Frames shall follow the door material and finishing.
Frames shall be drilled and tapped for mortise, templates hardware. Co-ordinate this
work with Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware".
Provide for anchorage to wall constructions. Each wall anchor shall be located
immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on the hinge jamb and directly
opposite on the strike jamb. For rebate opening heights up to and including 1 520
mm provide two anchors and an additional anchor for each 760 mm of height or
fabrication thereof, except as indicated following:
Frames in previously placed in concrete or masonry shall be provided with anchors
located not more than 150 mm from the top and bottom of each jamb, and
intermediate anchors at 660 mm on centre maximum.
Each door opening shall be prepared for stud rubber door silencers, three for single
door openings and six for double door openings.
Gaskets: All doors shall be provided with continuous rubber gaskets.
Glass Stops: Solid wood of species to match face finish of door.
Intumescent Strips: To be in accordance with BS 476, Part 22 to fire rated doors.
2 .3 Fabrication to Receive Finish Hardware

2 .5 .1 Doors and Frames: To be prepared at the manufacturer's works to accept finish
hardware e.g. cut - out for hinges, flush bolts, recessed door closer, etc.
2 .5 .2 Co-ordinate with Section 08 71 00 for door hardware.















3. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 .1









3 .2


Handling

3.1.1



3.1.2


Storage

3.2.1




3 .2 .2




3.2.3


3 .2 .3




Doors to be supplied to job site fully finished. Exercise extreme care in handling
on site to avoid damage to finishes. Damaged doors will be cause for rejection of
door.
Doors to be supplied with fitted end blocks, additionally protected with foam and
wrapped in stout cardboard.



Store on site in clean, dry area, in same condition that will apply when building is
occupied. Cover to protect from dirt and risk of damage from other trades
working. Relative humidity should be in the range of 40% to 60% during storage
and installation.
Store doors stacked level and flat, on timber supports covered with plywood or
cardboard to avoid marking door surface, minimum 100 mm wide x 50 mm deep,
across the full width of the door. There shall be three such supports, equally
spaced, one across the center and one 300 mm from each end.
In addition to requirements in previous sentence, doors with glazed apertures
shall be stacked with spacers between to prevent damage to glazing beads.
Finished surfaces shall not be exposed to strong sunlight.
3 .3 Site Conditions


3.3.1



3.3.2

Doors or door sets must not be installed until the building envelope is complete
and weather tight, until the work of all wet trades is complete and final
temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained.
Conditions of temperature and humidity during storage and installation should be
as close as possible to those expected in the occupied building. After installation,
doors are not to be subjected to sudden or extreme changes in temperature or
humidity. Where air conditioning is brought into operation after installation, this
should be done gradually over as long a period as possible.
3.4 Cutting, Trimming


3.4.1


3.4.2

All pre-finished doors are to be supplied to exact finished sizes and are not to be
trimmed on site.
Door leaves without rebates or grooves to top and bottom edges are to be
supplied dead to size width, but slightly oversize in height to allow site trimming
tolerance.











3.5









3.6

3.4.3




3.5.1





3.5.2



3 .6 .1
3 .6 .2



3 .6 .3

Exposed intumescent strips in long edges, the top edge, and the bottom edge of
fire doors must not be trimmed.
Identification

It is essential for doors and panels to be installed in the correct location in the
first instance and all doors and panels are to be individually identified to show
their intended positions.
Use temporary removable or concealed markings.
Doors must be hung with the correct face visible on each side.
Finish Hardware


Finish Hardware to be supplied under Section 08 71 00.
Finish Hardware supplier will include wrapping all items in separate packages,
complete with all trim and screws required for each location, distinctly labeled
and numbered and shopped F.O.B. job site.
Take delivery of all Finish Hardware and check each item as received







(i)

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)



(v)

(vi)



(vii)




(viii)

(ix)




3.7




Workmanship

Where Clause H.1.10 is applicable to elements of joinery work the requirements of that clause
shall be complied with.
Joinery shall comply with the requirements of BS 1186 part 2, and shall be accurately, properly
and soundly fabricated in a manufacturer's workshop.
Fixing of all joinery work, including fillets, architraves, architrave base block, frames, glazing
beads and the like shall be by means of screws unless specifically approved by the CLIENT.
The terms "frame","framed" shall mean work put together by proper carpentry of joinery joints,
such as morticing and tenoning, dovetailing, dowelling, etc, and the joints are to be as shown,
specified or directed.
Butted and screwed or nailed joints or halved joints and the like will not be deemed framed and
will not be accepted for framed work.
Unless secret fixing is practicable or otherwise described clear finished hardwood shall be
fixed using non-ferrous or plated screws with heads let in and pelleted with grain matched
pellets of minimum 6 mm thickness cut from the same timber.
Built in fittings etc., are to be accurately constructed in accordance with the detailed drawings
and doors, drawers, etc. shall fit, and open and close smoothly and all work next to walls,
floors and ceilings or other fixed items shall be soundly fixed and scribed to fit snugly against
same.
Mouldings shall be worked on the solid unless otherwise stated and shall be accurately worked to
the drawings.
When circular work is shown on the drawings or specified, it shall be built up with an
appropriate number of pieces, cut to the required shapes, which shall be put together in two or






three thickness so that they break joint, and shall be secured with hardwood keys and wedges
or with hardwood pins, whichever is more appropriate.
(x)


(xi)
(xii)



(xiii)



(xiv)

(xv)



(xvi)
Skirting, architraves, plates and other joinery works shall be accurately scribed to fit the
contour of any irregular surface against which they will be required to form a close butt
connection.
Doors shall be properly hung within frame/linings to give a uniform clearance.
The method of construction must accommodate tolerances as shown on the drawings and
allow for ensuring that repetitive units can be accurately located in relation to grid lines or other
setting out points and those tolerances do not accumulate.
Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all junctions between joinery and the building
carcass, whether of masonry or frame construction, so that any irregularities or movement shall
be adequately accommodated.
All joinery shall be left finished smooth and clean by rubbing down by hand with fine glass
paper.
Should any joints or moving parts in joinery fit other than accurately and evenly or with
acceptable clearances or should any defect of timber become apparent, the joinery shall be
repaired or replaced as directed by the CLIENT.
Pencil round all trafficked edges of boardwalk or bridge timbers.

3.7.1
(i)
(ii)

(iii)
(iv)


3.7.2

Mechanical Fastenings
Mechanical fastenings shall comply with Clause H.1.7(iii)
Nails shall be to BS 1202 and shall be lost headed nails, suitable for stopping when
used for decorated work.
Screws shall be to BS 1210 and shall be stainless steel or brass where specified.
Cups screws shall be brass or stainless steel heavy pressed socket pattern.


Fittings
Materials and workmanship for metal, glass, etc, etc forming an integral part of joinery
items shall comply with the appropriate section of this specification.



END OF SECTION























DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 32 13 SLIDING ALUMINUM FRAMED GLASS DOOR

PART I - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Automatic sliding doors with operator and motion/presence sensor control device.

1.2 RELATED WORK

Section 08 11 16 - Aluminum doors and frames.

Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing.

Section 26 00 00 - Electrical.

1.3 REFERENCES - (Codes & Approvals)

A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.

B. ANSI/BHMA 156.10 - Power Operated Doors.

C. ANSI/UL 325 - Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Doors Powered to Open Position:

1. Doors powered by electro-mechanical drive assembly transmitted to active leaves by fiberglass-
reinforced tooth drive belt for silent operation.
2. Power door to open position by signals received from the actuation controls.

3. The last portion of the opening cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that
electronically reduces voltage to motor until door is fully open.

B. Doors Powered to Closed Position:

1. The active leafs will only be powered to closed position when all actuating devices are cleared and
after remaining in the open position for a preset time delay (per ANSI standards).
2. The last portion of the closing cycle shall be controlled by a microprocessor generated signal that
electronically reduces voltage to the motor until door is fully closed.






C. Emergency Breakaway:

1. Full Breakout System: Interior sliding active leaves and sidelites swing out from any position in sliding
mode.

2. Fixed Sidelite System: Exterior sliding active leaves swing out from any position in sliding mode.

3. Breakaway Pressure: Field adjustable to building code requirements and in accordance with
ANSI/BHMA 156.10, maximum of 50 pounds.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A.


B.






C.

D.



E.

General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified
performance requirements.

Compliance:

1. ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

2. ANSI/UL 325 listed.

Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic.

Automatic door equipment accommodates up to following weights for active leaf doors:

1. Bi-Part Doors: 220 pounds per active leaf.

Operating Temperature Range: -35 degrees F to 122 degrees F

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A.


B.


C.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials,
components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.

Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and
details, indicating dimensions.

Operation and Maintenance Manual:

1. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.

2. Include spare parts list.

D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard one year warranty.







1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:

1. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified,
with a minimum of 5 years successful experience.

B. Installer's Qualifications:

1. Minimum of 5 years successful experience in installation of similar doors.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS

A. Bi-Parting automatic sliding doors.

1. Aluminum doors and frames with sidelite and active door leaves.

2. Overhead-concealed or surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-
controlled, sliding door operator.

3. Operator housing, floor rollers, and door carriers.

2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Doors and Frames: Extruded aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5.

Door Carriers: Roller Wheels: 2 roller wheels, per active door leaf over replaceable track.

Vertical Jambs: 1-3/4 inches by 4-1/2 inches.

Header: Span: Maximum 16'-0" without intermediate supports when using 1/4-inch glass.

Stiles: 2-1/8.

Hardware: Breakaway.

2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR

A. Operator: Overhead-concealed or surface-applied, electro-mechanical, microprocessor-controlled.

B. Motor: High- efficiency, energy-efficient, DC motor.






C. Microprocessor System: Sets opening and closing speeds based on factory-adjusted configuration
settings.

D Adjustable Hold Open Time Delay: 0 to 60 seconds.

2.5 MOTION AND PRESENCE SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE

A.
B.
C.

2.6 ELECTRICAL

A.

B.

One active infrared activation and safety sensor.
Operating temperature range of -30 Degrees F to +131 Degrees F.
Mounting height, 7' to 12' above finished floor.



High-Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 A current draw.

Power: 120 V, 50/60 Hz, 3 A incoming power with solid-earth ground connection for each door
system.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Powder coated paint finish.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify CLIENT of conditions that would adversely affect installation or
subsequent utilization of doors. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are
corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.

B. Ensure proper support has been provided at operator header.

C. Ensure floor is level and smooth.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/BHMA 156.10.

B. Install doors and beam plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.









C. Anchor frames securely in place.

D. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by
CLIENT.



END OF SECTION













































/



DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 51 00 ALUMINIUM WINDOWS


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes:

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
This Section also governs glass and glazing systems for work performed under
Sections 08 81 00.
Compliance with BS 952, BS 6262 (Code of Practice for Glazing), BS 8000 Part 7
Workmanship Code of Practice for Glazing and other standards indicated in this Section.

1.2






1.3


Related Works:

a) Supply of finishing hardware. b)
Sealing under Joint sealants. c) Glass
and glazing.

Standards and Directives.

All metal works are to be executed according to the valid standards, directives, government codes and building
regulations, fire requirements and any other such applicable regulations such as:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

f)
g)

h)



1.4

a)



b)

BS 952
BS 6262 Code of Practice for glazing of buildings.
BS 8000 Part 7 workmanship - Code of Practice for glazing. DIN
1249 Flat glass for building construction.
Din 1745 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloy plate, sheet and strip greater than 0.35 mm
thickness, properties technical delivery conditions.
DIN 1748 Wrought aluminum and aluminum extruded sections design, permissible deviations.
DIN 1783 Strips, plates and sheets of aluminum and wrought aluminum alloys with thickness over
0.35 mm, cold-rolled dimensions.
AAMA 2604, voluntary specifications, performance requirements and test procedures for high
performance organic coating on aluminum extrusions and panels.

Shop Drawings

Contractor must submit shop drawings indicating each window and window frame, the type of each
glass and frame, the materials being supplied, and the frame type finish. Show the cutouts and
reinforcement for hardware, anchors and locations of exposed fastenings.
Contractor must clearly indicate installation details for frames to walls. Show anchors, and








Relationships of frame to applied finishes to walls and adjacent framing.
2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1

a)


b)
c)

2.2


Materials.

Steel: Steel parts for anchoring or bracing must either be stainless steel or galvanized. During
mounting all necessary welding points shall be painted with epoxy zinc type protective coating.

Stainless steel: 304 type brushed.
Glass Types and Locations: Refer to Specification section 08 81 00.

Finish of Aluminum

a) All exposed aluminum shall have cool shades, heat reflective , super durable polyester powder coated
finish with TSR 0.25
b) Exposed fastening if occurring must be finished and coloured to match the finish and colour of the material
in which they appear. The finish provided shall be permanent and durable.

2.3





2.4

2.4.1




2.4.2







2.4.3









2.4.4


Finish Hardware

Supply and install compatible hardware for all exterior aluminum windows and bi-parting sliders. All
fasteners shall be in stainless steel.

Window Frames

Structure
All window frames shall be structurally adequate not only to meet performance requirements
described but also to ensure that finished surfaces are not unduly distorted.

Thermal Performance
All window frames shall be thermally broken in the plane of the external pane of glazing. The
design and thickness of the thermal break shall be such as to eliminate undue thermal gain. The
design of the frame and glazing system shall be such that no significant condensation will occur
within the glazing rebate. Wherever possible, the voids between and within the inner and outer
frame sections shall be filled with a suitable water resistant thermal insulating material.

Finishes
The materials and applied finishes of the inner and outer frame sections shall be as specified
elsewhere in this specification. The Aluminium frame section shall be coated with an approved
paint having, heat reflective , super durable polyester powder coating or other equal approved by
the CLIENT.
The steel frame sections shall be galvanized and then coated with an approved paint finish having ,
heat reflective , super durable polyester powder coating or other equal approved by the CLIENT.

Junctions of Materials









All junctions between the frame components shall be cleanly and accurately formed and shall be
securely locked and watertight. Corners shall be mitred. Mechanical joints are acceptable provided
that the connecting bracket or cleat is fixed to the components using discrete mechanical fixings
approved by the CLIENT.

2.4.5





2.4.6







2.4.7










2.4.8





2.4.9

Small Joint Sealant
A high performance and penetrating small joint sealant acceptable to the CLIENT shall be used
during the assembly of all window frame components, including the joints between the frame and its
fixings to the structure.

I.E.E Regulations
All components of the window frame including ironmongery and fixings, shall be interconnected to
ensure the electrical continuity in accordance with the requirements of the 15th Edition of the
Institute of Electrical Engineers Wiring Regulations. A suitable fitting to enable the earth ring main
system of the building to be connected by others to the window shall be provided by the Sub-
Contractor in a non-visible part of the window agreed with the CLIENT.

Water Penetration and Discharge
The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor takes all practicable steps to ensure that the
windows and associated seals and weathering details provided for this project shall prevent
moisture from penetrating the external face of the building. The windows shall further be such that
any water which will either in fact penetrate past the external face of the building during the life of
the windows or will be present between the external face of the building and the inner face of the
window from other sources shall not accumulate but shall drain rapidly to the outside of the
building.

Hinges
The Sub-Contractor shall determine the appropriate location of pivots and hinges, so that in all
cases the windows operate cleanly over their full opening arc, in particular without fouling any
external parapets and balustrades or any internal sills, suspended ceiling bulkheads.

Weathering and Flashings
The Contractor and Sub-Contractor shall ensure in consultation with the CLIENT that the weathering
and flashings are practicable, effective and compatible with the window frame design in all
respects. The design of the weathering, flashings, etc., shall be such that moisture behind the
external face of the building will flow to the outside of the building at each floor level. Drainage
slots for this purpose in the sealed perimeter joint between the window frame and the building are
not acceptable.

2.4.10 Glazing Rebate: Fixed and Opening Windows
The glazing rebate shall be of a profile and effect that is strictly in accordance with the
requirements both of the manufacturer of the glass/double-glazing units and of the suppliers of the
glazing system. All glass shall be glazed from the inside of the building and the window design
shall be such that glazing or re-glazing on site is possible merely by removing the glazing beads
but without the need to disturb the surrounding frame. All windows must be glazed in the factory









prior to delivery to site.

2.4.11 Hooded Drainage Slots
The glazing rebate shall be drained and ventilated directly to the outside of the building.
Adequate drainage and ventilation slots shall be provided along the bottom edge of the glazing
rebate: these slots shall be hooded and self-cleaning.

2.4.12 Glazing Beads
The glazing bead shall hold the glass/double-glazing unit securely in place; the bead shall either
be continuously supported or shall not deflect unduly between fixing points.

2.4.13 Weatherstripping
All opening lights shall be surrounded with a continuous band of weather stripping, preferably in
the plane of both the outer and the inner frame sections. An additional third window gasket,
concealed between sash and frame must be provided for enhanced performance. The weather
stripping shall be located so that minor variations in the position of frame may be accommodated
without any adverse effect on the seal.

The weather stripping shall be EPDM. All corners shall be mitred and where applicable, bonded or
welded so as to form a permanent effectively continuous seal. The use of polyvinyl chloride (pvc) or
cotton pile is not acceptable.

2.4.14 The Contractor shall ensure that, when installed, all sections are clean and free from debris and
that all drainage slots are clear.

2.5 ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

Sheet and extruded aluminium alloy components shall be produced from grades which are
suitable for the application of the designated coatings, and complying with BS 1470: 1972 (sheet),
and BS 1474: 1972 (extrusions).

a) Surfaces of alloys for coating shall be suitable for the purpose and be free from defects of
structure, texture, and composition which may adversely affect either the protective quality or the
appearance of the chosen coating. Defects must not be visible at a distance of one metre or more.

b) Extruded components shall be of an alloy HE9 (6063) or equivalent. Extrusions shall be
free from orange peel texture or banding.

c) No bare aluminium alloy shall be exposed to view on interior or exterior surfaces of the
finished components when installed in the building. Either all cutting, holing and assembly
preparation shall be carried out prior to coating or, if prefinished sheet or lineals are used, the
design shall be such that all cut edges are drawn together accurately and sealed in the final state.

d) All the coating work for one contract shall be carried out in the same processing plant,
and all coloured work of the same shade shall be coated by the same process, within that plant.










e) The finished surfaces shall be free from banding, and streaking. There shall be no
substrate corrosion, nor finger-printing visible on the finished surfaces.

f) Three sets of control examples shall be submitted to the CLIENT for his approval before
production commences, showing the upper and lower limits for each shade which are to be
achieved in production.

g) Aluminium alloy sections which are completely concealed within the window structure
and which do not need coloured film, shall be coated also.

h) Acceptance inspections shall be carried out by the CLIENT on all coating work,
preferably
at the painter's, or fabricator's works, or failing that, on site prior to fixing.

2.6 POWDER COATING

a)















b)

The Main Contractor shall:

1. Be responsible for the fabrication/coating of the powder coated objects and related
components/accessories shown on the drawings, in order to meet the requirements of the
performance specification.
2. Be responsible for the final selection of the powder material, the coating thickness and
type in accordance with the specified standards detailed herein.
3. Ensure that the coating meets the standards specified herein and has been independently
inspected and certified.
4. Ensure that all materials, components, systems, methods of installation, etc. meet the
performance criteria specified herein.
5. Ensure that the powder coating is applied by a manufacturer's approved Applicator and
that the application method is carried out in compliance with the "Process Control and
Warranty Information Document" provided by the manufacturer.

The powder coating to be used shall be , heat reflective, super durable , polyester TGIC or
TGIC-free. The raw materials used in the manufacturing of the powder coating should
provide uniform flow and finish, excellent weathering and corrosion resistance in line with
AAMA 2604 standard.

The powder coating colour should have a Total Solar Reflectance TSR 0.25 as per ASTM C
1549.
c) Product Warranty:

The Contractor shall provide a 25-year back-to-back warranty from the Applicator and the
Manufacturer.

d) Appearance
All visible coated surfaces shall be free from blisters, craters, pinholes or scratches when
observed by normal or corrected vision from a distance of 1 meter.

The quality of the powder coating must provide weathering properties, in line with AAMA
2604. The quality of the powder coating must be Qualicoat Class 2 approved.








1. Coating Thickness

The powder coating shall provide a continuous film thickness on all specified
surfaces by:
a. Minimum 60 micron on Aluminum
b. Maximum coating thickness should not exceed 120 micron

2. Application procedure

The application of the powder material shall be in conformity with all relevant
requirements, restrictions and recommendations of the "Process Control and Warranty
Information Document" provided by the manufacturer.

3. Laboratory test data

The Contractor should submit to the Project Manager the test data relevant to the
following:

a. Sample off-cuts of the coated object (aluminum extrusion or sheet)

Description
Colour
assessment
Gloss



Film
thickness

Adhesion



Film
hardness

MEK cure
test




Salt spray
resistance



Resistance
to humid
atmospheres

Norm
Visual

EN
ISO
2813
(60)
EN
ISO
2360
EN
ISO
2409
(2 mm)
EN
ISO
2815
N/A





ASTM
B 117



DIN
50017

Requirements
Match to colour
standard panel.
As per specification
in the relevant
Product Data Sheet.

Minimum 60 micron.


Passes cross-cut
rating Gt0 (100 %
adhesion).

Passes indentation
resistance according to
Buchholtz: >80.
Minor attack on the
coating after 30
double rubs with an
ear swab soaked in
Methyl Ethyl Kethon
(MEK).
No blistering.
Maximum 1 mm
corrosion creep from
scratch after 3000
hours.
No blistering.
Maximum 1 mm
corrosion creep from scratch after 3000
hours.










b. Sample panels 0.8 mm (AA 5005 H24 or H14) coated at the same time as
the coated object and in the same oven:

Description
Colour
assessment
Gloss



Film
thickness

Impact
resistance




Cupping
test
(relevant for
test panels
only with a
film
thickness of
60 to 80
micron)
Film
hardness

Norm
Visual

EN
ISO
2813
(60)
EN
ISO
2360
ASTM
D 2794
(5/8"
ball)


EN
ISO
1520






EN
ISO
2815

4. Actual weathering Test

Requirements
Match to colour
standard panel
As per specifications
in the relevant
Product Data Sheet.

60 to 80 micron.


Passes 2.5 Nm
without detachment
after tape pull test
according to the
Qualicoat Class 2
test requirements.
Passes 5 mm
cylindrical Mandrel
bend test without
detachment after
tape pull test
according to the
Qualicoat Class 2
test requirements.

Passes indentation
resistance according to
Buchholtz: >80.
The Applicator shall provide a document stating that, heat reflective, super durable ,
polyester powder coating meets the requirements of Florida test for 3-year at 5 degrees
angle and 5-year at 45 degrees angle, in compliance with Qualicoat Class 2.


e) Sealant




2.7

a)
b)
c)
Where sealants are used on metal to metal joints, or against finished metal, these shall be of
matching colour approved by the CLIENT and compatible with the finish.

Glazing

The glazing of aluminum framed windows to be executed using permanently elastic EPDM - gaskets.
Guidelines and directives of glass suppliers are to be strictly followed.
All glass unit assemblies shall be pre-fabricated and checked for quality of seals and stamped /
marked in the plant, prior to delivery and installation on site.









2.8 Reinforcement

Where reinforcement is required, reinforce frames with galvanized steel channels, plates or tubular section.
























































3.0 EXECUTION

3.1 Installation.

a) Erect frames plumb, true and square, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions.
b) The anchoring of all aluminum elements must accommodate movements of the building structure and of
other elements attached, without loading or stressing the aluminum construction.
c) Accurately fit frames to provide tight installation and provide clearances required due to expansion,
contraction and deflection of building structure and frames.

d) After adjustment, the anchorage devices shall be riveted, welded or positively locked to prevent movement
once alignment is achieved.
e) Install all hardware sills, cover plates, weather stripping and all other items, shown, specified or necessary
for a complete weather tight installation.
f) Metal members shall be isolated where necessary to prevent corrosion due to different metal-to-metal
contact.
g) Assume all responsibility for the design of the assembly, reinforcing, furring and anchoring to suit each
specific condition complying with the requirement specified herein and as shown on the reviewed shop
drawings.

3.2 Finish Hardware.
All fittings to be powder coated in matching finish.

3.3 Special Protection.

a)

b)
c)

d)

The Contractor must instruct the Employer on proper care, operation and maintenance for all
windows.
Suitable storage at site shall be provided by the Contractor.
Under conditions of high humidity, ventilation or other, measures shall be supplied by the Contractor to
prevent the accumulation of surface moisture.
The Contractor must ensure that Supplier provides appropriate packaging to protect all finished
surfaces prior to leaving the factory and such protection shall be maintained until the products are
installed.

- END OF SECTION -





















DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 62 13 DOMED UNIT SKYLIGHTS


PART 1 GENERAL

1 .1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Domed unit skylights installation on roof system.

1 .2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications.

1 .3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA - Specification for Windows, Doors, and Skylights.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles,
and Tubes.

C. The Aluminum Association (AA):
1. Specification for Aluminum Structures.

1 .4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene preinstallation meeting 2 weeks before start of installation of skylights.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Architect, installer, skylight
manufacturer's representative, and roof system manufacturer's representative.

C. Review materials, examination, preparation, installation, cleaning, protection, and coordination with other work.

1 .5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including preparation and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating
dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, glazing, fabrication, fasteners, hardware, finish, options, and
accessories.







C.


D.


E.


F.

G.

Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified requirements
and are suitable for intended application.

Manufacturer's Project References: Submit manufacturer's list of successfully completed skylight projects, including
project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of skylights furnished.

Installer's Project References: Submit installer's list of successfully completed skylight projects, including project
name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of skylights installed.

Cleaning Instructions: Submit manufacturer's cleaning instructions.

Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty.

1 .6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Manufacturer regularly engaged, for past 10 years, in manufacture of skylights of
similar type to that specified.

B. Installer's Qualifications:
1. Installer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in installation of skylights of similar type to that specified. 2.
Employ persons trained for installation of skylights.

1 .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with
labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Keep materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging until installation.
Store materials in clean, dry area indoors.
Store materials on flat, level surface, raised above floor, with adequate support to prevent sagging.
Protect materials during storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage.

1 .8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall warrant skylights to be:
1. Free from defects in materials, workmanship, and fabrication. 2.
Manufactured in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
3. Leak free for 20 years from date of shipment.



PART 2 PRODUCTS








2 .1 DOMED UNIT SKYLIGHTS

A. Domed Unit Skylights: Aluminu Framed skylight with polycarbonate panels.

B. Glazing Panels: Polycarbonate panels
Solid Poly carbonate panels shall be UV Resistant complying with ANSI Z97.1 and the following:

a. Thickness: 10 mm.
b. Finish: As selected from manufacturer's standard finishes. c.
Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors.

Test ASTM Method Result
Thickness 10mm
Weight 1700g/m2
Minimum radius for cold 1.75mm
bending
U factor ASTM C177 0.53
Light transmission ASTM D1003 25-79 as per
finishes

C. Frame:
1. Extruded Aluminum Frame: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5.
a. Extruded aluminum dome retaining angle. b.
Insulated thermal break. c. Integral
condensate gutter.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard mill finish. 3.
Foam-Rubber Gasket:
a. 38 mm by 6 mm.
b. Pre-install between frame and curb.
4. Weather Sweep: Attach to frame.


2 .2 FABRlCATlON

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Factory assembled skylights and glazed ready for installation.

Fabricate skylights to be weathertight and free of visual distortions and defects.

Protect exterior drip/counterflashing and drainage ports from weather and airborne debris.

Miter and full-penetration weld corners of curb and retaining frames.

Retaining Frames:
1. Retaining frames that secure glazing panels along each side under spring tension need not be welded. 2.
Seal with silicone sealant along full perimeter of retaining frames. 3. Pre-drill skylight frames for
anchorage to self-curbing solution.







F. Seal glazing panels to base frame to allow for sufficient expansion and contraction.
1. Provide exterior weep hole arrangement.






PART 3

3 .1

A.

B.

C.

3 .2

A.

B.

3 .3

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

3 .4

A.

B.


C.






EXECUTION

EXAMINATION

Examine areas to receive skylights, including supporting structure and mounting surfaces.

Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.

Do not begin preparation or installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

PREPARATION

Prepare surfaces to receive skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Ensure supports to receive skylights are clean, flat, and square.

INSTALLATION

Install skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations indicated on the Drawings.

Install skylights square, accurately aligned, and without warp or rack.

Install skylights weathertight.

Anchor skylights securely in place to supports.

Accommodate thermal movement of roof system and skylights.

Use installation hardware furnished by manufacturer.

CLEANING

Clean skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Clean skylights inside and outside, including glazing, framing members, and accessories promptly after installation
and after sealants have cured.

Remove temporary protective coverings and labels.







D. Remove excess sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.

E. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage skylights.

F. Ensure glazing is without scratches inside and outside.

3 .5 PROTECTION

A.

B.


C.

Protect installed skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Protect installed skylights to ensure that, except for normal weathering, skylights will be without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

Remove and replace glazing which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction.


END OF SECTION






































DIVISION 08 OPENINGS
08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
1.1.2 Supply of Door Hardware.


1.2 Related Work

1.2.1 Installation of finish hardware: under section 08 11 16, 08 14 00.


1.3 Quality Assurance

1.3.1


1.3.2
1.3.3



1.3.4


1.3.5

Have the supervision, administration and servicing of the work of this Section
performed by a hardware specialist.
Co-ordinate the work of this Section with other related sections.
Hardware specialist to inspect the doors & windows and hardware installation to ensure
doors, windows and hardware are properly and securely installed and that the installed
hardware are functioning properly to CLIENT's approval.
All hardware shall be from one manufacturer and a combination of source is not
acceptable.
The supplier shall offer full technical support and shall have suitably qualified staff holding
a Diploma from the Guild of Architectural Ironmongers, able to prepare/amend proper
ironmongery schedules and advise on technical matters, including master key systems
and problems of specification, installation and operation.

1.4 References

The publications listed below (including the amendments, addenda and designated changes)
form a part of this section to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text
by the basic designation only.

1.4.4 American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

ANSI/DHI A 115.4 - 1994 Preparation for Lever Extension Flush Bolts










ANSI/DHI A 115.13 - 1991

ANSI/DHI A 115.18 - 1994



NSI/DHI A 115.1G -

ANSI/BHMA A 156.1 - 1997

ANSI/BHMA A 156.2 - 1996



ANSI/BHMA A 156.4 - 1992

ANSI/BHMA A 156.5 - 1992

ANSI/BHMA A 156.6 - 1994

ANSI/BHMA A 156.7 -1997

ANSI/BHMA A 156.8 - 1994



ANSI/BHMA A 156.13 - 1994

ANSI/BHMA A 156.16 - 1997

ANSI/BHMA A 156.18 - 1993

ANSI/BHMA A 156.21 - 1996

Preparation for Auxiliary Bored Deadlocks and
Deadlatches
Preparation for Bored Locks and Latches with Lever
Handles for 44 mm Steel Doors and Frames

1994 Installation Guide for Doors Hardware

Butts & Hinges (BHMA 101)

Bored & Preassembled Locks & Latches (BHMA
601)

Door Control Closers (BHMA 301)

Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products (BHMA 501)

Architectural Door Trim (BHMA 1001)

Template Hinge Dimensions (BHMA 111)

Door Controls - Overhead Holders & Stops (BHMA
311)

Mortise Locks & Latches (BHMA 621)

Auxiliary Hardware (BHMA 1201)

Materials & Finishes (BHMA 1301)

Thresholds

1.4.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 80 - 1992 Fire Doors and Windows 2.
NFPA 101 - 1994 Life Safety Codes

1.5 Design

1.5.1


1 .5 .2
1 .5 .3

Regardless of other provisions, materials shall meet fire safety requirements and not
be subject to bimetallic corrosion with background materials or other ironmongery.
Nature and quality of the project.
Every finished surface of one material, whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped,
shall match exactly in color and texture and all items on any one visible door face
shall be finished to an identical appearance.










1.6 Submittals

1.6.1 Shop Drawings
a.







b.


c.


d.
The hardware specialist shall prepare and submit shop drawings containing a
completely itemized Schedule of Hardware and Master Key system. The
Schedule of Hardware shall list all doors by number (in sequence) and
location with complete details of the hardware to be supplied, including
installation heights and special instructions. Format of schedule to be
approved.
The Schedule of Hardware shall incorporate the catalogue numbers of
hardware as specified and all alternatives which have been accepted.
The Contractor shall furnish copies of final reviewed shop drawings to the
doors fabricators and to the hardware installers.
The hardware specialist shall review the shop drawings for doors to ensure
the correct provisions and reinforcements are being provided to ensure
proper, secure and durable hardware installation.
1.6.2


1.6.3




1.6.4
Samples: The hardware specialist shall submit complete samples of hardware items
for review.
Templates: The hardware specialist shall promptly furnish templates and
information necessary for proper preparation of doors & frames and for the
installation of hardware to the doors & frames fabricator, and to the doors and
hardware installer in ample time to facilitate the progress of the work.
Maintenance Instructions Manual: Prior to issuance of Provisional Acceptance
Certificate', hand over to CLIENT three copies of the manual containing a final "as built"
Hardware Schedule, full instructions for the adjustment, maintenance, spare part list
etc. of all hardware items, together with special keys, wrenches etc. required to carry
out normal adjustments to hardware.
1.6.5 Certification: On completion, submit certificate signed by the hardware supplier that all
the finish hardware is properly installed accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.7 Inspection and Supervision

1.7.1




1.7.2

The hardware specialist shall examine the Drawings, Hardware Schedules and shop
drawings to determine final dimensions, sizes and quantity of the hardware items
required, ensure that the hardware listed shall fit and operate properly and make
adjustments to the hardware at no extra cost to the Contract.
The hardware specialist shall obtain and examine shop drawings for doors & frames to
ensure proper provisions and preparations for hardware are made.












1.7.3



1.7.4



1.7.5

The hardware specialist shall make periodic inspections of the hardware and door
installations, report improper and unsatisfactory conditions and expedite the
replacement or correction of faulty hardware at no extra cost to the Contract.
The Contractor shall check the hardware installation for correct operation, maintain
each item in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, protect it against
damage by other trades and adjust, clean and lubricate it on completion of the works.
The Contractor shall not fix hardware until background finishes are complete.
Hardware previously fixed shall be removed before any finishing process.

1.8 Labeling, Packaging, Delivery and Storage

1.8.1



1.8.2


1.8.3

Deliver and store each hardware item in the manufacturers' original containers. The
containers shall be clearly labelled as to content and door on which the hardware is
to be installed, in accordance with the shop drawing Schedule of Hardware.
The hardware specialist shall be responsible for ensuring the timely delivery of hardware
so that all on site work progresses without delay and interruptions.
The Contractor shall provide a locked storage room for the on-site storage and
protection of the hardware. All hardware shall be laid out in an organized manner on
shelves in the storage room.

1.9 Maintenance

1.9.1 The Contractor shall provide 12 months free maintenance which includes but it is not
limited to adjustments, repairs and replacement if necessary of defective hardware.

1.10 Extended Warranty

1.10.1

Provide expressly stated guarantee to ironmongery for the project and unlimited by
disclaimers of responsibility for ironmongery schedules, undertaking to repair or
replace, free of charge, items which are or become defective due to faulty material or
workmanship, or unsuitability for intended building use or prevailing external or
internal environmental conditions, subject only to fixing according to approved
ironmongery schedules and installation instruction supplied, for periods after
installation of :
a.
b.
c.
d.
hinges: five years (including guarantee against wear)
locks: five years
overhead surface mounted closers: five years
non-mechanical items (plates, handles, etc.): ten years subject to normal
wear characteristics of the materials and finishes supplied according to these
specifications.
1.10.2 Warranty period start from the date of "Provisional Acceptance Certificate".









1.11 Extra Material

At completion and prior to issuance of hand over certificate, provide 5% extra
material from each type of used hardwares.
The extra material shall be package and clearly labelled to identify manufacturer,
brand name, type and location (as directed by the CLIENT).
























































2.





2.1
























2.2









2.3







2.4



PRODUCTS

General
All Hardware should be from one manufacturer and a combination of sources is not acceptable.
Hardware schedule shall provide convenience of use and maintenance of the building security
against unauthorized access (and in some cases exit), escape from, protection against and
prevention of fire, smoke spread of toxic atmospheres or of other hazards and protection to doors
and other surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that hardware supplied meets with the CLIENT's
requirements, and if any item proposed or specified detracts there from the CLIENT shall be
informed. Unless stated, hardware to aluminum units shall be by the aluminum fabricator in
accordance with this specification but with finishes to match his sections. Floor spring units, boxes
and cover plates, master keyed cylinders and access control hardware shall be by the general
hardware supplier.
The Contractor shall provide approved weatherproof storage facilities for all hardware delivered to
the Work site.
The Contractor shall check the hardware on installation for correct operation, maintain each item in
accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, protect it against damage by other trades and
adjust, clean and lubricate it, on completion of the Works. The Contractor shall not fix hardware
until background finishes are complete. Hardware previously fixed shall be removed before any
finishing process.
Hardware shall be supplied complete with all mounting fixings. British Standards set minimum
requirements. All Stainless steel hardware shall be satin finish.

Designs, Materials and Finishes
Regardless of other provisions, materials shall meet fire safety requirements and not be subject to
bimetallic corrosion with background materials or other ironmongery.

Each item's design and finish shall reflect the nature and quality of the project. Every finished
surface of one material, whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped, shall match exactly in colour
and texture and all items on any one visible door face shall be finished to an identical appearance.

Fixing Devices
Provide suitable, matching, metric, rust proofed fixing devices to suit the location and background, of
Allen key.

Pull handle fixing shall be passivate steel bolt through type, with cups, unless otherwise specifically
required.

Hinges
Hinges shall be of a suitable type to match other items on the doors. All hinges shall be ball
bearing fire rated, independently tested and suitable for the door weight of a maximum of 120kg,
size and usage intended.










Hinges shall be triple knuckle ball bearing type to minimize closing friction and prevent wear,
independently tested and certified as not compromising the specified rating. Aluminium hinges are
not acceptable.

2.5

Lock and Latches
Lock suites for use on fire rated door assemblies shall be independently tested and certified as not
compromising the fire rating and shall not contain plastics, zinc or other low melting point
components. Mortise locks and latches shall be to performance requirements of BS5872 category
B and include the following:

(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)

(e)
(f)

Deadbolts incorporating anti-sawing hardened steel rollers,
If for lever handles, special springing against progressive lever droop (levers with
sprung roses are unacceptable due to potential for damage and corrosion.)
Facility for full reversal of hand, without opening the case.
Suitable forends, strike plates and rebate components if for rebated meeting styles, of
non-corroding materials to match handles
All locks to have backset
All lock forends to be supplied in a matching finish separately such that it is screwed to
the lockcase concealing the screw that hold the cylinder in position

2.6










2.7



2.8









2.9

Cylinders
Cylinders shall be finished to match handles and trim (includes coloured finishes), easily
removable with the door open, without dismantling trim but not removable if closed. Two keys per
cylinder required.

The cylinder shall have paracentric keyways and TG pins to prevent picking and hardened steel
drives pins and body insert to overcome drilling. Locks shall be master keyed to the CLIENT's
requirement.

Knobs
The Knobs shall be supplied complete with H.T. spindle suitable for door thickness between 35mm
and 54mm. Roses shall be capable of being rigidly fixed to the door with screws.
Pull Handles
a) Pull handles should be provided with bolt through fixings employing countersunk corrosion
proofed bolts, cup washers and locking patches.
b) Handle for sandwich panel door shall be powder coated 250mm with 25mm tubular
aluminum with modified brass inserts for extra strength.
c) Lever type handle for sandwich panel : tubular stainless steel 1000mm from floor
d) Back plate for sandwich panel 3mm stainless steel size 225 x 22 mm to fit handles
with 6 stainless steel holding screws.
Toilet Doors
To be fitted with hinges and locks to have emergency release indicator and turn.
2.10 Panic Devices
Panic devices to comply with BS 5725 PT1and EN 1125 and Panic bolts to be Satin Stainless Steel
plated.










2.11









2.12


Door Stops
a) All doorstops should be matching other ironmongery and should be half moon in shape in the
accommodation block. Doorstops in all other buildings should be robust matching other
ironmongery and should be semi round in nature with thick round back rubber circular exterior
piece.
b) door stopper for sandwich panel door shall be 35mm dia solid stainless steel with
with rubber protection ring.

Door Closing Devices
Door closers shall be fully adjustable, hydraulic check types, incorporating the following features:

(a)



(b)

(c)

(d)



(e)

Closing speed fully adjustable between two and thirty seconds ( if delayed
closing is specified the door, when opened to 90 degrees or beyond, shall stand
motionless for a period adjustable up to 60 seconds, before starting to close).
Opening and closing from any angle up to 180 degrees with check adjustable to
operate from any angle between 135 degrees and closed.
Five year guarantee in use of local ambient conditions, including positions of
extreme exposure and, for back check closers, even if stops are not specified.
They shall have plain, rectilinear, single bodies finished identically to other items
on the door, suitable rust-proofed arms, fully concealed fixings and adjustment
controls. Body of closer to be in an anodized aluminum finish. Gray colour door
closer covers are not acceptable.
Floor mounted closers shall be of one type suitable for single or double action, wood or metal
doors by use of compatible fittings, with concealed fixing cover plates matching other ironmongery
on the door specially reinforced galvanized main boxes allowing mechanical adjustment vertically,
longitudinally and transversely after installation.
2.13 Technical Support
The Contractor shall ensure that the supplier shall offer full technical support and shall have
suitably qualified staff able to prepare/amend proper ironmongery schedules and advise on
technical matters, including master key systems and matters of specification, installation and
operation.
























3. EXECUTION

3.1 Fixing Devices

3.2.1 Provide suitable, matching, metric, rust-proofed fixing devices to suit the location and
background.
3 .2 .2 Pull handle fixings shall be passivate steel bolt through type, with cups, unless
otherwise specifically required.

3.2 Hardware Schedule

3.3.1



3.3.2

The hardware specialist shall prepare and submit shop drawings based on the door
tables and window tables drawings, the shop drawings shall contain a completely
itemized schedule of hardware and keying schedule for CLIENT review.
The schedule shall list all doors and windows by number (in sequence) and location
with complete details of the hardware to be supplied, catalogue, numbers, finishes,
dimensions and quantity of the hardwares items required.




- END OF SECTION -



































DIVISION 08 OPENINGS

08 11 16 GLASS AND GLAZING


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2



1.1.3

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
Supply of glass and tempered glass: Aluminum Doors and windows: Fabrication,
supply and installation of all Mirrors in bath and toilets, complete with all related
necessary accessories, to the approval of CLIENT.
Compliance with BS 952, BS 6262 (Code of Practice for Glazing), BS 8000 Part 7
Workmanship Code of Practice for Glazing and other standards indicated in this Section.

1.2 Related Work

1 .2 .1 08 11 16 Aluminum Doors
2 .2 .1 08 14 00 Wood doors
3 .2 .1 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows. 1.2.2
08 71 00 Door Hardware

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1


1 .3 .2



1 .3 .3



1 . 3. 4

Comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 00: Shop Drawings, Product Data &
Samples - Submittals
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating layout of glass and mirrors, and
installation details, including manufacturer's data sheets, for all materials to be used in
the work of this Section, for review by CLIENT.
Samples: Submit 3 samples 600 mm x 600 mm of each type of glass and mirrors for
CLIENT's review. Modify and resubmit samples to obtain approval. Installed work
shall match approved samples.
G l a s s Te s t Re ports : Submi t the fol l ow i ng:
Glass stress analysis performed by glass and manufacturer/supplier of all glass.
Identify locations of each glass unit on building, its stress factors and statement wh e t
h e r g l a s s u n i t i s t o b e a n n e a l e d , h e a t s t re n g t h e n e d t e m p e re d o r l a m i n a t e d . Bi d p ri
c e s h a l l i n c l u d e f o r p ro v i s i o n s o f g l a s s c o n s i s t e n t wi t h m i n i m u m re s u l t s a s d e t e rm
i n e d b y t h e g l a s s s t re s s a n a l y s i s e x c e p t wh e re a s t ro n g e r, t h i c k e r o r p a rt i c u l
a r t y p e o f s a f e t y g l a s s i s s p e c i f i c a l l y i n d i c a t e d o n d ra wi n g s a n d i n
specifications for a particular location; then the bid price shall include for the
specific glass.





1.3.5






1.3.6

Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification approval for the installer prior to
start of installation on site. At the time of completion of works under this Section
submit certificate stating that materials and installed work are in compliance with the
requirements of this Section.


Drawings

The Architect's drawings are intended to show the general appearance of the completed
work rather than the comprehensive details of the windows, doors, and surrounding
weathering details. These proposals shall not be taken as showing a solution in detail.
The profiles and dimensions shown on the Architect's drawings shall nevertheless not be
modified without prior agreement with the CLIENT.

The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor shall check any site dimensions
required for the manufacture or supply of any work and shall allow for the cost of such a
check. The Contractor and Sub-Contractor shall immediately report to the CLIENT any
discrepancy in or divergence between figured or calculated dimensions and scaled
dimensions on the drawings.

The Contractor shall submit with his tender sufficient details to permit the suitability of the
work to be properly considered by the CLIENT. In no way shall these proposals fail to meet
the minimum requirements herein specified, fail to maintain the waterproof and airtight
integrity of the building or fail to incorporate the necessary requirements for thermal and
loading movements of the structure and all components.

The Contractor shall, in advance, specify and describe the aluminium, steel and glass
thickness, construction finishes, areas to be sealed, and types and application of sealants
and backings, gaskets, seals, flashings, weather strips, thermal insulating materials,
provision for thermal and other movements, together with fabrication and erection
tolerances.

The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor shall prepare working and/or shop
drawings and submit three copies of each to the CLIENT for comment prior to manufacture
or execution of the work that is subject of this sub-contract.
All surfaces which are to be finished for corrosion protection and/or decoration shall be
indicated on the drawings: these are "significant surfaces" as defined in BS 5411 Part 1:
1980 and shall be agreed with the CLIENT.

1.3.7












As-Built Drawings

Prior to the completion of this sub-contract, the Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-
Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT four full sets of the final versions of each working
and/or shop drawing showing the work as-built under this sub-contract; the Contractor
shall also submit to the CLIENT information and guidance on the maintenance of all the
materials and goods built into the works under this sub-contract.









1.4 Warranty/Guarantee

1.4.1



1.4.3
1.4.4

Warrant for ten years, seals on insulated glass units. Condensation, fogging and
obstruction of vision due to deterioration of film on internal surfaces shall be
considered as seals failure.
Warrant for ten years, the reflectance coat for reflective glass.
The warranty shall be backed by an insurance policy for ten (10) years period taken
from a recognized Insurance Engineer to the approval of CLIENT. Submit warranty
and policy to CLIENT.















































2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

This document is intended to indicate the performance requirements for the following :

(i)
(ii)
(iii)

Windows Glazing.
External Doors.
General finishes for the above will be as follows:
All aluminium frames will be powder coated internally and externally to the
CLIENT's chosen color.
All glazing and double glazed units will consist of low-E transmittance glass and
clear oriented glass to be approved by the CLIENT.
2.1.1 Requirements
a) Quality
All materials, goods and workmanship as described below shall be new, the best of their respective
kinds and shall conform to the latest British Standard specifications and codes of practice. Materials,
goods and workmanship not so conforming shall be otherwise described by the Sub-Contractor and
shall be subject to the approval of the CLIENT.

Where no standard is given, the appropriate British Standard and Code of Practice, if any, shall
nevertheless apply.

Proprietary materials and systems where employed shall be used and applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

b) Life Expectancy of Materials

The Contractor shall submit with his tender a list of all materials proposed for use in the work together
with their respective life expectancies when used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

c) Replacement of Glass

The Sub-Contractor shall take due account of the need to facilitate the removal and replacement of
glass/double-glazing units and the replacement of all seals and sealants during the service life of the
building as a result of the natural deterioration of materials in the long term.

d) Regulations and Statutory Controls

The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor shall comply with the regulations of all relevant
statutory authorities in respect of the design, installation and execution of the work that is the subject
of this sub-contract. He shall in particular ensure that the Sub-Contractors design, materials and
installation of work are acceptable to the Municipality and other relevant government agencies and









that no conditions imposed by the Municipality or other government agencies on the design of the
components prejudices their performance to the extent that the requirements of this specification
cannot be met.

e) Bi-Metallic Corrosion

The Contractor shall ensure that where materials which have any degree of non-compatibility are in
contact with each other, then suitable separating membranes are incorporated in the design to ensure
that no deterioration of either material takes place. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the
recommendations of British Standard PD 6484: 1979.

f) Material Samples

The Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT in advance samples of materials and goods to be
incorporated in the works and shall obtain his approval thereof. Approved samples shall be retained by
the CLIENT as a standard.

g) Inspection of Samples

The Contractor shall ensure that the following sample is erected complete with fixings, perimeter
weathering/flashing details and ironmongery, and submitted to the CLIENT for inspection and comment
before volume production commences: One typical window. (Full size).
Acceptance of this sample shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to ensure that the
Sub-Contractors work complies in all respects with this specification. Should this sample be erected
off-site, the Contractor shall allow for all expenses incurred by the CLIENT in connection with the
inspection of any samples.

h) Watertight Materials

The Contractor shall be fully responsible in all respects for the satisfactory performance of the Sub-
Contractors work in service and shall particularly ensure that the Sub-Contractors work shall not only
comply with this specification but shall, when complete, be entirely watertight in service. No details or
other information prepared by the CLIENT, shall remove from the Contractor the sole responsibility for
ensuring that the Sub-Contractors work and the weathering of his work are entirely fit for their
respective purposes.

i) Quality Control
The CLIENT will require visiting the relevant factories both before and during the manufacture of the
work in order to monitor quality control; the Sub-Contractor and Contractor shall be required to
cooperate in facilitating such visits. Any visits made by the CLIENT shall not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility to ensure that all items are manufactured strictly in accordance with the requirements
of this specification.



































j) Coordination


The Contractor and Sub-Contractor shall liaise with the CLIENT and others, and provide details of the
work as necessary to ensure effective and timely co-ordination with related building elements, finishes
and services. The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor provides sufficient and properly
qualified supervision of the works at all times.

2.2 Glass Types

a. Insulating Glass Units:
Glass shall be double layered hermetically sealed structural silicon insulated glass with pyrolytic
low emissivity of the types and minimum thickness, as shown on the drawings and specific
herein, and shall in addition, meet the following global requirements:
24mm, double glazing (6+12+6) as follows:
- 6mm blue tinted heat strengthened glass+12mm air space+6mm clear low E heat strengthened
glass.
Shading coefficient 0.23 Light
Transmittance 21%
Light reflection (external) 19%
Light reflection (internal) 09% Solar
Factor 20
U-value summer (American) 1.90 w/sqm K
Relative Heat Gain 160, maximum
b. Single Glass low reflective:
Tinted low reflective single glass shall be 6mm thick. Provide the same thickness for each tint
color indicated throughout Project.
Spares:
All glass types shall be supplied with spare attic stock of two (2) % of each sizes quantities.

Mirrors
Mirrors for use in toilets and bathrooms, etc. shall be made of 6 mm thick selected quality polished plate
glass silvered on one side, electro - copper - backed and coated with a shellac varnish and painted to the
satisfaction of the CLIENT. Mirrors shall have beveled and polished edges.
2.3

2.3.1




2.3.2
Tolerance

The Contractor shall agree with the Sub-Contractor and allow suitable margins for construction
tolerances in his design. These tolerances shall be shown on the Sub-Contractor's working and/or
shop drawings.

The components and assemblies shall be designed and constructed so that when installed there
will be sufficient tolerance to provide for the deflections and other movements during the life of the
building without buckling, distortion of joints, damage to sealants, or other adverse effects.
Tolerances must also be sufficient to permit the proper application of sealants in all cases.

All windows, doors, and other like frames shall be made to allow a 5 mm tolerance all round the
opening in the structure, and junctions shall be finished off by applying an approved sealant onto a







closed cell polyethylene foam backing strip or as otherwise shown on drawings or as specified.

2.3.3 All materials shall be installed on site in accordance with the detailed drawings submitted to the
CLIENT for comment.

a.


b.
c.

All glass shall be manufacture's identifying labels indicating quality and shall be
left in place until final cleaning.
Vision through glass to be distortion free.
Insulated glass units shall be manufactured by a "Single Source" supplier
including glass tempering and fabrication of the insulated glass itself.

2.4

2.4.1




2.4.2



2.4.3


Performance

Wind Pressures
The windows, glazed external doors and glazing at all levels and in every location on plan shall be
designed to withstand dynamic wind pressures and suctions of 1900Pa.

Test Report
Each type of window and external door shall be required to meet the standards set out herein.

Standard for Window Opening Lights
The tests carried out on opening lights shall be in accordance with the following standards:-
(a)

(b)





(c)


(d)
(e)
(f)

(g)
Air permeability test : to be carried out in accordance with BS 5368: Part 1: 1976 with a
maximum test pressure of 1200Pa.
Water tightness test under static pressure : to be carried out preferably in accordance with
BS 5368 Part 2: 1980 with a maximum test pressure of 1200pa or until "gross leakage"
occurs.(Spraying method no.2 should be used in this test). Alternatively the test shall be
carried out in accordance with BS 4315 Part 1: 1968 with a maximum test pressure of
1200Pa or until "gross leakage" occurs.
Wind resistance test : to be carried out in accordance with BS 5368: Part 3 : 1978
modified in accordance with Paragraph 7.1 of BS 6375: Part 1 : 1983 to comply with
severe exposure rating with a maximum test pressure of 1900Pa.
Sequence of testing : to be set out as in Paragraph 4.2 of BS 6375: Part 1 : 1983.
Classification for weather tightness : to be in accordance with BS 6375: Part 1: 1983.
Form of test report by the accredited body : to be in accordance with BS 5368 : Part 4
:1978
Aluminium framed sliding glass doors shall be in accordance with BS 5286.

2.4.4

Air-Flow : Opening Light
During the air permeability tests both before and after the wind resistance test, the air flow passing
through the opening light, expressed as an average leakage rate per metre length of opening joint
visible on the inner face of the specimen, shall be below the limits given in Figure 1 of BS: 6375
Part 1: 1983 for Class IV windows. Furthermore, at a test pressure of 300Pa the leakage rate
through any opening light shall not exceed 7.6m
3
/hour both before and after the wind resistance
test.








2.4.5




2.4.6







2.4.7






2.4.8




2.4.9


Water tightness : Opening Light
During the water tightness test under static pressure both before and after the wind resistance
test, there shall be no "gross leakage" in the opening light under a test pressure of 300Pa or less.

Deflection Generally
During the wind resistance test the deflection of members, such as couplings, glazing bars or
meeting rails shall be limited to 1/250 of the span. In addition, such members retaining the
glass/double-glazing unit shall not deflect more than that amount recommended by the
manufacturer over the length or height of the glass/double-glazing unit. Furthermore, no
permanent damage as defined in BS 6375: Part 1: 1983 shall have occurred.

Air Infiltration : Fixed Lights
Prior to the start of volume production the Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the
CLIENT that the air infiltration of the proposed fixed lights will be less than 0.5m
2
/hour/metre run of
perimeter at a different pressure of 600Pa both before and after wind resistance tests similar to
those described in Clause 5.03 above are met in respect of the fixed lights.

Performance of Samples
The Contractor shall ensure that the samples tested will adequately reflect the performance of the
units to be installed in the building.

Ambient Temperatures
The windows shall be capable of functioning in all respects described in this specification in an
ambient external air temperature range of +5 Deg.C to 50 Deg. C whilst the design internal
daytime conditions are as follows :-

Temperature : 20-22 Deg.C
Relative Humidity : 35-55%

However the design should take into account the deviation from the annual average.
The Contractor shall ensure that allowance is made by the Sub-Contractor in his design and
installation for temperature differences between the various components of the windows and other
components of the building and for the further heating effects of solar gain on the several
components of the windows and other cladding. All work shall accommodate thermal and other
movements noiselessly, i.e. use padded connectors at transom/mullion connections.

2.4.10 U-Values
The combined standard U-Value of the glazing and frames ignoring the effect of the outdoor
exposure conditions shall be not greater than 2.1 W/m
2
k. The Sub-Contractor shall seek by his
design of the window frames to reduce their U-Value as far as practicable without prejudicing the
performance of the windows to the extent that the requirements of this specification cannot be met.

2.4.11 Condensation
The design of the window frame shall be such as to prevent condensation on any part of the







window frame and avoid condensation within any part of the window frame construction.

2.4.12 Capillary Action
The Contractor shall ensure that, wherever appropriate, measures are taken to control the effects
of capillary action so that the work is not affected by this phenomenon.

2.4.13 Acoustic Performance
The Contractor shall confirm that the windows and frames will achieve the following acoustic
reduction:-
Mid-octave frequency band 63 125 250 500 IK 2k 4K
dB attenuation required 20 24 26 29 31 31 26

2.5

2.5.1




2.5.2



2.5.3






2.5.4


GLASS & DOUBLE GLAZING UNITS

Glass generally shall conform to the requirements of BS 952 Part 1: 1978 and BS 952: Part 2:
1980 and shall be of accurate size with clean undamaged edges and surfaces which are not
disfigured.

Hermetically sealed double-glazing units manufactured in accordance with the requirements of BS
5713 : 1979 or other double-glazing units agreed with the CLIENT shall be used as specified.

The thickness and types of glass, together with the required air spaces of the double-glazing units to
be supplied for this project shall be as specified. The Contractor shall nevertheless ensure that the
glass/double-glazing units for this project are fit for their purpose and in particular will not only meet
the wind loading requirements in but also conform to current safety regulations. Sheet glass shall
not be used in the works.

The preferred edge seal to the double-glazing units comprises a desiccant-filled hollow metal
spacer with a continuous primary seal and a secondary seal; the two seals should be of different
shades so that their extent of application may be checked on site. In deciding whether a particular
edge sealing system will be suitable for use in this particular project, the Contractor and Sub-
Contractor shall pay particular attention to :-

(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)

long term performance;
ability to prevent the ingress of water and air into the sealed air space;
adequacy of the structural bond between the two glass panes of the double-glazing unit;
ability to accommodate dimensional changes in the glass panes, spacer, etc;
compatibility with the glazing system;
performance in the presence of moisture and sunlight;
adequacy and continuity of the edge seal at the corners of the unit;
whether the actual profiles, dimensions, lengths and locations of all double-glazing unit
sealants will be such as to meet the performance requirements and be applied in
accordance with the recommendation of their respective manufacturers. The use of an
edge tape or hot melt double-glazing unit sealant is not acceptable.










2.5.5




2.5.6




2.5.7





2.5.8



2.5.9

The Contractor shall indicate whether the double-glazing units supplied for this project will be
covered by the British Standards Institution (BSI) Kitemark Certificate Scheme for hermetically
sealed double-glazing units complying with BS 5713: 1979.

The Contractor shall indicate in advance the measures that will be taken during and after
manufacture to ensure that the glass and double-glazing units supplied for this project comply in all
respects with BS 5713 : 1979 or similar standard agreed with the CLIENT.

The Contractor shall ensure that the Sub-Contractor shall specify in the maintenance document the
nature and frequency of any maintenance requirements relating to the glass/double-glazing units,
the glazing system and the window frames, insofar as they relate to the long term performance of
the glass/double-glazing units.

Double-glazing units for this project shall be manufactured for use on this project only and the
CLIENT shall be given the opportunity of inspecting these units during manufacture.

The Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT at the time of tender a guarantee stating the period
within which the glazing units will be replaced at the cost of the Contractor, should their performance
fall below the requirements of this specification.

2.5.10 The Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT a statement by the manufacturer of the glass and double-
glazing units which states the months and year during which the units for this project were
manufactured.

2.5.11 The Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT a statement by the manufacturer of the glass and double-
glazing units which states the months and year during which the units for this project were
manufactured.

2.6

2.6.1




2.6.2





2.6.3


GLAZING

Glazing shall be generally in accordance with the requirements of BS 6262 : 1982 except that the
glazing system must incorporate drainage and ventilation: the use of a fully-bedded glazing is not
acceptable.

The Contractor shall ensure that the glazing system adopted can meet the wind loading gust tests
and the air and water infiltration tests described elsewhere in this specification without any adverse
effect on either the Contractor at the time of tender and shall satisfy the requirements described in
this specification in every respect.

In deciding whether a particular glazing system will be suitable, the Contractor shall ensure that the
Sub-Contractor shall pay attention to:
(a) long term performance
(b) ability to prevent the ingress of water and air into the building;
(c) ability to support the weight of the glass/double-glazing unit;
(d) ability to retain the glass/double-glazing unit securely in place;








(e)
(f)

(g)

(h)
(i)
(j)

ability to protect the edges of the glass/double-glazing unit from water and sunlight;
ability to allow the water that in places will inevitably in time leak past the primary seal of
the glazing system and through the actual window frame itself to escape to outside.
ability to accommodate dimensional changes in the window frame glass/double-glazing
unit;
compatibility with the window frame and glass/double glazing unit;
maintenance requirements
whether actual profiles, dimensions, lengths & locations of all glazing materials will be
such as to meet performance requirements and shall be as recommended by the
manufacturers of the double-glazing units of the glazing materials.

2.6.4









2.6.5




2.6.6

The Contractor shall submit with his tender a written statement by the manufacturer of the double-
glazing units to the effect that the manufacturer has seen and is satisfied with the Sub-Contractor's
proposals and that, given reasonable standards of workmanship in installing the particular double
glazing units in the particular window frames with particular glazing system all as proposed by the
Sub-Contractor, the performance and life of the double-glazing units when maintained in
accordance with the Sub-Contractor's requirements stated above will not be impaired in any
respect.

The Contractor shall ensure that the proposed glazing system can accommodate the expected
thermal and other movements that are likely in the glass/double-glazing unit and frame, without any
adverse effect on its performance.

At any time before the end of the defects liability period the CLIENT will check the adequacy of the
water tight seal formed by the glazing system between the frames and the glass/double-glazing
units in at least a representative sample of windows. Any failure of the glazing system detected by
this inspection will be notified by the CLIENT to the Contractor who shall make good such defects to
the satisfaction of the CLIENT within four weeks at no additional expense to the Employer.



























3.




3.1

EXECUTION

Preparation
3.1.1


3.1.2



3.1.3


3 .1 .4





Ensure that all openings are free of moisture, rust, dirt or other foreign matter and
permanently fixed in its final position.
Securely install continuous plywood backing plumb and level where all mirrors shall
be installed as shown on the Drawings. Ensure that cut edges of plywood are
treated with wood preservative against moisture and rotting fungi.
Prime surfaces to receive mirrors with mirror surface primer in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's written instructions.
Back paint all backs of mirrors with mirror-back paint, in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2

Fixing
a.




b.






c.




d.

e.



Any metal work used for the primary or secondary supports of the windows and doors,
shall be of suitable thickness, strength and stiffness for the intended purpose and shall be
manufactured, fabricated and finished in accordance with all relevant British Standards
and Codes of Practice.
All fixings and supports shall be capable of withstanding the design loads described
elsewhere in this specification and any operating forces without damage or undue
distortion. Concealed fixings and supports shall be used throughout unless specific
approval in writing to the contrary is given by the CLIENT. The Sub-Contractor's proposed
fixing and support methods and materials shall be agreed with the CLIENT at the design
stage.
Fixings to the structure and all screws, nuts, bolts, rivets and washers shall be of stainless
steel. Supports for the windows, doors shall be made of steel that has been hot-dip
galvanized according to the requirements of BS 729: 1971. Galvanized sections shall be
coated with bitumen where in contact with concrete.
At the design stage the Contractor shall provide the CLIENT with details of Sub-Contractor's
proposed method of fixing the windows including the type and frequency of such fixings.
All fixings, ironmongery, locks and locking devices, fly screens, glazing, weather stripping
etc. necessary for the proper and intended function of the component shall be included
with the component.

3.3 Workmanship

a.
b.



c.



d.





Glazing work shall comply with BS 6262 : 1982.
Prior to proceeding with any work, the Contractor must take all necessary measurements
on site to verify and supplement dimensions and conditions shown on the drawings and
the schedule of finishes.
The Contractor shall protect all glazing work from damage during subsequent operations,
make good any defects, clear away upon completion, clean throughout and leave all work
in perfect condition to the satisfaction of the CLIENT.
All accessories and other items essential for the proper execution of the glazing work,
through not specifically shown on the drawings or specified shall also be provided.







e. The Contractor shall fix all glass in accordance with the glass manufacturer's instructions.
All glass panes shall have rounded edges to prevent any damage to the gaskets. All glass
shall be cleaned by the Contractor before the completion of the works.

3.4

Installation - Glass

3.4.1 General:
a.


c.


d.
e.


f.


g.


h.





All work to be glazed shall be free from moisture, frost, dust, dirt or other
foreign matter and shall be permanently fixed in position.
Accurately cut glass to fit openings and with equal bearing on the entire width
of the pane.
Set interior glass in plastic tape applied to both sides of the glass.
Responsibility for broken glass due to improper setting shall be under this
Section, except where noted otherwise.
Install glass in hollow metal doors using felt strips held in place with metal
stop provided with doors.
Ensure wood in direct contact with glazing compound is primed prior to
glazing.
Glazing compounds, shall be delivered to the job in the original sealed
containers. The contents shall be thoroughly mixed in an approved manner
recommended by the manufacturer, without the use of the thinners.

3.5 Installation - Mirrors

3.5.1






3.5.2




3.5.3



3.5.4
3.5.5

Supply and install wall mirrors over vanities and other places as shown on the
drawing in one piece (maximum 3600 mm) unless otherwise shown on the drawing.
Where overall width of walls to receive mirrors exceed 3600 mm, provide mirror in
sections with vertical joint centered between lavatories. Thickness of mirror shall be 6
mm.
Provide pats of mirror adhesive at minimum rate of 22 pats/sq.m. both ways behind
mirrors and around perimeter edge of each mirror in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions. Use mirror adhesive manufacturer's special
electric applicator only.
After applying mirror adhesive to back of mirrors, press mirrors firmly in place
allowing 5 mm gap between mirrors and substrates. Support bottom of mirrors to
allow mirror adhesive to set-up.
Provide rubber or plastic tape in the metal clips.
Remove the temporary supports and secure mirrors to plywood backing using anti-
vandal semi-concealed fasteners. Exact position of mirrors shall be determined on
the site by CLIENT.
3.6 Protection








a.

b.





c.

d.

e.


The Sub-Contractor shall allow for adequate protection to all finished surfaces , for the
removal of the protective layer and for cleaning down once.
The significant surfaces of all window and door components shall be protected by a low-
tack polythene tape prior to dispatch from the factory. If during fixing or glazing any such
protection is removed, it must be refitted or replaced immediately. Such protection shall
remain in position until the completion of all other work in the vicinity of the installation and
until the Contractor is instructed by the CLIENT that it is to be removed.
Alternative methods of protection may be used subject to the prior agreement of the
CLIENT.
All finished components shall be delivered to site at a time to eliminate or reduce to a
minimum, storage on site prior to fixing.
All components and in particular double-glazing units and glazed windows shall be
transported, stored, stacked and handled to ensure no undue stress or damage is
caused. All corners and edges shall be adequately protected at all times to avoid damage
until fixed in place. Any damage that occurs shall be rectified by the Contractor
immediately.

3.7









3.8














3.8.1

3.8.2


Cleaning

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for removal of all protective coating tape, etc and
surplus sealant and other compounds.

At the completion of installation and prior to hand over, the Contractor shall ensure that the
sub-contractor shall clean all exposed aluminium and glass.

Final Inspection

The Sub-Contractor shall visit the site not more than three weeks prior to the date of
Practical Completion and shall inspect each part of the work.
The Contractor shall report forthwith in writing to the CLIENT on the condition of the work
as revealed during the Sub-Contractors inspection and shall inform the CLIENT in writing of
the work required to remedy any defects. The Contractor shall ensure that this work shall
be completed by the Sub-Contractor prior to the date of Practical Completion at no
additional expense to the employer. The Contractor shall confirm in writing to the CLIENT
when all such remedial work has been completed.



- END OF SECTION




















CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 09 00 00 - Finishes
- 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies
- 09 24 00 - Cement Plastering
- 09 30 13 - Ceramic Tiling
- 09 30 33 - Stone Tiling
- 09 51 13 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings
- 09 66 16 - Terrazzo Tiles
- 09 68 16 - Sheet carpeting
- 09 90 00 - Painting
- 09 96 00 - High Performance coating












































DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES


1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
Supply and installation of gypsum ceilings and suspension systems all as shown on
the drawings and as specified.
Coordinate work of this section with work under Mechanical & Electrical Divisions.

1.2 Terminology

The designation "Gypsum Board" shall also apply when other terminologies are used for the
same product eg:, gypboard, gyproc, etc.

1.3 Reference

1.3.1 Metal furring, and gypsum board shall comply with the requirements of BS 1230: Part
1: BS 8212 and DIN 18180 unless otherwise specified herein.

1.4 Protection

1.4.1 Protect surrounding surfaces against damage. Use approved means as required to
ensure adequate protection.

1.5 Fire Resistance Ratings

1.5.1 Conform to all requirements of one of the following:

a.



b.

Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (ULI)
333 Pfingsten Road, Northbook, IL 60062
USA Tel: (312)272-8800

BSI Standards, Linford Wood, (BSI)
Milton Keyes, MK14 6LE, United Kingdom
Tel: 09808-220022

1.5.2 Designs shall provide the required fire resistance ratings as required by the Civil
Defense Authorities and to meet fire tests stated under BS 476: Parts 4, 6, 7 & 8.


1.6 Submittals

1.6.1 Provide shop drawings showing general layout, expansion and control joints, and
details for suspended ceiling, location and installation of lighting fixture details of












1.6.2

1.6.3

1.6.4


1.6.5


1.7 Testing

1.7.1

1.7.2



1.7.3

1.7.4

suspension systems, fixing details and access panels shall be submitted to CLIENT
for approval.

Provide samples of materials and finishes for approval by CLIENT.

Samples when approved will serve as a basis for approving finished work.

Provide manufacturers catalogue covering all information of the ceiling systems
including all details of suspension system, for approval.

Certification: Submit certificate stating that materials and installed work have been
carried out in accordance with the requirements of this section.



Include cost of testing for the work of this section.

Install three sample expansion anchors in the manner proposed for anchorage of
work and in the presence of CLIENT's representative, test each anchor to prove a
safety factor of 8 when compared to actual service load.

Submit all written test reports for CLIENT's review and record.

If anchors fail test, install three more anchors and repeat test. If one or more
anchors fail repeat test, provide another type of anchor and re-test until anchors pass
testing.


1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1.8.1 Gypsum board, and other materials shall be kept under cover and free from
dampness and temperature extremes.

1.8.2 Deliver and store metal accessories and similar items in crates to prevent damage to
the materials.

1.9

Mock-up

1.9.1


1.9.2


1.9.3



Provide a mock-up area where designated by CLIENT. Mock-ups shall include lighting
fixtures, mechanical grilles, etc.

Install a suspended ceiling and to demonstrate accuracy and quality of workmanship
all as identified in the specifications of this section.

Retain mock-up area until completion of work. Approved work in the mock-up shall
serve as a standard for similar work throughout the building. The mock-up also may
become part of the finished work.













2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

2.1.1 Anchors for Hangers: Tie wire anchors, 32 mm long x 7 mm diameter. Do not use
drive pin or similar type or powder actuated fasteners.

2.1.2 Ceiling Suspension System: Manufactured as specified in the paragraphs below:

a.
b.



c.



d.

Hangers: 9.75 mm diameter, galvanized, mild steel pencil rods.
Runner Channels: 0.7m thick 38.0 mm deep, cold rolled steel channels,
weighing not less than 220 kg./300 lineal m., shop painted after fabrication.
To BS 1449 and fabricated from steel to BS 4360.
Furring Channels: Thickness 0.56mm thick screw type, 22 mm deep, cold
rolled steel channels, weighing not less than 140 kg./300 lineal m., shop-
painted after fabrication.
Tie Wire: 1.6 mm diameter, annealed and galvanized steel.

2.1.3




2.1.4


2 .1 .5






2 .1 .6








2 .1 .7

2 .1 .8


2 .1 .9

Shadow Angles: Where ceiling system abut walls or other vertical elements,
provide a "shadow angle" 0.762mm thick, hot dipped galvanized steel trim "w shape"
as separation in order to obtain and form a shadow gap between ceiling and
adjacent element.

Control Joints: Formed galvanized steel, equal to type by British Gypsum Limited or
other approved manufacturer.

Gypsum Board: To BS 1230: Part 1: 1985, Classification Type 1 for standard
gypsum board and to BS 1230: Part 1: 1985, Classification Type 5 for fire-rated
gypsum board, except where specified otherwise and with tapered edges, conforming
to thickness shown on drawings, 1200 mm wide and in lengths to minimize the number
of joints.


Gypsum Tile with PVC Face & Foil Back:

600 x 600 x 12.5mm, Tiles shall be un-perforated machine vinyl laminated face & foil
backing, to be installed on exposed (T) grid section, tiles shall be washable and fully
humidity resistant, fire resistant to BS 476: Part 23: 1987 Clause 5, non combustible to
BS 476: Part 4: 1970, WRFC report No. WARRES No. 62735, Light Reflection: Ultra
White; 89.5 %, moisture resistance maximum deflection of 1:3.50 at 90% RH and
250C

Acoustical Sealant: Non-staining, non bleeding, waterproof acousting sealant type.

Fire Resistive Sealant: One part, high quality, ready to use, caulking grade, fire
resistive silicone sealant to BS 476 and ASTM E-814.

Foam Tape: 0.65 mm thick, self-adhesive foamed or closed cell neoprene type foam
tape.

2.1.10 No Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) are used within the
development.






3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Co-ordination

3.1.1 Prior to commencing installation, check that all architectural, mechanical and
electrical work is complete and that work area is free from excessive moisture.

3.1.2 After installation of light fixtures and diffusers, check ceiling and make good ceiling
deficiencies.

3.2 Installation - Fire-rated Assemblies

3.2.1 Install gypsum board ceilings, including suspension systems, to conform to
applicable BSI standards or equivalent UL designs.

3 .2 .5 Fire ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings.

3 .3 Suspended Ceilings

3.3.1


3.3.2


3.3.3



3.3.4


3.3.5


3.3.6


3.3.7


3.3.8



3.3.9



3.3.10

Finished work shall be rigid, secure, square, level and plumb, constructed to
maintain dimensions and contours shown. Make allowance for thermal movement.

Furring shown is not exact of complete. The location and method of securing pieces of
the ceiling is to the option of the contractor but to CLIENT's approval.

Frame around openings, access panels, ventilating and lighting fixtures, with runner
and furring channels in such a manner that the runner and furring channels are
located symmetrically and not produce rotation of the members.

Furr around ducts, and pipes in finished areas and at vertical breaks within or at
termination of suspended ceilings.

Erect furring for suspended ceilings independent of walls, columns, pipes and ducts.
Furring shall be level and securely fasten to hangers attached to the structure.

Fasten hangers to underside of concrete slab using specified anchors or cast-in-
place inserts.

Kinks or bends shall not be made in hangers as a means of leveling main runner
channels.

Locate main runners not more than 1200 mm o.c. and not more than 150 mm from
room walls to suit ceiling layouts and to frame items such as ventilating and lighting
fixtures.

Where presence of mechanical work or lighting fixtures prevent fixation of runners to
hangers provide supplementary framing to achieve equivalent supports of main
runners.

Space furring channels at right angles to main runner at not more than 400 mm o.c.







3.3.11



3.3.12


3.3.13

Provide cross bracing between ceiling suspension system and structure to prevent
sway where ceiling is unrestricted around perimeter by vertical walls extending to
structure above.

Provide 25 mm clearance between ends of furring and/or runners adjoining walls and
partitions.

Install gypsum board ceilings including suspension systems to conform to applicable
UL designs or equivalent BSI standards.

3.4 Installation - Gypsum Board

3.4.1.

3.4.2.



3 .4 .3 .

3 .4 .4 .

3 .4 .5 .

Apply gypsum board ceilings perpendicular to framing members.

Apply gypsum board with screws spaced at 300 mm o.c. at mid panel and at edges,
staggered, no closer than 9.5 mm from edges and ends driven slightly below the
surface leaving a shallow dimple.

Cut all openings with saw leaving square edges.

Loosely butt all joints to be taped and reinforced with fiber mesh reinforcement.

Stagger all end joints and the joints between panels to achieve a maximum of bridging
and a minimum of continued joints. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3.5 Installation - Metal Trim

3.5.1.


3.5.2.

3 .5 .3 .

The drawings do not purport to show all metal trim required; verify with CLIENT the
precise locations and types of trim to be used.

Carefully inspect drawings and verify location of all metal trim required.

Install all trim in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations paying
particular attention to make all trim installation plumb, level and true to line with firm
attachment to supporting members.

3.6 Control Joints

3.6.1 Install control joints using metal trim control joints as specified where:

a.


b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Ceiling abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition or other vertical
penetrations.
Construction changes within the plane of the ceiling.
Ceiling dimensions exceed 15000 mm in either direction.
Area within separate ceiling sections exceeds 230 sq. m.
Wings of 'L', 'T' & 'U' shaped ceiling areas are joined. At
other locations as shown on the Drawings.









3.7 Expansion Joints

3.7.1 Provide at location where ceilings cross expansion joints in structural slabs.
Installation of expansion joints is to be by this Section.

3.8 Access Panels

3.8.1 Install access panels, supplied under Divisions 15 and 16. Install where indicated on
the Drawings and where required by Divisions 15 and 16. Coordinate work and exact
locations with Division 15 & 16.

3.9 Taping and Finishing

3.9.1 Environmental Conditions

a. Control cooling and ventilation during finishing operations to ensure
maintenance of temperature within range recommended by manufacturer for
application and curing of taping compound.

3.9.2 First Coat

a.

b.
c.


d.
e.

f.

Spread compound evenly over all joints, using suitable tools designed for the
purpose.
Fill all joint recesses and metal trim
Center the reinforcing tape on the joint and press into the fresh compound,
wiping down with sufficient pressure to remove excess compound but leaving
sufficient compound under the tape for proper bond.
Feather all edges and leave the surface free from blisters and tape wrinkles.
Apply compound to all fastener recesses, metal trim and control joints, leaving
flush with the adjacent surfaces.
Fold reinforcing tape along its centerline and apply to all interior angles,
following the same procedure as for joints.

3.9.3 Second Coat

a.

b.

c.

After taping compound is dry, lightly sand with fine sandpaper to remove all
irregularities.
Apply a second coat of compound to all joints, feathering approximately 75
mm beyond edges of tape.
Apply second coat to all fastener recesses, metal trim and control joints and
allow drying.


3.9.4 Third Coat

a.

b.

c.

Lightly sand the dry compound with fine sandpaper to remove all
irregularities.
Apply final skim coat, feathering out approximately 50 mm beyond second
coat.
Third coat all fastener recesses, metal trim, control joints and all interior
angles, allow drying.









d. Carefully sand the third coat so that the finished surface presents a uniform,
smooth appearance, completely free from irregularities visible to the unaided
eye at a distance of 1500 mm.


END OF SECTION























































DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 24 00 CEMENT PLASTERING


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes
1.1.1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
1.1.2 Supply and installation of plaster (PL), and related accessories as specified herein
and required by the Works, to CLIENT 's approval.

1.2 Reference Standards
1.2.1




1.2.2



1.2.3
The work of this Section shall comply with:

BS 1199, BS 1369, BS 2989, BS 4049, BS 4721, BS 5492, BS 6452, BS 6472, BS
6100 Part 6 and BS 8000 Part 10.
Refer to and co-ordinate with the following sections:
Division 5: Metals
Division 8: Openings
Do work to requirements of the referenced standards and as specified in this
Section.

1.3 Submittals
1.3.1


1.3.2
Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit a complete set of data for materials and
prefabricated devices used for the plaster work.
Certification: On completion, submit a certificate signed by the applicator which
states that work of this Section has been installed as specified in this Section. No
final payment for work of this Section will be made without receipt by CLIENT of the
certificate.

1.4 Mock-Ups
1.4.1

1.4.2

1.4.3
Construct an on-site mock-up in locations to be determined by CLIENT, for Wall to
receive plaster;
Modify mock-ups as necessary to obtain CLIENT's approval. When approved, mock-
up may remain as part of the completed building.
All finished plaster work in remainder of building shall match standard of approved
mock-up.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling
1.5.1 Corner beads, casing beads and similar items shall be stored in crates to prevent
damage to the material. Bent or deformed material shall not be used in the work.









1.5.2 Plaster, cementituous materials and fiberglass shall be delivered and stored in a dry
area within the building.

1.6 Protection
Protect surrounding surfaces against damage. Use drop cloths and other approved means to
ensure adequate protection as required.
























































2.0 PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

The cement and water used for plastering shall be as before described in Section E, Concrete Work
and the sand shall be as before described in Section F, Block work. Lime shall be hydrated complying
with BS 890, Class B. Any pigments used to colour cement or cement products shall be obtained from
an approved manufacturer and shall meet the requirements of BS 1014. No Asbestos Containing
Materials (ACMs) are used within the development.

2.1.1 Plaster Over Dissimilar Materials (Concrete Column and Block work)
Before dash coat, larger voids shall be grouted and Plastering metal lath (to BS 1369 Part 1:1987 )
with nominal weight 1.61 Kg/m shall be mechanically fixed to the concrete column, overlapping the
block work and the column by 100mm towards each side from the joint.

2.1.2 Wall Ties.
Wall ties between masonry and steel work shall be dipped galvanized and have a length of
200mm with safety end. The wall ties shall be shot fired to steel columns and fixed as per
manufacturer's recommendation.
Wall ties between concrete and masonry shall be galvanized steel for internal walls and stainless
steel for external walls, with minimum dimensions of 200 X 25 X 2.5 mm fixed at every 4
th
layer.
Every 2
nd
layer in between these shall be fixed with bed joint expanded metal lath reinforcement
for the whole length of the block layer and bended up to 200mm and properly fixed to the concrete
structure, architecture and feature bead, galvanized steel for internal wall and stainless steel for
external walls, extended lath designed to form plaster stop, corner beads and shadow line recess
shall be used wherever necessary and shown on drawings. For external, Stainless steel plaster
stops, Corner beads, metal stop and extended metal lath must be used. For elevation grooves
anodized Aluminium channels must be used. All bolts, nuts and nails shall be stainless steel for
external use.

2.1.3 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for use in screeds shall be as specified under "Concrete Work", but with
maximum size of aggregate 5 mm. Aggregate for use in granolithic shall be selected granite or
quartz between 5 mm and 10 mm in size.

2.1.4 Fine Aggregate (Sand)
Sand for use in plaster work shall be as specified under "Concrete Work" and shall contain no
more that 0.06% chlorides. Fine aggregate for use in tyrolean shall be specially selected for that
purpose.

2.1.5 Water
Water shall be clean, free any harmful matter, and free from any unusual proportions of dissolved
salt. Sea water or brackish water shall note be used. Analysis by an independent testing body
shall be made to determine the suitability of the water if required by the CLIENT.

2.1.6 Epoxy Resin Mortar / Render







Epoxy resin based mortar / render shall be obtained from a manufacturer approved by the CLIENT.

2.1.7 Bonding Agent
High performance plaster bonding agent comply with ASTM C631 shall be obtained from a
manufacturer approved by the CLIENT.

2.1.8 Additives
Additives for use in in-situ finishing shall only be used with the approval of the CLIENT

2.1.9

Beads and Stops
(i) Beads and stops for internal finishes shall be manufactured from tight coat galvanized
steel to BS 3989 Grade Z2, coating Type "C", profiled to suit the depth of plaster or
render to be applied.
(ii) All external angles to rendered finishing shall have external angle beads to ensure a
true straight arris. Rendered finishing brought up to door frames, window frames and
the like shall have architrave beads and where finishing end but do not about other
materials stop beads shall be used.

2.1.10 Sealing Compounds
Sealing compounds for screeds finished with carpet at prayer hall shall be PVA acrylic and other
polymer base "Anti-Dust" treatment from a manufacturer approved by the CLIENT.

2.1.11 Levelling Compounds
Levelling compound for screeds which are to receive floor coverings shall be in powder form and
capable of application by addition of water to smooth out surface irregularities and set hard in
hour and allow the final covering to be laid after 8 hours from a manufacturer approved by the
CLIENT .

2.1.12 Welded-Fabric Mesh for Reinforced Rendering
Reinforcement for rendering shall consist of galvanised welded-fabric mesh (for internal walls) and
stainless steel (for external walls) with 10 to 15 mm hexagonal mesh having wires not less than
2.5 mm diameter.

2.1.13 Nails, Screws and Washers
(i) Nails, screws and washers shall be galvanised steel for internal and stainless steel for
external. Pins for shotfiring shall be of steel with a tight coating of cadmium or zinc to
comply with BS 1706.
(ii) Clout nails shall comply with BS 1494, part 2.

2.1.14 Stainless steel dividing Strip
Stainless steel dividing strips shall be provided for long walls.

2.1.15 Movement Joint Filler and Sealant
(i) Movement joint filler shall be approved impregnated fibreboard or cellular polyethylene
which is compatible with the sealant being used and which does not give up bituminous
or oily products.











(ii) Sealants shall be two-part polysulphide type as recommended by the manufacturer for the
situation in which they will be used. Butyl mastics and other forms of mastics shall not be
used without specific approval by the CLIENT .

2.1.16 Surface Hardener, etc.
(i)



(ii)
Where specified the cement and sand screeds shall be treated with sodium silicate based
surface hardener manufactured by and applied in accordance with the printed instructions
of an approved manufacturer.
Power floated concrete slabs shall be treated with dust-proofer manufactured by and
applied in accordance with the printed instructions of an approved manufacturer.

2.1.17 Adhesives
(i)
(ii)

(iii)
Adhesives for fixing ceramic wall tiles shall comply with B.S. 5980, Class A.
Adhesives used for fixing carpet shall be waterproof, peel-up type recommended for the
purpose by the carpet manufacturer.
Adhesives used for fixing flexible PVC, thermoplastic or similar material in sheet or tile
form shall be recommended for the purpose by the manufacturer.

2.2 WALL FINISHINGS AND FINISHES

2.2.1 Plastering and Rendering

(a) General

(i) The requirements for sand for finishing coats shall comply with the following:
_______________________________________________________________
BS Sieve Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve
______mm ___________________ %_______________________________

2.36
1.18
600
300
150

100
90 - 100 55 -
100
5 - 50 0 - 10

(ii) The requirements for sand for undercoats and screeds shall comply with the following:
____________________________________________________________________
BS Sieve Percentage by mass passing BS Sieve
_____________________________________________________________________
mm
5.00
2.36
1.18
600
300
150
%
100
90 - 100 70 - 100
40 - 80 5 - 40 0
- 10








(b) Thickness of Plaster and Rendering

(i) The methods of measuring and mixing plaster shall be as laid down under Section E, Concrete
Work and the proportion and minimum thickness of finished plasterwork and rendering shall be in
accordance with the following:
__________________________________________________________________
Plaster or Rendering Mix Minimum Thickness
__________________________________________________________________

Cement, lime, sand
plaster internally


Cement and sand
rendering finish

part cement,
1/4 part lime,
4 parts sand

1 part cement,
4 parts sand with thickness

Two coats, total finished thickness
15 mm, to walls and ceilings.
Wood or steel float finish.

Render coat, 15 mm finished
internally and externally approved plasticiser
___________________________________________________________________

(c) Types of Finish

(i)



(ii)




(iii)




(iv)



(v)



(vi)




(vii)

Smooth finish
Finished with a steel laying trowel to an even surface.

Plain finish
Finished with a dry wood float as soon as wet sheen has disappeared from surface to give an over
all even texture.

Rough textured finish
Finished with a coat or carpet float to give a rough and even open texture finish.


Scraped finish
Finished with laying trowel to uniform thickness and after coat has set but before it is too hard,
aggregate exposed by scraping surface of skin to approved texture.
Harling finish
Thrown on while wet with trowel or scooped to an even texture and left to cast.

Dry dash finish
Top coat of render finished to uniform thickness; while coating plastic aggregate is thrown on to
cover surface.

Sprayed finish
The sprayed finish shall be applied by an approved machine to give an even texture and finish.
Sprayed finish shall not be applied until all repairs and making good to the undercoat are
completed.








(d)




(e)


Curing of Plaster
Each coat of plaster or rendering work is to be maintained in a moist condition for at least three
days after it has developed enough strength not to be damaged by water.

Acceptance and Repairs
Plaster with cracks, blisters, trowel marks, discoloration or sand marks will not be accepted and shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense. If plaster is damaged by related work, such as window and door
framing etc. then all damaged parts shall be repaired to match existing plaster in texture and colour at the
Contractor's expense.



















































3. EXECUTION

3.1


3.2

(i)


(ii)



(iii)





(iv)



(v)


3.3

(i)




(ii)


(iii)


(iv)


(v)

Workmanship
Comply-with requirements of BS -8000 Part 10, which are relevant to this Section.

Mixing and Use

Except where hand-mixing of small batches is approved by the CLIENT , mechanical mixers of an
approved type shall be used for mixing.

Hand mixing plaster and rendering shall be first mixed in the dry state, being turned over at least
three times. The required amount of water should then be added and the mix turned over until
such time as the mass is uniform in colour and homogeneous.

Mechanical mixers, mixing boxes and tools shall be cleaned after mixing each batch and kept free
of material from previous mixes. All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all times be
kept scrupulously clean and strict precautions shall be taken to avoid materials becoming
contaminated by pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the
setting time. The plaster shall be completely used within thirty minutes of mixing and hardened.

Plaster Re-tempering will not be permitted and all render or screed which has begun to stiffen
shall be discarded. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be remixed but removed from the
site.

Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original packages, containers or bundles bearing
manufacturer's name and brand and shall be stored in dry and well ventilated enclosure.

Preparation of Surfaces for Plaster, etc.

Irregularities in the surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be filled with mortar, without lime,
twenty-four hours before plastering is commenced. Joints in blockwork, etc., are to be well raked
out before plastering to form a good key. Smooth concrete surfaces to be plastered shall be
treated with an approved propriety bonding agent.

All surfaces to be plastered or rendered shall be clean and free from dust, loose mortar and all
traces of salt and adequately true and level to achieve specified tolerances.

All surfaces shall be thoroughly sprayed with water 5 to 10 minutes before plaster/render is
applied and all free water allowed to disappear before plaster is applied.

As far as practical, plastering shall not be commenced until all mechanical and electrical services,
conduits, pipes and fixtures have been installed.

Before plastering is commenced all junctions between differing materials shall be reinforced. This
shall apply where walls columns and beams, particularly where flush, and similar situations where
cracks are likely to develop and as directed by the CLIENT . The reinforcement shall consist of a
strip of galvanised wire mesh for internal walls and stainless steel for external walls (10 to 15 mm
hexagonal mesh) 450 mm wide which shall be plugged, nailed or stapled as required at intervals
not exceeding 450 mm at both edges. External angles shall be formed with stainless steel angle
beads fixed with plaster dabs at not more than 450 mm centres.









(vi)


(vii)

3.4

(i)



(ii)





(iii)



(iv)



(v)




(vi)


(vii)


(viii)


(ix)


(x)



(xi)

A wall sample should be prepared by the Contractor prior to the commencement of the plaster
works and shall be removed at the Contractor's cost when he is instructed to do so.

Dubbing out on smooth dense concrete surfaces is not permitted.

Application of Plaster and Render

After preparation of the surfaces a key coat of cement slurry spatter dash of cement and sand
which shall contain 500 kgs of cement per one cubic meter of sand shall be applied to the wetted
surface to be plastered.

The Contractor shall form vertical guide screeds 50 mm wide on walls. The screeds shall be
plumb and shall all be in the same plane. The sides of the screed shall be left rough to bond with
plaster. The finished surface shall be true to shape and angle, even in all directions, with straight
arrises free from cracks and trowel marks and to the entire satisfaction of the CLIENT.

Render shall not be applied by means of trowel between stops, laid, ruled and plumbed as
necessary within 24 hours of the spatter coat application, if used.

Render shall be floated to a true, even surface. If the surface is to be a smoothly finish then it shall
be further trowelled in a manner which forces the sand particles down into the render.

All render surfaces shall be free from rough areas, trowel marks, checks or other blemishes. Work
shall be executed in a neat workmanlike manner and internal and external angles shall be true,
straight and plump.

Render shall be made good to adjacent finishes, frames, skirting, etc. and around pipes sleeves
and other fittings.

Render shall be worked into expanded metal lathing, where used and into beads to form a neat
edge or arris.

The under coat shall not be applied before the elapse of 24 hours on the application of the spatter
dash coat to ensure complete setting.

The under coat shall be lightly scratched in both directions to provide key for the finishing coat and
shall be kept moist with a spray for two days and then allowed to dry out.

Undercoats shall be applied firmly to achieve good adhesion, and in one continuous operation
between angles and joints. Rule to an even surface and cross scratch to provide a key for the
finish coat.

The finishing coat shall not be applied until the rendering or base coat has seasoned for 7 days
and is firmly bounded to the back ground and has developed reasonable suction. The finishing
coat, rendering coat or base coat shall be wetted evenly with a fog spray. Where cement plaster
with a smooth troweled finish is specified or indicated on the drawings, the finish coat shall be first
floated to a true even surface, then troweled in a manner that will force the sane particles down
into the plaster and with the final troweling, leave the surface finished smooth and free from rough
areas, trowel marks, checks or other blemishes.







(xii)


(xiv)



(xv)




(xvi)

















3.5

Cement plaster in all other spaces, where a smooth finish is not specified or noted on the
drawings, shall be given a sand float finish of a uniform texture, as approved by the CLIENT.

All tools, implements, vessels and surfaces shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean and strict
precautions shall be taken to prevent the plaster or other materials from being contaminated by
pieces of partially set material which would tend to retard or accelerate the setting time.

Where wall or ceiling plaster is to stop with a clean edge to a line, the edge shall be formed by
means of a timber batten wedge in position to act as a screed stop and the batten to be carefully
removed leaving a square straight line at the edge of the plaster. Alternatively, proprietary plaster
stops may be used.

Plastering work shall not be carried out when the shade temperature exceeds 43
o
C. The
Contractor is responsible for preventing excessively rapid or localised drying out.

Co-ordination

3.5.1


3.5.2

Prior to commencing installation, check that all architectural, mechanical and
electrical work is complete and that work area is free from excessive moisture.

Coordinate work of this Section with architectural, mechanical and electrical trades.
Incorporate in plaster work, items provided by other Sections as required (i.e. access
panels, back boxes, conduits, grills, diffusers, lights, etc.).

3.6 Installation of Plaster Stop & Control Joints

3.6.1






3.6.2



3.6.3

Install stainless steel plaster stops at external walls and galvanized steel plaster
stops at internal walls, using square nosed beads in the following locations:
a. Junction of plaster and other materials.
b. At corners, where plaster abuts surfaces not concealed by trim. c.
Where detailed.

Casing beads shall be in one length up to 3000 mm and no lengths shall be less
than 1800 mm. Mitre and fit corners and butt accurately and free from rough edges.
Secure beads at 300 mm o.c. maximum.

At control joint locations, install back-to-back square nosed casing beads.

3.7 Installation of Corner Beads

3.7.1



3.7.2


Install stainless steel corner beads for external walls and galvanized steel corner
beads for internal walls to all horizontal and vertical angles of plaster. Size to be
coordinated with site condition.

Corner beads shall be in one length up to 3000 mm and no lengths shall be less than
1800 mm. Mitre and fit corners and butts accurately and free from rough edges.
Secure beads at 300 mm o.c. maximum. Provide corner bead extension slips where
required.











3.8 Installation of Regular Plaster

3.8.1

3.8.2





3.8.3



3.8.4

3.8.5




3.8.6

3.8.7


3.8.8




3.8.9



3.8.10



3.8.11


3.8.12


Plastering shall be done in accordance with the referenced BS Standards.

Do not commence work in areas where the building is not 'closed in' and where
temperatures are not within the plaster manufacturer's acceptable temperature
range, or where conditions prevent proper curing and spotty or too fast hydration.
Use deflectors or protective screens to prevent concentrated or irregular drafts, or
wind or heat on plaster.

Mixing shall be done in a motorized mechanical mixer of type approved by material
manufacturer. Mix each batch separately. Clean out mixer between batches. Mix no
more material than can be used in one hour. Accurately measure all ingredients.

Discard partly set, caked or lumpy material.

Plaster work shall be straight, true, flush with grounds or screeds and shall result in a
surface free from defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Dots and bands
shall be used to produce plaster surfaces level and time. Dots shall be also at
intersection of ceiling with walls and corners.

Provide adequate controlled ventilation during application and drying of plaster.

Damp-cure cement plaster for three days minimum. Bonding rush coat (spatter-dash)
shall be sprayed with water as often as required for a period of five (5) days.

Make corners, angles and intersections sharp and neat, except where otherwise
indicated on Drawings. Apply finish coat from angle or corner to corner, in one
operation. Make finish coat smooth, free of tool marks, dense and free of sandpaper
appearance to accept paint or specified wall covering.

Where plaster abuts against any metal item which is set in the plaster and is flush
with the finished plaster surface, provide raked 'vee' joint at junction, or finish as
directed by CLIENT .

Machine plastering will be permitted only if authorized in writing by CLIENT . If
permission is given, provide and install all necessary masking material for covering
adjacent surfaces.

Plaster shall only be stopped at corner beads or plaster stops or at an induced
groove.

Plaster on walls shall be done up to 100 mm above the false ceiling level.

3.9 Cutting, Patching and Repairing

3.9.1

Do all patching required around base, frames, built-in fitments, trim, around switch
plates and outlets and wherever damage is caused to surfaces during installation of
finishing mechanical and electrical equipment. The patching shall be neatly done to
match the adjoining work in texture and finish, and the whole work left in first class
condition for painting or wall covering.







3.9.2



3.9.3



3.10 Cleaning


3.10.1


3.10.2

Cut out and repair all damaged plaster and all fine cracks, pits, checks, waves,
blisters and other defects which, in the opinion of CLIENT , will impair the
appearance and the life and usefulness of the finished surfaces.

All such patching and repair work shall be done at no additional cost to the Contract.







Clean plaster completely of dust, dirt and other contaminates before Work under this
section is finally accepted

Upon completion of work, remove debris resulting from Work of this section and
leave areas neat and clean.




- END OF SECTION -








































DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 30 13 CERAMIC TILES


1 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1 Supply and installation of ceramic walls, floors, skirting, etc. at locations shown
on the drawings and schedules.

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1



1.2.2




1.2.3



1.2.4

Installer's Qualifications: Engaged in the installation of ceramic tile systems,
work, and who has proven experience of at least five (5) years experience in this
type of work as specified in this section of the specifications.
Mockup: At locations in the project where designated by CLIENT, install
mockups
of each type of wall and floor material, complete, fully grouted, for CLIENT'S
approval. Modify mockup as necessary to obtain approval. Approved mockup
may remain as part of the completed work.
Environmental Conditions: Do not perform work when temperature and
humidity in the work area is likely to exceed the application and curing ranges of
the mortars and adhesives.
Performance of adhesion test on site to recommended International Standard.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Samples:

a.


b.



c.


d.

Shop Drawings: Shop drawings showing floor patterns, wall designs,
border tiles, etc. shall be submitted to CLIENT for approval.
Ceramic Tiles: Submit three 600 mm x 600 mm samples of each material,
special pieces, colour and finish, mounted on tempered hardboard,
grouted to approve colors.
Grout: Submit samples of grout colors for approval. Actual cured grout
must be submitted, pictures and colour charts not acceptable.
Re-submit samples until approved. When approved, the samples will
serve as the standard for subsequent work.

1.3.2



1 .3 .3



1 .3 .4

Test Reports: Material test report from qualified testing laboratory indicating test
results relative to compliance of tile, tile setting and grouting products with
requirements and BS.

Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of maintenance manuals for
inclusion in the data book at the completion of works. Give specific warning of
any maintenance practice or materials which may damage the finished work.

Certificate: Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that installed work is in
accordance with the requirements of this Section and own printed instruction.










1.4 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

1.4.1 Handle, deliver and store tiles adhesive, and cemenitious materials in manner to
ensure no discoloration and damages occur.


2 PRODUCTS

2 .1




2.2

General

The design and installation shall be in accordance with BS 5385 Part 1, 2 and 3. No
Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) are used within the development.

Material

For location of each type refer to the Finishes Schedule.
2.2.1


2.2.2


2.2.3
Ceramic tiles, size as indicated in the Drawings, and to CLIENT approval
including
cushion edge, corner pieces, and corner pieces and skirting (base).
Colour and type of Ceramic tiles to be selected by CLIENT from manufacturer's
standard range.

Technical Specifications:



Water absorption


Thickness

Straightness
Length and Width

Modulus of Rupture


Scratch Resistance

Frost Resistance

Abrasion Resistance

Chemical Resistance

Category

BS standard
BS 6431 Part 11
3% < 6%

BS 6431 Part 10
5%
0.5%
0.6%

BS 6431 Part 12
> 22 N/mm2

BS 6431 Part 13
5 Mohs
BS 6431 Part 22
Resistant
BS 6431 Part 14
As specified
BS 6431 Part 18
Not affected

2.2.4
2.2.5



2.2.6

Cement: To BS 1200: Non-staining Portland cement, Class 42.5 to BS12.
Sand: to BS 1200: fine granular material composed of hard, strong, durable
mineral particles which shall be free from injurious amounts of saline, alkaline,
organic or other deleterious substances, and passing a 1.25 mm mesh.
Water: Free from salt and other deleterious foreign matter.






2.2.7 Latex Portland cement Mortar: Modified Portland cements mortar and
polymers to BS 5385.
2.2.8 Colour Pigments: Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, none staining.
2.2.9 Adhesive for Tiles
a. Mortar adhesive with latex additive, thin set mortar as recommended by
the Tile Manufacturer.
b. In exterior type areas subject to humidity and moisture - waterproof mortar
to BS 5980 Type 1 Class A.
2.2.10 Grout: Latex Portland cemenitious waterproof grout with colour additive to
CLIENT'S colour selection.
2.2.11 Sealer: Apply protective finish clear sealer coat.
2.2.12 Sealants for /Control Joints: As recommended by the tile manufacturer.

2.3 Adhesive

2.3.1 Shall comply with the requirements of BS No. 5380.
2.3.2 Shall be styrene butadiene rubber.


2.4 Extra Stock
Prior to issuance of completion certificate, deliver to the job site for storage as directed by
CLIENT, extra stock equal to 5% of each colour and component of all ceramic tile materials
used on the project.


3 EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection and Preparation

3.1.1 Before commencing erection, examine the base work to which the tile work
applied.
3.1.2 Report immediately in writing to CLIENT all discrepancies in accuracy and suitability
in the location, bearing and retaining of structural members which will adversely
affect the installation and permanency of the work of this Section.
3.1.3 Preparation of Walls: Where concrete block walls and concrete walls are to be
finished with tile, apply a leveling coat of cement mortar minimum 12 mm thick,
sufficient to cover the unevenness of the substrate and to make walls true
vertical. Trowel mortar smooth to leave a surface suitable for use of adhesive.


3.1.4 Preparation of Floors: Cast-in-place concrete substrates shall be sufficiently
smooth and level such that when thin-set mortar to accept tiles is applied, no
voids under the tiles occur. Grind off high spots and fill-in low spots as necessary
to ensure no voids occur.


3.1.5 Floor Water Proofing Application: Refer to Section 07 10 00
- All toilets and pantry to receive water proofing.
- Waterproofing system shall be laid with brush or roller in two coats, at total






rate of 1.5 kg/ sq.m to achieve aprox. 1.5 mm thick, on all horizontal
surfaces (at least 250 mm high on all vertical surfaces) and allowed to
cure, and covered with a minimum 30 mm thick cement screed applied
onto a 100 microns polyethylene foil before tiling.
- Testing shall be before and after the installation of tiles.

3.1.6 Commencement of installation shall indicate acceptance of the work of other
Section, upon which the work of this Section depends.

3.2 Installation - General

3.2.1
3.2.2


3.2.3
3.2.4


3.2.5

Comply with the requirements of BS 5385 - wall and floor tile.
Check that there are no unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for use
in each area. Thoroughly mix variegated tiles.
Check that adhesive is compatible with background/base.
Unless specified otherwise fix tiles so that there is adhesion over the whole of the
background/base and tile backs.
Before bedding material sets make adjustments necessary to give true, regular
appearance to tiles and joints when viewed under final lighting conditions.

3.3 Setting Out

3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4


3.3.5



3.3.6

Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps.
Joints on walls to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment
Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
Before laying tiles obtain approval of setting out by CLIENT. Provide symmetry
about
center lines of the space or areas and adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Lay out tile work so that tiles less than 1/2 full size do not occur and with
minimum of cutting. Carefully grind edges of cut tile. Ensure cut tiles are in
corners and are equal on each wall face.
Joint widths:
a. For ceramic tiles of all sizes: 2 mm.
b. The joint width shall be determined according to manufacturer's
recommendation and the material used for grouting.

3.4 Installation

3.4.1

Tiles

a.




b.


c.



Mix bedding materials thoroughly to a uniform consistence in a suitable
forced action mechanical mixer. Do not use a free fall type (tilting drum)
mixer. Use the minimum amount of water necessary to give required
workability.
Use mortar within two hours of mixing at normal temperatures. Do not use
after the initial set has taken place and do not re temperature.
Tile Skirting: Bed solid to wall (before laying floor tiles for skirting).
Ensure joints in skirting match and align with joints in floor tiling.






d.





e.







f.





g.



Thin Bed Adhesive-Walls: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry
background in areas of approximately 1 M
2
and comb the surface with the
recommended solid bed trowel. Apply thin even coat of adhesive to backs
of dry tiles. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to give
finished bed thickness of not more than 3 mm.
Thick Bed Adhesive-Walls: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry
background and comb the surface with the recommended solid bed
trowel. Fill any keys and apply thin even coat of adhesive over the entire
back of each tile. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to
give finished bed thickness within the range recommended by the
manufacturer.


Thick Bed Adhesive - Floors: Apply floated coat of adhesive to dry base
and comb the surface with the recommended solid bed trowel. Fill any
keys and apply thin even coat of adhesive over the entire back of each
tile. Press tiles onto bedding with twisting/sliding action to give finished
bed thickness within the range recommended by the manufacturer.
Water proof adhesive: Apply water proof adhesive with a notched trowel,
the thickness of bed must not be less than 2mm for walls and 3mm for
floors. Spread about 1metre at a time. Tiles must be set in place while the
adhesive is still wet on the surface. Press tiles firmly into the adhesive
using a slight twisting motion.
Tile floors shall finish flush with the gratings, strainers and drains.


3.4.2 Grouting

a.
b.


c.


d.
e.



f.

Allow bedding material to harden sufficiently before grouting.
Ensure that joints are 6 mm deep (or the depth of the tile if less), and are
free from dust and debris.
Force grout and fill joints completely to entire depth, tool to an approved
profile, clean off surface and leave free from blemishes.
Polish wall tiling with a dry cloth when joints are hard.
Colored Grout: Check the potential risk of staining by applying the grout
to a few tiles in a small trial area. If discoloration occurs apply a protective
sealer to the tiles and repeat the trial.
Control Joints: Provide Control Joints 6mm minimum width in large tile
areas at a maximum of 4.5m in each direction and at the perimeter walls.
Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

3.5

Cleaning

3.5.1
3.5.2



3.5.3



Keep installed work clean as work progresses.
After grouting and pointing, clean tile with stiff fiber brushes and water in
accordance with the Marble Institute of America written recommendations. The
use of wire brushes or acids shall not be permitted. Flush down at completion.
Clean and make good to the approval of CLIENT, surfaces soiled or otherwise
damaged in connection with the work of this Section. Pay the cost of replacing











3.5.4

3.5.5


3.5.6

finishes or materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned or which has been
damaged by improper cleaning materials and techniques.
Remove mortar and alkali wash-offs on surfaces as work progresses.
Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all debris, equipment and
excess material resulting from the work of this Section from the site.
Close grouted tile floors to traffic for 24 hours after installation.


3.6 Finishing

3.6.1 Apply two coats of sealer finish to flooring. Follow sealer finish manufacturer's
printed instructions.




END OF SECTION














































DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 30 33 STONE TILING


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
Fabrication supply and installation of cut stones at locations shown on the
Drawings and Schedules.
Coordination with the work of Division 03, 06, 08 & 09.


1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1 Installer's Qualifications:
a.


b.


c.
Regularly engaged in the installation of dimension stone flooring systems,
and able to demonstrate at least 10 years of successful experience.
Able to demonstrate satisfactorily completed work of minimum size as this
project.
Familiar with the requirements of the Marble Institute of America and their
publication, Design Manual IV.
1.2.2




1.2.3
Mockups: At locations in the building where designated by CLIENT, install
mockups of each type of floor and Wall material, complete, fully grouted, for
CLIENT'S approval. Modify mockups as necessary to obtain approval. Approved
mockups may remain as part of the completed work.
Environmental Conditions: Do not perform work when temperature in the work
area is likely to exceed the application and curing ranges recommended by the
manufacturers of the mortars and adhesives. Observe recommended working
temperatures of additives and bonding agents.

1.3 Design Requirements

1.3.1

Engineering for the work of this section shall be the responsibility of the
Fabricator and shall be carried out by a professional engineer meeting the
requirements stated in General conditions of the Contract, Product Data &
Samples. Submittals, who is experienced with the engineering of Dimension
Stone veneer cladding systems and with BS 8298. Code of Practice for Design
and Installation of Natural Stone Cladding.











1.3.2 Have fabrication & installation of work inspected and certified approved by the
professional engineer.
1.4 Submittals


1.4.1



1.4.2

Samples: Provide samples as specified in Section 01 33 00: Shop Drawings,
Product Data & Samples. Resubmit samples as many times as may be required to
obtain approval. Appearance of installed work shall match approved samples.
Shop Drawings: Provide as specified in General conditions of the contract: Shop
Drawings, Product Data & Samples. Show among other items and in as large a
scale as possible, the following:
I.


II.
III.


IV.
V.
VI.


VII.
VIII.


IX.
Complete details of the wall fixation system and flooring system including
patterns, etc.;
Dimensions of each unit, including holes and irregularities;
Thickness and finishes of each unit, shown in cutting, fitting, sinking, back
checking;
Jointing methods and clearances;
Complete connection and insert details.
Locations and provision for expansion and contraction, and building
movement;
Identifying marks for each unit;
Special precautions to be taken by other trades affecting the work of this
Section;
Locations of hardware, service outlets, access panels, fixtures, fittings,
and similar appurtenances.
1.4.3


1.4.4
Certifications: Submit certificate that the completed installations are in
accordance with the specifications.
Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of maintenance manuals for inclusion in
the final project dossier. Give specific warning of any maintenance practice or
materials which may damage or disfigure the finished work.





















2. PRODUCTS

2 .1 Materials

2.1.1


2.1.2
2.1.3




2.1.4
2.1.5


2.1.6
2.1.7

The type and minimum thickness of stone units shall be as shown on the drawing
and subject to CLIENT approval.
Cement: To BS 12 Class 42.5, non-staining Portland cement, color-grey.
Sand: To BS 1119 Table 1 for walls and to BS 882 Table 5 for floors, fine
granular material composed of hard, strong, durable mineral particles, which
shall be free from injurious amounts of saline, alkaline, organic or other
deleterious substances, and passing a 1.25 mm mesh.
Water: Free from salt and other deleterious foreign matter.
Latex Portland cement Mortar: modified Portland cement mortar and polymers
to BS 5385.
Colour Pigments: Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, non-staining.
No Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) are used within the development.



2.2





2.2.1


2.2.2


2.2.3




2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6



Fabrication - General

Do not start fabrication until shop and erection drawings have been reviewed,
and samples have been approved.
In so far as practical, execute fitting and assembly in the shop, with the various
parts or assemblies ready for erection at the building site.
Take field measurements and levels required to verify or supplement those
shown on the Drawings for the proper layout and installation of the work. Co-
ordinate dimensional tolerances in adjacent building elements, and confirm prior to
the commencement of the work.
Fabricate members to profiles shown on the Drawings.
Provide expansion and contraction joints as necessary.
Accurately fit together all joints, corners and mitres. Match components carefully
to produce perfect continuity of line and design. Reinforce corners as required
with solid stone pieces epoxide in place.























3. EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection and Preparation

3.1.1


3.1.2



3.1.3


3.1.4




3.1.5

Before commencing erection, examine the work of other Sections which will be
affected by this work.
Report immediately in writing to CLIENT all discrepancies in accuracy and suitability
in
the location, bearing and retaining of structural members, which will adversely affect
the installation and permanency of the work of this Section.
Ensure that openings and recesses to receive the work of this Section are within
acceptable tolerances. Remove dust and other loose material from openings.
Preparation of Floors: Cast-in-place concrete substrates shall be sufficiently smooth
and level, such that when thin-set mortar to accept stone is applied, no voids under
the stone occur. Grind-off high spots and fill-in low spots as necessary to ensure no
voids occur.
Commencement of Wall installation (Dry Fixing) shall indicate acceptance of the
work of other Sections upon which the work of this Section depends on fixing.
3.2 Installation - General

3 .2 .1


3 .2 .2





3 .2 .3



3 .2 .4


3 .2 .5


3 .2 .6


3 .2 .7

Comply with the requirements of BS 5385, Part 5: 1990 - Code of Practice for
Design and Installation of Material Stone Flooring.
Distribute units of ranging colour or texture evenly over the entire installation to
avoid patches or streaks, and produce a homogeneous blending of all units. If a
noticeable pattern or grain direction is apparent due to natural appearance of
stone or finishing, install units in accordance with CLIENT's instruction and
selection.
Clean stones thoroughly on all exposed surfaces by steam-cleaning or by
washing, followed by a thorough drenching with clear water before being set in
the work.
Sponge or drench with clean water just prior to setting in mortar, all stones not
thoroughly wet.
Set stone work level, plumb, square and true with uniform joints. Chipped,
broken or blemished units shall be rejected.
Avoid splashing mortar on exposed faces of stone. Remove droppings
immediately by means of sponge and clean water.
The alignment face for stone shall be the exposed face.


3.3 Setting Out
3.3.1 Joints to be true to line, continuous and without steps.
3.3.2 Joints on walls to be truly horizontal, vertical and in alignment
3.3.3 Joints in walls and floors to be in alignment.
3.3.4 Before laying tiles obtain approval of setting out by CLIENT.











3.3.5



3.3.6


Provide symmetry about center lines of the space or areas and adjust to minimize tile
cutting.
Lay out tile work so that tiles less than 1/2 full size do not occur and with minimum of
cutting. Carefully grind edges of cut tile. Ensure cut tiles are in corners and are equal
on each wall face.
Joint widths:
a. The joint width shall be butt joints (zero joints).


3.4 Cleaning

3.4.1
3.4.2



3.5.3




3.5.4
3.5.5


3 .5 .6

Keep installed work clean as work progresses.
After grouting and pointing, clean stone with stiff nylon fibber brushes and water. The
use of steel wire brushes or acids is not permitted. Flush down with clean water at
completion.
Clean and make good to CLIENT'S approval, surfaces soiled or otherwise
damaged in connection with the work of this Section. Pay the cost of replacing
finishes or materials that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned or which have been
damaged by improper cleaning materials and techniques.
Remove concrete and alkali wash-offs on surfaces as work progresses.
Upon completion of the work of this Section, remove all debris, equipment and
excess material resulting from the work of this Section from the site.

Protect stone against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during construction period. Use Hyssam and Gypsum or other
protection methods recommended by stone manufacturer.


3.5



3.6


Finishing/Polishing

Apply waxing to flooring as directed by CLIENT.

Stone Schedule

Stone shall be installed at/in the locations as indicated on the drawings.



- END OF SECTION -

















DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS


1 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1

1.1.2




1.1.3

Compliance with sections of Volumes 1.

Supply and installation of suspended acoustical panel ceiling systems as specified
herein and as indicated on Drawings, complete with all related and necessary trims,
suspensions, exposed T-bar grid and accessories to complete the installation to
CLIENT approval.

All suspended ceiling systems comply with the requirements of BS EN 13964: 2004
section 4.5, in relation to asbestos (no asbestos) and formaldehyde content (which
must meet class E1 at a minimum and be tested, classified and appropriately
marked).

1.2 Work Under Other Sections

1.2.1 Coordinate with Division 15 - Mechanical.

1.2.2 Coordinate with Division 16 - Electrical.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1


1.3.2












1.3.3



General: Comply with requirements of Shop Drawings, Products Data and
Samples - Submittals.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for CLIENT approval. Clearly show type
and layouts of acoustical panels, hangers, weight of ceiling, weight per hanger
and hanger load deflection characteristics. Also show locations and installation of
lighting fixtures, locations and installation of mechanical diffusers and grilles and
other required mechanical items. Show each and every trim and accessory.
Omission of trims and accessories on shop drawings does not mean they do not
have to be supplied. In addition to details, the shop drawings shall show
complete reflected ceiling plans, fully worked out and dimensioned. Submissions
of copies of the Architects drawings will be rejected. Modify shop drawings as
necessary to obtain CLIENT approval. Delays caused by the Contractor's
noncompliance shall be at Contractor's expense.

Samples: Three (3) samples of each component, hangers, main and cross T-
bars, trims, anchors, tees of the acoustical system to CLIENT for approval.
Modify and resubmit samples as often as necessary to obtain CLIENT approval.
Do not order materials until the samples are approved. The samples shall fully
represent the materials to be applied in colour, texture, appearance and finish
and construction.










1.4 Quality Assurance

1.4.1

Mock-Up:

1.4.1.1





1.4.1.2

1.4.1.3



Construct a suspended acoustical tile ceiling mockup at location in the
building as designated by the CLIENT for approval prior to proceeding
with the complete installation. The mock-up shall include lighting
fixtures, mechanical grilles and diffusers and other items as directed by
CLIENT.

Only ceilings matching the approved mock-up shall be accepted.

The approved mock-up may remain as part of the completed work.

1.4.2 Anchor Tests:

1 .4 .2 .1 Test installed anchors, selected at random by CLIENT, with a 2225 N
force attached to the end of the hanger, swung through a 90 deg.
coned arc. If some anchors become dislodged, replace anchors with
type which passes the test.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Handling

1.5.1






1.5.2

All ceiling components to be in rigid crates to avoid damage. Wrappings shall
protect items from high humidity prevalent in the Emirates. Bent or deformed
material shall be rejected. Acoustical panels shall have package with each panel
separated from the other with non-marking paper. Baked enameled members
shall be suitably wrapped and protected against damage. Scratched and
discolored components shall be replaced with new approved components.

If materials are unwrapped to verify condition and found satisfactory, they shall be
immediately repackaged until time of installation.

1.6 Extra Materials

1.6.1


1.6.2


1.6.3

At completion, provide extra quantity of acoustical panel types equal to five (5)
percent of acoustical panel types installed.

At completion, provide CLIENT with at least 10 m of main T-bars and 15 m of
cross T-bars.

Extra materials shall be same production run as materials installed. Include cost
of extra materials in the Contract Price.





















2 PRODUCTS

2 .1 Ceiling Tiles Types Schedule:


2.1.1. Ceiling Type, 600 x 600mm Aluminium Tiles:

600 x 600mm size bevel edged clip-in plain tiles made of 1.2mm thick aluminium
prefinished with electrostatically polyester powder coating to a minimal thickness
of 60 microns.


2 .2 Suspension System

2.2.1


2.2.2



2.2.3






2.2.4

2.2.5

Wide panel ceiling type shall have 0.95 mm thick aluminum exposed T bar carrier
suspension system by using AA 5050 alloys.

Accessories such as splices, clips, connectors, wall brackets, trims, etc. to suit
the applicable conditions. Exposed surface shall have the same finish and colour
as the suspension system.

Anchors for Hangers shall be cast in place type or expansion type installed in
predrilled holes and of the type which obtains positive expansion when a screw
thread or nut is tightened. Neither drive-pin or similar type nor powder actuated
fasteners are to be used on this work.
Anchors shall be at a maximum distance of 1.2 m center to center in the two
directions and 200 mm from perimeter roalls.

Hangers shall be 4mm diameter galvanized steel rod with adjustable springs.

Colour of the finish shall be as selected by CLIENT.































3 EXECUTION

3 .1 Coordination

3 .1 .1 Prior to commencing installation, check that all overhead architectural,
mechanical and electrical work is complete and that work area is free from
excessive moisture.


3 .2 Installation - General

3.2.1





3 .2 .2

Unless otherwise specified, install ceiling tiles and suspension systems in
accordance with all local codes, the manufacturer's printed directions and to
approved layouts. Where the manufacturer's directions are at variance with the
Drawings, consult with CLIENT before proceeding with the work.


Start installation only after glazing has been completed and exterior openings are
closed in. Allow wet work to dry out before installation is commenced.

3 .3 Installation - Suspension System

3.3.1



3.3.2




3.3.3


3.3.4




3.3.5



3.3.6

Erect work rigid, square, level and plumb and to maintain the finish dimensions
and contours indicated or directed. Make allowance for thermal movement.
Maximum deflection permitted is L/360 of the span of each main Tee.

Suspend ceilings from above with hangers, independent of walls, columns, ducts
and pipes. Space hangers max. 1200 mm each way except at lighting fixtures
where hangers shall be located at each corner of every fixture. Locate starting
hangers at not more than 150 mm from ends of main runners.

Securely fasten hangers to underside of concrete slabs using. approved
expansion bolts or galvanized cast-in-place anchors.

Where presence of mechanical ductwork prevents installation of supports for
main runners directly from structure, in accordance with sentence 3.3.2 above,
provide supplementary framing to achieve equivalent support of ceiling runners.
See Section 05 50 00: Metal Fabrication.

Hangers shall provide rigidity to the system sufficient to accommodate
reasonable pressure of partition system from below. Provide cross bracing
between ceiling suspension system and structure.

Install exposed grid members to patterns shown on Drawings.









3.3.7



3.3.8




3.3.9



3.3.10


3.3.11


Securely attach spring clips and Tee-bars to hangers. Use longest practical
length of tee-bar. Keep joints to a minimum and well distributed. Lock joint cross
tees to main tees.

Provide metal edge moulding where ceiling abuts vertical surfaces, as on
manufacturer's standard drawings. Lap miter moulding at internal and external
corners. Perform metal edge moulding to the various radii where ceiling abuts
curved vertical surfaces.

Where ceilings tiles abut independently supported ceilings of other construction,
cooperate and provide supplementary framing such that the ceiling tile system
provides its own lateral support.

Where ceilings tiles systems abut other ceilings or elements install work within
tolerances provided for such interfaces.

Cooperate with the Mechanical Division and Electrical Division for the framing
around diffusers and fixtures.



3 .4 Installation - Ceiling Tile Panels

3.4.1






3.4.2


3.4.3

Install ceiling tile panels to form a flush horizontal and level ceiling and in true
lines and to the pattern shown on the Drawings. Fit border units against
perimeter moulding and trims.

The system shall be with a demountable area to give access to service
installation.

Restrict creep to inside modular tile panels so that in all cases strips are centered
on pattern lines, with tolerance of plus or minus 0.8 mm.

Cooperate as necessary in making adjustments to ensure that the lighting fixtures
and diffusers fit properly into the ceiling pattern and that the units finish flush with
the rest of the ceiling.


3 .5 Completion

3.5.1 After installation of light fixtures, diffusers, etc., check ceiling and make good
ceiling deficiencies prior to inspection for issuance of Completion Certificate.




END OF SECTION
















DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 66 16 TERRAZZO FLOOR TILE


1 GENERAL


1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1 Supply and installation of Terrazzo tiles at locations shown on the drawing.

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1


1.2.2




1.2.3

Installers Qualifications: Engaged in the installation of tile works and who has
proven experience of at least five (5) years in this field.
Mock up: At location where designated by CLIENT, install mock up of Terrazzo
floor including grouting for CLIENT's approval. Modify mock ups as necessary to
obtain approval. Retain the mock up area until completion of work. Approved
mock up shall serve as a standard for similar work.
Environmental Conditions: Do not perform work when temperature and
humidity in the work area is likely to exceed the application and curing ranges of
mortars.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1


1.3.2


1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5

General: Comply with the requirements specified in : Shop Drawings, Product
Data & Samples for submittals.
Manufacturer's Product Data: Submit a complete set of data for materials and
fabrication of tiles and catalogues showing various types and colours of tiles.
Submit 3 nos. of samples of each type of tiles as selected by CLIENT.
Submit samples of grout colours for approval.
Resubmit samples until approval by CLIENT is obtained. When approved, the
samples will serve as the quality of materials for the subsequent work.

1.4 Product Delivery, Storage And Hadling

1.4.1 Handle, deliver and store tiles and cementitious materials in a manner to ensure
no discolourations and damages occur.
Tiles should always be stacked face to face.


2 PRODUCTS


2.1 Colour Pigments: Pure mineral pigment, lime-proof, non staining as approved by CLIENT.
2.2 Adhesive for Tiles:
2.2.1 Mortar adhesive with latex additive, thin set mortar or as recommended by the
tile manufacturer.






2 .2 .2 In exterior type areas subject to humidity and moisture-waterproof mortar or as
BS 5980 Type 1 class A.
2.3 Grout: Latex Portland cementitious grout with color additive to CLIENT colour selection
2 .4 Sealer: To floor tile apply protective finish clear sealer coat.
2 .5 Sealants for Control / Joints: Polyurethane Joint Sealant
2 .6 Thresholds: Marble threshold to match floor as per drawing.


3 MATERIAL
3.1




3.2
3.3




3.4
The finish layer or facing layer of the tiles shall be composed of marble chips, marble
powder and white or coloured cement. Marble chips applied as a facing shall be selected to
avoid off colour or contaminated materials and shall be crushed by a process that largely
eliminates flat or silver like chips and accurately graded by size.
Wide irregular joints between marble chips shall be filled with terrazzo matrix.
Cross sections of tiles shall not show any separation between layers. Top surface shall be
smooth level, free from projections and depressions, with opposite edges parallel
homogeneously coloured and free of ducks, hair cracking, flaking and efflorescent. Ground,
grouted and reground to a fine grit finish aggregates shall be evenly distributed.
Size of terrazzo tiles shall be as shown on the drawings.


4 EXECUTION

4.1 Inspection and Preparation

4.1.1


4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4

Before commencing installation, examine the concrete floor and see that the
substrates are sufficiently smooth and level.
Concrete floor shall be free from dust, loose materials, grease, oil and the like.
Soak the floor sufficiently before the installation of tiles.
Commencement of installation shall indicate acceptance of the work of other
section, upon which the work of this section depends.

4.2 Installation

4.2.1


4.2.2

4.2.3



4.2.4


4.2.5




Check that there are no unintended colour/shade variations within the tiles for
use in each area.

Before laying, the tiles shall be thoroughly soaked in clean water and drained.

Tiles shall be laid on cement and sand mortar (1:4) bed and lightly tapped with a
hammer to ensure solid bedding and to prevent the formation of air pockets.
Mortar shall be spread at proper thickness of not more than 20 mm.

Only enough mortar shall be mixed and spread at one time as can be covered
with tiles before the mortar has attained its initial set.

Tiles to be laid out from centre line of each space to outward and adjustment
made along walls so as to symmetrize the pattern with a minimum cut tiles.







4.2.6

4.2.7

4.2.8


4.2.9




Tiles of less than half of the full size along one side should be avoided.

Tiles shall be cut with suitable cutting tool and edges to be smooth.

All tiles shall be laid with square joints and grouted upon completion. Care being
taken to fill all joints with grout complete depth.

Grouting:

4.2.9.1 Allow bedding material to harden sufficiently before grouting.

4.2.9.2 Ensure that joints are free from dust and debris.

4.2.9.3 Fill joints completely with grouts having colour to match with tiling.

4.2.10


4.2.11


4.2.12

Broken tiles or tiles showing signs of defect will not be accepted and removed by
the Contractor and replaced with sound tiles.

When hit after setting tiles shall give a solid firm sound, if a hollow sound is
produced tiles and mortar layer shall be removed and replaced.

A layer of clean sand shall be spread over tile floors and shall be kept wet with
water for a period of ten (10) days for curing.

4.3 Finishing

4.3.1 All tiled surfaces shall be polished on completion by means of approved machine
using 140 carborandum wheels.

Spread a non-staining saw dust to protect file floor surface.

4 .3 .2 Care shall be taken not to damage any angles or arises.




END OF SECTION





















DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 68 16 SHEET CARPETING



PART 1 - GENERAL


1 .1

I.



1 .2

I.


RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
apply to this Section.


SUMMARY

This Section includes the following:

1. Tufted carpet. 2.
Woven carpet. 3.
Carpet cushion.

II. Related Sections include the following:


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with
carpet.


1 .3 SUBMITTALS

I. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical
characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of
substrate required.

II. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Columns, doorways, enclose walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts
are required in carpet.
Existing flooring materials to be removed.
Existing flooring materials to remain. Carpet
type, color, and dye lot.
Locations where dye lot changes occur. Seam
locations, types, and methods. Type of
subfloor.
Type of installation.
Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. Pile
direction.
Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
Transition details to other flooring materials. Type of cushion.








III. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each
Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on
Drawings and in schedules.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample.
Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.
Carpet Cushion: 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Sample. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-
mm) Sample.
Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern
alignment.

IV. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

V. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures
and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.


1 .4

I.


II.



III.



IV.


QUALITY ASSURANCE

Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation
Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification
indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Product Options: Products and manufacturers named in Part 2 establish requirements for product
quality in terms of appearance, construction, and performance. Other manufacturers' products
comparable in quality to named products and complying with requirements may be considered.

Mockups: Before installing carpet, install mockups for each type of carpet installation required to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Install mockups to comply with
the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1.

2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
CLIENT.
Notify CLIENT seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be installed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. Obtain CLIENT's
approval of mockups before starting work.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the
completed Work.
Remove mockups when directed.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undamaged at time of
Substantial Completion.


1 .5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

I. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."













1 .6

I.

II.



III.


IV.



1 .7

I.



II.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."

Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when
occupied for its intended use.

Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.

Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install
carpet before installing these items.


WARRANTY

General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive CLIENT of other rights
CLIENT may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet
that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or
abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling,
snags, runs, and delamination.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

III.

Special Carpet Cushion Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet cushion manufacturer agreeing to
replace carpet cushion that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty
period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet cushion due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failure includes, but is not limited to, permanent indentation or
compression.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1 .8 EXTRA MATERIALS

I. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet: equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq.
yd. (8.3 sq. m).


















PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2 .1







2 .2

MATERIAL

A. CARPET

Description
Colour


INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES





13mm thick roller, Carpet
as per CLIENT approval

I. Concrete - slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by Carpet manufacturer

II. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation
provided by or recommended by the following:

1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.


III. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions
indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended
by the following:

1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.


IV.


V.



VI.


Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood in strips as required to match cushion thickness
and that comply with CRI 104, Section 11.3.

Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for
taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at
seams.

Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect
exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.
























PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 .1

I.




II.

EXAMINATION

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture
content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance.
Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with
requirements specified.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials
that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by
performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following:

i. Carpet manufacturer.
ii. Carpet cushion manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Concrete for slabs
receiving carpet.
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

III.


3 .2

I.



II.


III.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


PREPARATION

General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet
installation.

Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill
cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.

Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by the following:

1. Carpet manufacturer.
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer.

IV.



3 .3

I.

II.

III.

Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

Double-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Double Glue-Down Installation."

Carpet with Attached-Cushion Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10, "Attached Cushion."







IV.


V.

VI.

VII.

VIII.

Carpet with Preapplied Adhesive Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10.4, "Pre-Applied
Adhesive Systems (Peel and Stick)."

Hook-and-Loop Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 10.5, "Hook and Loop Technology."

Stretch-in Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, "Stretch-in Installation."

Stair Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 12, "Carpet on Stairs."

Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of
carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the
door in closed position.

1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. 2.
Level adjoining border edges.

IX.

X.



XI.


XII.


XIII.

XIV.


3 .4

I.

Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by
carpet manufacturer.

Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,
alcoves, and similar openings.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by
repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.


CLEANING AND PROTECTION

Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet manufacturer.
2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.
3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

II.

III.

Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in
writing by carpet manufacturer.


END OF SECTION











DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 90 00 PAINTING



1. GENERAL

1 .1 Section Includes
1 .1 .1

1 .1 .2
Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
Supply and apply paint of all surfaces as shown on Drawings, indicated in
Schedules and as specified herein, unless specifically indicated under other
Sections.

1 .2 Qualifications
1 .2 .1 Work of this Section to be undertaken only by a Subcontractor who has certified
experience of 5years with adequate equipment and skilled workers to perform
work expeditiously, who can prove ability to carry out work similar to that specified
in a satisfactory manner, and who is approved by paint manufacturer and CLIENT.

1 .3










1 .4






















Samples
2 .3 .1



2 .3 .2

2 .3 .3
2 .3 .4

Test Area
1 .4 .1
1 .4 .2



1 .4 .3




1 .4 .4



After receiving the colour schedule, submit two samples of all colours, in the
required number of coats, on 1000 mm x 600 mm pieces of hardboard to confirm
colour match. Resubmit samples until colours are approved.
Identify samples with project name, date, location of application, number and
description of sample.
Retain sample boards on job until completion.
Submit samples, 1000 mm x 600 mm for all ' painted items on wood.


Locate a testing area in the building, where designated.
Apply samples of all finishes required, in the presence of CLIENT's representative,
Contractor and Paint Manufacturer. Apply the samples with the correct material,
number of coats, colour, texture and degree of gloss required.
Retain test area until completion of the Work. Approved work in the test area shall
serve as a standard for similar work throughout the building. Correct and refinish
work, which does not match the approved finishes, at no additional expense to the
Contract.
As a part of the main contract, all the associated works will be guaranteed by the
main contractor. For the external painting works, manufacturer shall provide a
paint performance warranty for the period of five years and, three years for the
interior painting works. Paint subcontractor shall provide similar warranties for the
paint application. Paint application shall be carried out by paint applicator
approved by CLIENT, the painting works shall be inspected by paint manufacturer at
each stage of painting works.



PAGE 1 OF 6




1 .4 .5




1 .4 .6

For future maintenance requirement, paint required for 3 % of painted area should
be delivered by the Main Contractor to the CLIENT for the products as per each
system and colour approved for the project. Packing size of such material should
not exceed 4 ltr. per product.
Paint material approved for the project shall be delivered to the site by the paint
manufacturer with proper documents and, shall be stored at designated area as a
paint stores. All material shall be with proper labels.





2. MATERIALS

2 .1 Paint and Finishing Materials: Paint shall be from a First line quality manufacturer.
All paints and coatings must have fungal resistance.

2 .2 Description of Finishes

2 .2 .1

2 .2 .2

2 .2 .3

2 .2 .4

2 .2 .5


Flat: Having less than 10 units reading on a standard gloss meter with 85 head.

Low Gloss: Between 20 and 30 units reading on a standard gloss meter with a
85 head
Semi-Gloss: Between 50 and 60 units reading on a standard gloss meter with a
60 head.
Gloss: Having plus 85 units reading on a standard gloss meter with a 60 head.

The paint types shall be as shown on the finishing tables, paint finishes shall be
confirmed by CLIENT.

2 .3 Exterior Finishes

Galvanised Piping to Roof Mounted Mechanical Equipment:
- One coat Vinyl based primer containing phosphoric acid (Solid Volume:
11 2)
- One coat, alkyd based primer not containing chromates @ 40 microns
(Solid Volume: 52 2)
- One coat alkyd based paint as undercoat @ 40 microns (Solid Volume:
53 2)
- One coat alkyd based paint as topcoat @ 40 microns (Solid Volume: 48
2)

Concrete and Plaster: Epoxy

- 1 coat of two component epoxy transparent varnish 30 % diluted (for
concrete) (Solids % by volume : 44 2)








- 1coat of high build, two pack epoxy coating based on high molecular
weight (Solids % by volume : 54 2)
- 1 coat of two pack epoxy product spray applied (Solids % by volume :
62 2, Mixing Ratio - 4:1)
- 2 separate coats of hi build polyurethane (Solids % by
volume : 63 2, Mixing Ratio - 5:1)

2 .4

Interior Finishes



Piping, Conduit and Ductwork:
- One coat Vinyl based primer containing phosphoric acid (Solid
Volume : 11 2)
- One coat, alkyd based primer not containing chromates @ 40
microns (Solid Volume : 52 2)
- One coat alkyd based paint as undercoat @ 40 microns (Solid
Volume : 53 2)
- One coat alkyd based paint as topcoat @ 40 microns (Solid Volume :
48 2)

Concrete, Plaster Walls: Emulsion Paint

- 1 coat of primer based on special, high quality, alkali resistant acrylic
binder (Solids % by volume : 25 2)
- 2 separate coats of Stucco (Solids % by volume : 52 2)
- Sanding and cleaning
- 1 as undercoat and, 2 final coats of high quality acrylic co-
polymer emulsion paint silk finish with outstanding
washability. (Solids % by volume : 44 2, Film thickness :
each 65 microns)

Concrete, Plaster Ceilings: Emulsion Paint

- 1 coat of primer based on special, high quality, alkali resistant acrylic
binder (Solids % by volume : 25 2)
- 2 separate coats of Stucco (Solids % by volume : 52 2)
- Sanding and cleaning
- 1 as undercoat and, 2 final coats of high quality acrylic co-polymer
emulsion paint matt finish with outstanding washability. (Solids % by
volume : 35 2, Film thickness: each 50 microns)


2.5 Suitable Primers for Background
____________________________________________________________
SURFACES PRIMER
____________________________________________________________
Non resinous wood Low oil based primer to BS 5358 or
Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756
____________________________________________________________







Resinous Woods Aluminum wood primer to BS 4756
____________________________________________________________
Iron and Steel Red lead primer to BS 2523, Type "B"
____________________________________________________________
Calcium plumbate primer to BS 3698,
Galvanized steel Type "A" or
Zinc chromate primer
____________________________________________________________
Blast cleaned iron and Zinc-rich primer to BS 4652,
steel or touching-up Types
damaged zinc coatings 1, 2, and 3
____________________________________________________________
Aluminum and Etch primer plus zinc chromate
aluminum alloys primer
____________________________________________________________
Copper Externally: Etch primer or aluminum
and pigmented primer
copper alloys Internally: Alkyd gloss paint direct
____________________________________________________________
Lead Alkyd gloss paint direct
____________________________________________________________
Plastics Oil based undercoat
____________________________________________________________

2.6 Paint Systems
__________________________________________________________________
SURFACE LOCATION PAINT SYSTEM
__________________________________________________________________
Internal 3 coats varnish or polyurethane
Wood-natural ________________________________________________
finish
External 3 coats exterior grade varnish
_____________________________________________________________
1 coat primer
Internal 1 coat undercoat
Iron and steel 1 coat alkyd gloss finish
including ________________________________________________
galvanized steel
2 coats primer
External 2 coats undercoat
1 coat alkyd gloss finish
__________________________________________________________________
1 coat etch primer
Internal 1 coat primer
Aluminum and 1 coat undercoat
External 1 coat alkyd gloss finish (lead free)
____________________________________________________













3. EXECUTION

3 .1

General
3 .1 .1



3 .1 .2



Before commencement of work, remove electrical switch and outlet plates, surface
hardware, frames of lighting fixtures and all other obstructions. Replace properly at
completion of the work of this Section.
Remove soiled and used rags, waste and empty containers from the building each
night. Take every precaution to prevent a fire.

3 .2 Preparation
3 .2 .1

3 .2 .2




3 .2 .3

3 .2 .4
3 .2 .5
3 .2 .6



3 .2 .7

3 .2 .8

3 .2 .9
3.2.10
3.2.11



3.2.12

3.2.13
3.2.14

3.2.15
Clean floors and adjacent surfaces, as well as surfaces to be painted, before work is
commenced.
Cut out, as required, defects in drywall and plaster surfaces and openings
adjoining trim, and fill with a patching compound or approved patching plaster
flush with adjoining surface. When dry, smooth and-seal the patch before
application of the priming coat.
Fill nail holes, and similar defects after the first coat of paint has been applied.
Filler to match the colour of the finish.
Carefully hand sand woodwork before painting.
Clean and remove all defects and extraneous matter from surfaces to be finished.
Inspect wood surfaces for gouges, marks, and other defects and properly prepare
by patching, filling, smoothing or surface preparation as necessary to insure a
satisfactory surface for priming.
Remove from ferrous metals, rust, scale and loose paint by means of scrapers and
wire brushes or blasting.
Neutralize galvanized surfaces with approved proprietary brand neutralizing
(etching) solution.
Remove all foreign matter on surfaces before painting.
Prime on wood, with one coat of aluminum primer, if to be finished with paint.
Test all surfaces for moisture content before commencing painting. Do not apply
paint when moisture content exceeds 8%, as determined by an approved moisture
testing device.
In the case of presence of high alkali conditions, wash surface to neutralize the
alkali.
Wire-brush concrete and masonry surfaces.
Advise CLIENT, at least three days prior to application, of the use of special
preparatory treatment.
Cement plastered surfaces to be rubbed down with rubbing stone, or approved
method and cleaned of dust and all foreign matter before application of primer.

3 .3 Application

3 .3 .1 Do not undertake exterior painting at temperatures outside of paint manufacturer's
recommended application and curing temperature and humidity range, or










3 .3 .2
3 .3 .3
3 .3 .4

3 .3 .5
3 .3 .6
3 .3 .7
3 .3 .8

3 .3 .9

3.3.10
3.3.11

3.3.12
3.3.13

immediately following rain and dew. Avoid painting surfaces when exposed to hot
sun.
Thoroughly mix materials before application.
Apply paint under adequate illumination.
Apply materials and cut in neatly, so as to dry uniformly to the colour and gloss
specified, free from runs, sags, wrinkles, crawls and other defects
Vary each coat in tone to permit supervision identification. Sand
lightly between coats of paint.
Each coat of paint to be dry and hard before following coat is applied.
Finish tops, bottoms and edges of doors in the same manner as the remainder of
the door.
When the primer-sealer coat is dry, touch up all visible suction spots before the
next coat is applied, do not proceed until all suction spots are sealed. Where
exposed pipes are to be painted, also include copper piping.
Unless otherwise specified, finish all other surfaces the same as the nearest or
adjoining surfaces or as directed by CLIENT. Brush paint wood and metal surfaces.
Unless otherwise specified, apply paint by roller unless the manufacturer's
recommendation excludes use of this method.



- END OF SECTION -



































DIVISION 09 FINISHES

09 96 00 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATING


1. GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1


1.1.2


1.1.3

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
Supply and application of epoxy coating on the floors of services rooms for
the building, as indicated on drawings
Noted on Drawings and Schedules.


1.2 Performance

1.2.1 Protect concrete substrates and their reinforcement from damages due to
water, water borne and air borne salts.
1.2.2 Prevent water from dripping to floors below.

1.3 Quality Assurance

1.3.1 Have work performed by CLIENT approval in writing by the manufacturer of
the
traffic coating materials.
1.3.2 All materials to be supplied by the traffic coating manufacturer.

1.4 Quality Control

1 .4 .1 Ensure salts of any kind, from any source are not allowed on concrete
substrate prior to application of traffic coating.


1.5 Sample Area

1.5.1




1 .5 .2

Provide sample installation, 3000 mm x 3000 mm for approval at a location on
site designated by CLIENT. Modify installation as may be necessary to
obtain approval. Approved sample area shall become the minimum standard
for work of this section.
Approved sample area may remain on site as part of the work.


1.6 Submittals

1.6.1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section: Shop
Drawings, Product Data & Samples.













1.6.2 Submit for CLIENT's review, complete sets of data sheets for materials and
products to be used on the job and shop drawings indicating layout and
installation details.

1.7 Product Delivery and Storage

1.7.1 Deliver and store products in manufacturer's original containers, undamaged.
1.7.2 Material temperatures during storage and delivery and at time of application
shall be within the manufacturer's recommended temperature range.
1.7.3 Protect materials from moisture and weather.

1.8 Site Conditions

1.8.1
1.8.2


1.8.3



1.8.4

Protect work of others from damage due to work of this section.
Prevent construction traffic and work from occurring in treated areas until floor
is sealed and cured.
Minimum surface and ambient temperature before, during and after
installation or until cured shall be as required by the traffic coating
manufacturer.
Provide ventilation to areas of work until cured.


1.9


Warranty

1.9.1




Warranty work for a period of 10 years from date of the Completion Certificate.
During warranty period, repair and / or replace traffic coating which has blistered,
delaminated, separated from substrate materials, deteriorated, split due to
development of cracks wider than 1.6 mm in substrate, lost aggregate sufficient to
expose waterproofing membrane component, not maintained specified
performance criteria and which has permitted entry of water and salts into and
through the concrete substrate at no extra cost to CLIENT.































2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials
Paint and Finishing Materials shall be from a First line quality manufacturer. All
paints and coatings must have fungal resistance.

2.1.1 Solvent Free Epoxy Coating:

1 coat of two pack epoxy sealer/primer with high penetrating properties
@ 40 microns, followed by 2 coats of solvent free two pack epoxy
coating each coat @ 200 microns.

a) Primer: Epoxy resin based primer/sealer with high penetration
properties.
Solids (% by volume): 40 %, Specific Gravity: 0.96 - 0.98, DFT: 40
microns

b) Coating: Solvent free, two pack epoxy resin based floor coating
Solids (% by volume): 98 2 %, Specific Gravity: 1.15, No. of
coats: 2,
DFT: 200 microns /coat

2.1.2


2.1.3

Colour: As selected by CLIENT from the manufacturer's standard range of
colours.

Test Standards:

Compressive Strength -62.5 N/mm
2
-ASTM C579
Tensile strength-29.3 N/mm
2
-ASTM C307
Flexural Strength -18.6 N/mm
2
-ASTM C580
Bond strength to host concrete-2.83 N/mm2-BS 1881: Part 207
Crack bridgeability - as per ASTM C884
(No delamination or rupture of the coating)
Rapid chloride permeability -1249 Coulombs (low)-AASHTO T277 (Host
concrete 4373 Coulombs)
Water permeability - 1mm-DIN 1048
(Average value of host concrete - 9mm penetration)
Acid/Alkali reaction -Non -reactive-ASTM D543(No visible sign of
discolouration or blistering
Weather/Salt spray test -N.F.C standard ..No cracking, blistering or
swelling
Impact resistance -As per -ISO 6722No surface cracking or defects
Shore "A" hardness-98-ASTM D2240
Taber abrasion (1,000 cycles)-(weight loss 0.07%)-ASTM D4060
Toxicity -as per -BS 6920
Flame Spread - as per -ASTM D 1360 No ignition of coating
















3. EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

3.1.1 Ensure subsurface is sound, hard, fully cured, dry and free of substances
detrimental to bond before starting work.
3.1.2 Ensure air and substrate temperatures are within range recommended by
manufacturer during application and curing of work of this section.

3.2 Preparation

3.2.1 Remove debris from surfaces and remove dirt.
3.2.2 Prepare substrates to epoxy coating manufacturer's written instructions and
as follows:
a.




b.


c.



d.





e.
Concrete floor to be painted must be perfectly cured at least for 28
days with moisture content of 5%. Leitance and impurities must be
removed by sandblasting all contaminants, detrimental to bond of
traffic coating system and to expose any cracks in the substrate.
Any ridges and irregularities at construction joints shall be ground
smooth and filled with sand filled/epoxy mortar.
Inaccessible area where Captive Balsting is not feasible, surface
should be abraded mechanically using grinders followed by
cleaning.
Cracks 1.5 mm and wider which are too irregular to saw cut and
construction joints shall have a coat of modified epoxy coating
applied over and a continuous 150 mm wide crack reinforcing fabric
centred over the cracks and pressed in. Cover all crack reinforcing
fabric with a 1 mm thickness of waterproofing membrane.
Fill cracks less than 1.5 mm wide with sand filled/epoxy mortar.


3.3 Application

3.3.1


3.3.2


3.3.3



3.3.4

Surface preparation and the paint application should be performed by the
certified applicator for the project and, supervised by the paint supplier.
Follow manufacturer's instructions as far as surface preparation and, paint
application is concerned.
Finished work shall match approved sample area; be uniform in thickness,
sheen colour and texture and be free from detects detrimental to appearance
and performance.
Allow no traffic on applied system until each coat has completely dried and till
the total curing of 7 days is complete.


3.4 Field Quality Control

3.4.1 Random sampling shall be performed as and when required.









3.4.2



3.4.2


3.4.3

Perform cut test at locations designated by CLIENT and in presence of
CLIENT'S representative to ensure specified dry firm thickness the non-skid
of waterproofing system is met.
Repair to approval, all cuts and replace all patches taken for inspection and
testing purposes.
No further works shall be allowed to progress until, the previous stage is
approved.





END OF SECTION





















































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 10 00 00 - Specialties
- 10 14 00 - Signage
- 10 14 53 - Traffic signage
- 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories




















































DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 14 00 SIGNAGE


1 GENERAL


1 .1 . Description Of Work

1 .1 .1 This section covers all interior/exterior identifying devises.

a) Door signs.
b) Interior/exterior directions signs.
c) Supply of fastening, accessory items, connection devices that make the
installation complete.

1 .1 .2 Work exclude exit signs and signs described for Electrical and Mechanical equipments
and fittings.

1 .1 .3 Sign type and location

a) Surface mounted door
b) Metal wall plate
c) Cut letters 300 mm high

1 .2 . Quality Control

1 .2 .1

1 .2 .2



1 .2 .3

All signs under this section shall be fabricated and installed by one party.

All signs shall be designed by licensed specialist with samples to be approved by the
CLIENT, all the dimensions mentioned in this section are indicative to the final shape,
design and geometry to be approved by the CLIENT.

Signs shall be produced by a licensed specialist with minimum experience of five
years in the business.


1.3 Submittals

1 .3 .1 Shop Drawings. Submit layout drawings showing location and details of all signs.
Plans shall be drawn at minimum 1:50 scale, details at full scale.

1 .3 .2 Samples. Submit sample of each sign type in each colour as indicated.


2 PRODUCTS

2 .1 Materials

2 .1 .1 Stainless Steel: Shall be type 304L and in compliance with ASTM A895

2 .1 .2 Aluminium extrusions: Aluminium Association alloy AA 6063-T5 or AA 6006-T5. Sheet
aluminum: anodising quality.








2 .1 .3


2 .1 .4



2 .1 .5



Pre-finished sheet aluminum: embossed utility sheet with manufacturer applied baked
enamel finish.

Self-stick foam tape: 1.6 mm thick, 352.4 Kg/m density polyurethane open-cell foam
tape for sign purposes, with synthetic self-stick adhesive on both sides. Width: to suit
sign sizes.

Bituminous paint: to US & BS.


2 .2 Finishes

2 .2 .1 Anodized Aluminum:

a) To Aluminum Association designation AA in uncoloured anodized finish.
b) Colour shall match.

2 .2 .2



2 .2 .3

2 .2 .4

Baked enamel: one coat of conditioner to CGSB 31-GP-107M one coat of US & BS,
Type 2 primer and at least two coats of US & BS, one coat on interior surfaces.
Individually bake each coat.

Chrome and nickel plating: to ASTM B456, satin or polished finish, as required.

Stainless steel finishes matching the interior/exterior design layouts.


2 .3 Fabrication / Manufacture

2 .3 .1

2 .3 .2

2 .3 .3

2 .3 .4

2 .3 .5


2 .3 .6

2 .3 .7


2 .3 .8


2 .3 .9

Fabricate signs in accordance with details, specifications and shop drawings.

Build units square, true, accurate to size, free from visual or performance defects.

Accurately fit and securely join sections to obtain tight, closed joints.

Allow for thermal movement without distortion of components.

Exposed fasteners permitted only where indicated or approved by CLIENT and to be
inconspicuous and same finish and colour as base material, or as noted.

Polish exposed edges of material to smooth, slightly convex profile.

Do steel welding to CSA 59 aluminum welding to CSA W47.2 Finish exposed welds
flush and smooth.

Apply bituminous paint to aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete or
masonry.

Manufacturer's nameplates on sign surface locations visible in completed work not
acceptable.

2 .4 Sign Graphics

2 .4 .1 Sign graphics to be well defined, arranged for balanced appearance, and properly
worded and letters well spaced.






2 .4 .2


2 .4 .3



2 .4 .4


2 .4 .5



2 .4 .6



Cut and spray process: mask surfaces, accurately cut-out image, then spray apply
uniform coating to obtain opaque finish.

Silk screen process: apply one, two multi colour photographic produced silk screen
printed images to face back side of transparent sign faces; face side of opaque sign
faces.

Engraving: apply sign images using pantograph mechanical engraving machine to
obtain incised paint-filled letters and/or symbols as detailed or specified

Self-stick vinyl film: individual letters and numerals and symbols die cut from 0.1 mm
thick black integral colour, matte finish, exterior grade PVC film, with self-stick
adhesive backing.

Decals: silk screened or printed images on 0.025 mm, clear finish, PVC film, with self-
stick adhesive backing. Protect image with laminated film overlay of same material as
decal base.


2 .5 Cut-Out Letters

2 .5 .1 Cut letters and symbols from plain aluminum sheet.

2 .5 .2 Helvetica typeface, upper case. Arabic and English. Make corners square cut.

2 .5 .3 After fabrication finish aluminum with clear anodising or baked enamel, as per
schedule here in.


2 .6 Cast Letters

2 .6 .1 Cast letters of solid aluminum accurately formed to profiles as detailed; with smooth
faces free from surface defects or blemishes.

2 .6 .2 After fabrication finish letters with clear anodizing belt polished high luster with acrylic
top coat.

2 .7 Door Plates & Wall plates

2 .7 .1

2.7.2

2.7.3

2.7.4




2.7.5

Fabricate sign faces of stainless steel brushed finish satin #4.

Location & size : as per the schedule shown on the drawing.

Sign graphics: apply by silk screen.

Interchangeable mounting: supply door plates with approved type,
semi-concealed, retaining holders that permit quick but vandal-resistant
interchange of sign face. No exposed fasteners permitted. Exposed
portions to match sign face.

Fixed mounting: use self-stick foam tape for Door plates. Wall plates fixing by surface
fasteners with rosette covers. Include back-up plates for fixing to uneven surfaces
where required.







2.7.6


2.7.7


2 .7 .8

2 .7 .9


Bracket mounting: fabricate brackets for wall projecting or ceiling suspended sign
plates.

Mounting on transparent surfaces: use self-stick foam tape. Include blank
back-up plate for opposite side.

Washroom pictographs: cut-out figures without backgrounds.

Use door No. indicated on plan or as specified by the CLIENT.


3 EXECUTION

3 .1 Inspection

3 .1 .1 Inspect site location to ensure surfaces and attachments are ready to receive the
signs.


3 .2 Installation

3 .2 .1 Erect and secure signs plumb and level at elevations as directed by the CLIENT.

3 .2 .2 Comply with sign manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

3 .2 .3 Mechanical attachment:

a)

b)
c)

d)
e)
f)
g)
h)

To concrete or solid masonry use lag screws and expansion bolts or screws
and fibre plugs, as appropriate for stresses involved.
To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent.
To steel use bolts with nut and lock washers, self-tapping screws, welding, as
appropriate for stresses and metal thickness.
To wood use screws.
Secure into framing members behind stud walls or above ceilings.
Mechanical fasteners on exterior to be non-staining, non-ferrous type.
Fabricate special fasteners as required for installation conditions.
Mechanical fasteners and methods of attachment subject to CLIENT'S
approval.
Obtain CLIENT 'S approval before fixing to structural steel.

3 .2 .4 Adhesive attachment:

a) Use self-stick adhesive foam tape to manufacturer's instructions to adequately
fix sign and prevent "rocking". Keep tape maximum 2 mm from edges.
3 .3 Cleaning

3 .3 .1 Leave signs clean. Remove debris from interior of sign boxes.

3 .3 .2 Touch up any damaged finishes.


END OF SECTION







DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 14 53 TRAFFIC SGNAGE



1. GENERAL


1.1 General Requirements

1.1.1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section


1.2 Related Work

1.2.1 Section 32 14 13.13 "Interlocking Precast Concrete Unit Paving".

1.3 Submission

1.3.1 Submit a complete set of data sheets, together with manufacturer's
certificates, indicating that materials and equipment to be used are in
accordance with the Specifications.

2. Traffic Signs

A.

B.


C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

Supply and install road signs as shown on the drawings (location, size, etc.)

Posts shall be 75mm dia. galvanised steel pipes (3mm wall thickness) fixed on
reinforced concrete foundations.

Signs are to be made from aluminium thickness conforming to ASTM B 209, 6061 T6.

All borders shall be red non-reflective colour except otherwise shown.

All back grounds shall be white reflective colour except otherwise shown.

All messages shall be of black non reflective colour except otherwise shown.

Posts are to be painted with alternate black & white, 300mm strips.

Provide Preferred parking signs and bicycle parking signage at the locations as
specified on the drawings. If the parking is not visible from the street and the building,
clear signage must be provided.



END OF SECTION












DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES
10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES


1. GENERAL

1 .1 Section Includes
1 .1 .1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
1 .1 .2 Fabrication, supply and installation of washroom accessories.


1 .2 Submittals
1.2.1 Shop Drawings:
1 .2 .1 .1



1 .2 .1 .2

1 .2 .1 .3

1 .2 .1 .4
Show size of wall openings and recesses, rough framing requirements,
layout of accessories, dimension to finished floor level and means of
anchorage.
Show all lettering as it will appear on the finished face of the
accessories.
Samples: Submit samples showing materials colour and finish, and if
requested by CLIENT includes the complete item.
Maintenance and Operation Instructions: Provide for inclusion in data
book three printed copies of maintenance and operation instructions for
all accessories.
































2. PRODUCTS

2 .1 Material, Finishes and Workmanship

All toilet ceramic fixtures shall be first choice and as approved by CLIENT .

2.2 Fixtures and Accessories:

1. Wash Basin:

Supply and installation of washbasin, single bowl counter fixed, vitreous china.
Faucet: Single lever basin mixer exposed fitting. Chrome plated.
Wastes trap: Pop-up plug operated by a mechanism incorporated in the tap assembly.
Standards: To BS EN 274-1,-2 and -3
Traps: Bottle trap
Standards: To BS EN 274-1,-2 and -3
Wash basin brand and color: as approved by CLIENT.

2. Mirror:

Supply and installation of wall mounted mirrors with 6mm thick, with bevelled edges fixed on
18mm thick plywood backing, as mentioned on the drawings.

3. Water closet:

European type Water closet, floor mounted, back outlet,
a) Bowl Type : Elongated with siphonic wash down design.
b) Vitreous china flush tank
c) Heavy duty plastic toilet cover
d) Fixture support : floor-stainless steel mounting bolt
e) Design consumption (9L/flush) - Double option & full
f) Shape of Water closet for handicapped toilets shall be round front head. g)
Color and brand: as approved by CLIENT.


4. Ablution spray:

Ablution spray shall be comprised of push button or top lever operated head with medium
water flow and good quality flexible hose with " angle stop.


5. Other accessories:

Supply and installation of toilet accessories: Toilet paper holder, Soap holder, Liquid soap
dispenser, Litter bin, Surface mounted auto-pilot paper roll, Corner type soap tray, Shower
tray, Tissue dispenser, Stainless steel towel holder, Robe hook etc, as per drawings and
approved by CLIENT.
Supply and fix hinged support stainless steel rail and 600mm long grab rail Grade 304, in all
handicapped toilets as shown on the drawings and approved by CLIENT.

6. Single Lever Shower Mixer






Shower mixer exposed Fitting with shower Hand Spray, Chrome Plated Handle.

7. Pantry Sink

Stainless steel double bowl sink with drainer, counter mounted. Material: Stainless steel
gauge 18, satin, minimum thickness 1.2mm. Standards : To BS EN 13310.
Tap/Chain stay/Overflow holes: Tap hole, chain stay hole, overflow hole.
Faucet: Single lever sink mixer DN 15, swivel spout, chrome plated.
Wastes traps : Plug waste(s) with rubber plug(s) and ball chain (s). Standards : To BS EN
274-1, -2 and -3. Material : Brass, Chrome plated.
Traps: Bottle trap, Standards: To BS EN 274-1,-2 and -3, Material: Plastic

8. Hand Dryer

Driers shall have 2.0 KW element, 2700 rpm, 130 watts brushless 2 pole induction motor with
motor windings protected against thermal overload. Electrical characteristics: 240 volts, 50
HZ.


3. EXECUTION

3 .1 Installation - General
3 .1 .1


3 .1 .2
3 .1 .3

3 .1 .4

3 .1 .5
Install all items with non-corrosive anchoring devices. Provide screws with
inorganic expansion shields for solid walls and toggle bolts or chemical grip bolts
for hollow walls. Provide stainless steel head screws for exposed locations. Provide
a rigid, secure, safe and vandal-proof installation for each use.
Securely fasten accessories, level and plumb in the locations shown on the
drawings and as specified herein. Mounting heights as directed.
Perform drilling of steel, masonry and concrete necessary to install the work of this
section.
Isolate accessory surfaces to prevent electrolysis due to contact with masonry,
concrete or dissimilar metal surfaces. Use bituminous paint, building paper or other
approved means.



3 .2 Adjustment

3.2.1


3.2.2

Upon completion of the work, or when directed, remove all trace of protective
coatings or paper.
Test mechanisms, hinges, locks and latches and where necessary, adjust and
lubricate and ensure that the whole sanitary system and its relevant accessories
are in perfect working order.



- END OF SECTION -












CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 13 00 00 - Special Construction
- 13 31 23 - Tensioned Fabric Structures






















































DIVISION THIRTEEN - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 31 23 - TENSIONED FABRIC STRUCTURES

1. GENERAL

1.1












1.2



1.3






1.4

Section Include

Supply, fabrication, delivery and erection of tensile fabric shade structures include
following components:
Steel columns, hanger beams and steel struts,
Steel membrane plates and fitments,
Wire ropes, cables, tensioners and shackles,
Tensile fabric and accessories,
Footings and related civil works.

Related Work
This section is related to concrete works, protection below ground, metal works and steel paint.

Quality Assurance
A. Provide written evidence to the CLIENT of experience and skills of all personnel proposed
for
this project.
B. Ensure all welding is performed only by welders with qualifications as described in AS1554,
Section 4.11, under the supervision of a qualified supervisor.

References
Comply with applicable sections of the following Australian Standards:

AS1252 (1983) -High Strength Steel Bolts with associated nuts and washers for
structural engineering.
AS1394 (1984) -Round Steel Wire for Ropes.
AS1554 (1985) -Structural Steel Welding Code 1554.1.
AS1627 -Metal finishing- Surface Preparation & Pretreatment.
AS1650 (1988) -Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings on Ferrous Articles.
AS2312 (1984) -Guide to the Protection of Iron and Steel against
exterior atmospheric conditions.
AS2319 (1984) -Rigging Screws and Turnbuckles.
AS2741 (1984) -Shackles.
AS3569 (1985) -Steel Wire Ropes
AS4100 (1991) -Methods for Fire Tests on Building Materials,
Components and Structures
AS1441-Methods of Test for Coated Fabrics
AS1530-Methods for Fire Tests on Building Materials,
Components and structures
AS4100-Steel Structures Code

1.5 Design Analysis
The shape of the finished membrane structure shall be defined by the geometry shown on the
drawings.









The structure shall be checked for stability under applied loads including wind loads at 140KPH.
All analysis of the membrane structures, including footings, shall be carried out by a Registered
Professional Engineer experienced in fabric structures, using large displacement finite element
techniques.
Comply with the requirements of AS 1170 part 2, 1989 Wind Loads, and British Standard CP3,
Chapter V, Part2, for determinig of wind loads and pressures.
Following variables to be accounted for:

Design Wind Speed : 140 KPH
Terrain Category (Topography) : 1.0
Shielding Factor ( Ground Roughness) : 0.75
Importance Factor (statistical) : 1.0

1.6 Shop Drawings
Contractor shall provide complete drawings showing all details of fabrication, assembly,
installation and fixing of specific items or components. Include all necessary explanatory notes
and specifications.


1.7




1.8





1.9


Warranty
Contractor shall provide warranty in writing stating physical properties of the fabric materials. The
warranty term shall extend to a total of 10 years of UV warranty.

Approval by CLIENT
Any approval given by CLIENT in pursuance of this specification shall not be deemed in
any way to relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations or responsibilities under the
Contract.

Handling and Transport of Components
Transport and store components under dry, well ventilated conditions to prevent the formation of
wet storage staining.
During the handling, storage, transportation and unloading, take care not to damage, crush or kink
any wire rope cables.
Take precautions to minimize damage to painted surfaces during handling, storage, transport to
site and during erection.


2. PRODUCTS

2.1 Description of Fabric

The proposed fabric shall be composite PVC membrane, 0.56mm minimum thickness, UV
resistant with 240microns minimum PVDF coating at top of yarns.
Tensile strength :300/280 daN/5cm to EN 1421.
Tear strength : 30/28 daN to DIN 53363. Total
Weight : 750g/m
2
to EN 2286-2.
Coating adhesion : 10daN/5cm to EN 2411.
Finish : 100% PVDF on top side.
Colour : Off white or as selected.









2.2









2.3





2.4






2.5


















2.6







2.7



2.8


Fabric Welding

Fabric panels will be joined together using high voltage Radio Frequency welding
machines. Seam width at overlap to be 35mm minimum.

All welds shall be of sufficient strength to develop the full strength of the fabric at 30
degrees C in direct tension across the weld. Generally, an appropriate weld should, when
pulled apart, delaminate all PVC from the substrate, to one or both surfaces.

Care in Execution
Exercise great care in marking, cutting, aligning, checking, welding seams and additions
as well as general handling and soiling prevention procedures to produce a smooth
uniform surface with even curved edges and interface lacking wrinkling cuts, abrasions,
stains or marks, surface imperfections or welding aberrations.

Cables and Fittings

All cables to be Class A Galvanized strand with stainless steel swages.
Each fabric panel shall be constructed with four nos. individual catenary cables fitted with
adjustable swages to ensure proper tensioning of each perimeter span. Shackles, bolts
and nuts to be stainless steel.

Steel Fabrication

Ensure all items of equipment for welding and gas cutting are of a suitable design
and in good condition.
Perform all welding confirming to the requirements of AS1554.
Ensure that surfaces to be welded are free from scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and
any other foreign material.
Supply steel components to site in a ready for erection state.
On site welding is not permissible.
Steel members shall be hot dipped galvanized 100microns in accordance with ASTM
A325.
All bolts, nuts and washers shall be hot dipped galvanized 100microns in accordance
with ASTM A325.
Concrete anchor bolts shall conform to A307 and be Hot-dipped Galvanized. Bolts to
be grade 8.8
Coat surfaces below ground to be protected as specified for building.

Making Good Defective Work

Work which does not comply with this specification is liable to total or partial rejection.
Replace at no cost and to the approval of CLIENT.

The CLIENT will determine the extent of work removal and the methods of removal and
replacement.

Delivery to Site
Arrange with for delivery of all completed fabric material to the site. Take care in
handling, loading, delivery, unloading and storage on site in a location nominated by the
CLIENT.
Attendance at Site









Provide a supervisor to attend all fabric erection activities at the site. Provide guidance
where necessary and appropriate.

3. EXECUTION

3.1.




3.2.





3.3.







3.4.






3.5.






3.6.




3.7.

Examination
Refer to the architectural site plan which shows the adjacent facilities, roads, etc. Visit
site to verify the existing conditions prior to delivery and erection of any materials.

Set-out and Survey - Steelwork
Check that the foundations on which steel is to be placed are at the correct levels to
receive base plates and/or other fixings and verify the correctness for location and/or
level of all anchor bolts set in the bases.

Steel Erection
Be responsible for the accurate bearing of steel on foundations, for correct location,
shimming to suit correct levels and placement of all members.
Erect steelwork and associated cables using a qualified and experienced supervisor in
the erection of fabric structures.
Make good after erection of steelwork any damages to paint system.
Preparation for Installation of Fabric
Prior to commencement of erection, check all contact surfaces to remove causes for rips
or scratching during installation of fabric panels.
Use ground sheets if the membrane is to be dragged across a surface.
Prevention of chaffing of the fabric surface is required at all times.

Installation of Fabric
Install fabric structure in a sequence and with sufficient bracing to ensure stability of the
structure.

Perform all work to CLIENT satisfaction, free of damage to any materials.

Cleaning of Fabric
Clean and dry the fabric elements after erection. Remove all signs of dirt and panel
markings where visible by naked eye from three meters.

Final Inspection
Prior to handing over, inspect jointly with CLIENT representative completed fabric
structures and execute immediately any adjustments, making good damage or defects
etc, as instructed by the CLIENT.


- END OF SECTION -

















CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS

Division 31 00 00 - Earth Work
- 31 23 16 - Excavation
- 31 23 23.13 - Backfill
- 31 31 16 - Termite control























































DIVISION 31 EARTH WORK
31 23 16 EXCAVATION



1 .0 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1.1.1



1.1.2


1.1.5

1.1.6

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section

Co-ordinate with Section 03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete and Divisions of
Mechanical and Electrical.

Definition: "Excavation" consists of removal of material encountered to the required
formation levels and subsequent disposal of materials removed.
No Asbestos Containing Materials (ACMs) are used within the development.

1.2 Quality Assurance

1.2.1



1.2.2

Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable
requirements of relevant B.S. Standards and as approved by CLIENT.

Testing and Inspection Service: Employ an independent Geotechnical Inspection and
Testing Company to perform soil testing and inspection services, for quality control
during earthwork operations.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Test Reports - Excavating: Submit three copies of the following reports prepared by
the inspection and testing company:

1.3.1.1 Condition and suitability of substrates to accept concrete blinding and
foundation.

1.3.2 Method Statement - Contractor shall provide a method statement indicating
methodology, sequence, equipment intended to be used, for CLIENT's reference and
approval.

1 .4 Related Documents

Drawings and general provisions of the AGREEMENT, including CONTRACT CONDITIONS and
SPECIFICATION Sections, apply to work of this section.

1.5 Summary








This section covers:-

Survey of the site.
Cleaning and grubbing, stock pilling and disposal of cut material.
All necessary safety measures.
Extent of earthwork shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

1.6 Job Conditions

1 .6 .1 Existing Utilities:

1 .6 .1 .1







1 .6 .1 .2






1 .6 .1 .3




1 .6 .1 .4

Prior to commencement of any on-site work - Carefully excavate, using
humans only to locate existing underground utilities in areas of Work. If utilities
are to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection
during earthwork operations. Refer to Divisions of mechanical and Electrical for
relocation of existing services.
Make test boring and conduct other explanatory operations as necessary.

Should any utilities or services are encountered during excavation, immediately
consult CLIENT for direction. Such services shall be removed, sealed or
rerouted in a manner described by CLIENT at the Contractor expenses. Co-
operate with CLIENT in keeping respective services and facilities in
operation. Repair damaged utilities to the satisfaction of CLIENT.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities used and occupied by
CLIENT,
except when permitted in writing by CLIENT. This will be given only after
acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

Provide minimum of 72-hour notice to CLIENT and receive written authorisation
to proceed, before interrupting any utility.

1 .6 .2 Protection of Persons and Property:

1 .6 .2 .1
1 .6 .2 .2






1 .6 .2 .3



1 .6 .2 .4

Barricade open excavations and provide warning tapes and lights.
The CONTRACTOR shall protect structures, utilities, pavements, and other
facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, washout, and
other hazards created by his operations. CONTRACTOR shall maintain the
existing roads in good condition during construction and repair damaged roads
as required to the satisfaction of the CLIENT.
The CONTRACTOR shall plan and execute all aspects of the site preparation
work so that the safety of personnel, the work and adjacent property is
guaranteed and such that a minimum of inconvenience is caused.
Safety of Excavations: The Contractor shall provide proper supports for the
sides of excavations to prevent collapse, using all necessary means, and shall
be responsible for the safety of the excavation and workers concerned.








1 .7



Reference Standards

Earthwork shall be performed in compliance with Drawings, tests and with the requirements of
the specifications of the British Standard Institute (BSI), American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), and the specifications of the American Society of
Testing and Materials (ASTM)





















































2. PRODUCTS


2.1 Common Excavation: Common excavation shall mean any excavated materials including soil
and rock. All common excavation shall be classified as suitable or unsuitable materials for use as fill.
























































3. EXECUTION

3.1 General:
Workmanship for excavating shall comply with BS 8000 Part 1, Sections 3. 1, 3.2 & 3.3

3.2 Stability Of Excavation

3.2.1






3.2.2





3.2.4

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions during excavation for the Works,
particularly in the case of excavations that adjoin existing buildings and underground
services, and shall take precautions against damage or collapse by means of
temporary or permanent shoring, strutting, sheet piling or underpinning of adjacent
buildings, and such other methods, as he deems fit.

The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the safety of buildings utilities and
paving adjoining all excavations. Should any subsistence or other damage occur due
to the inefficiency of the CONTRACTOR, the damage shall be made good and borne
expenses by him.

Health and safety requirements shall be strictly adhered to in all respects.

3.3













3.4

Site Surveying And Setting Out
Before work commences on the site, the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the levels of
the site and obtain the verification of the CLIENT of these levels. Levels shall be taken on a
grid to be agreed by the CLIENT, and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these
levels for record purposes. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and
maintaining a site datum level. "Zero" datum shall be the level of the top of the ground
floor slab of the
proposed buildings. Information pertaining to the nature of the ground may be given to the
Contractor, when available but without any guarantee of its correctness or accuracy.

The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the works to the specified
lines, levels, and positions in relation to the building lines and existing structures.

Existing Services

The Contractor shall ascertain the whereabouts of all existing services on the site, both
above and below ground. Such services shall be removed, sealed or rerouted in a manner
prescribed by the Public Authorities concerned including additional requirements for future
services at the Contractors own expense.

The Contractor shall also be held responsible for all damage sustained by any of the
services within and/or adjacent to the site resulting from the works. Excavations to locate
services shall be carried out by hand.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all liaison with local and service Authorities and for
obtaining all necessary permissions, licenses and approvals, arranging for disconnection of
existing services as well as for all payments of fees, changes etc. in respect of the works.







3.5 Clearing and Grubbing

3.5.1 Perform the clearing and grubbing of top soil consisting mainly of loose soil, vegetation
and organic matters, drift sand, unsuitable soil and rubbish by scarifying the areas to
be excavated and side-walks to a minimum depth of 300 mm from the natural ground-
level.

3.6 Excavation

3.6.1 Excavation Permits

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits relating to all the works including
excavation works and shall bear all costs involved. The Contractor shall abide by all
conditions, etc. laid down in such permits.

3.6.2 Types of Excavations

Excavation shall be classified according to the nature of the materials to be removed either as
excavation in rock or excavation in earth. Excavation in rock shall be defined as including all
excavations in hard and consolidated materials which cannot be removed by normal excavation
tools and equipment and which require drilling, blasting or other special means for their removal.
All excavation other than in rock shall be defined as excavation in earth.

3.6.3 Explosives and Blasting

Explosives may only be used in the works with the prior written approval of the CLIENT and all
safeguards and conditions that the Consultant may specify are to be agreed in writing. Permission
must also be obtained from the relevant Government Authorities.

a) The use of explosive to remove rock encountered in the course of
excavation will not be allowed without the prior written consent of the CLIENT and
concerned authorities. The storage and use of all such explosives shall fully comply
with the By-laws and ordinances of Army and all Government Departments
concerned.

b) The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all safety precautions
concerned with the use of explosive and for all damage to life and property as a result
thereof. The explosive shall be restored in a locked and adequately safe store and the
Contractor shall maintain a register for their control and use.

3.6.4 Excavation For Structures

a) Excavation for Structures shall be done down to a suitable bearing strata as approved
by CLIENT. Maintain a tolerance of +/- 25 mm beneath plain concrete foundations and
+/- 15 mm beneath reinforced concrete foundations and ground bearing slabs.











b)

Prior to commencing the excavation works, all lines, levels and nature ground levels
shall be agreed with the CLIENT.

Excavation shall include the removal of all earth, rocks, boulders, remains of buildings,
services not to be used and all items found but required to be removed, to permit the
construction of the building.

In excavating for foundations, take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate
by hand the last 200 mm to final grade, just before blinding is placed. Trim bottoms to
required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

c) Should excavations be extended by error or oversight to depths lower than required by
200 mm or less, the Contractor shall raise the bottom of the excavation to the required
level using 20 N/mm2 concrete of the type which is resistant to deterioration from the
chemicals present in the soils and ground water, at no additional cost to the Contract.

d) All excavations shall be kept clear of water arising from any cause.

e) The elevation of any point and the line of any edge or center of the grading shall
conform to that shown on the drawings within the tolerances stated below:


Tolerances from Tolerances from
True Level True Line

Basic Grading +0 +75 mm
-25 mm -75 mm
Embankments & + 75 mm +75 mm
Bunds +0 -75 mm


3.6.5 Excavation For Trenches

a)




b)


c)




d)

Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to be installed, and
sufficiently wide to provide ample working room. Provide required clearance on both
sides of pipe or conduit. Provide all necessary planking and strutting.

Excavate trenches to depths indicated and required. Slope trenches for piping to
establish indicated flow lines and invert elevations.

For pipes or conduit 125 mm or less in nominal size and for flat-bottomed multiple-duct
conduit units, do not excavate beyond indicated depths. Hand excavate bottom cut to
accurate elevations and support pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil.

For pipes or conduit 150 mm or larger in nominal size, tanks and other
mechanical/electrical work indicated to receive sub-base, excavate to sub-base depth
indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, to 150 mm below bottom of work to be










e)


f)


g)




h)






i)





3.6.6

supported, and backfill with 150 mm 20 N/mm2 concrete fill prior to installation of
mechanical/electrical piping conduits, etc.

Except as otherwise indicated, excavate for exterior water-bearing piping (water,
drainage) so top of piping is not less than 1000 mm below finished grade.

Grade bottoms of trenches as designated by CLIENT, notching under pipe bells to
provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.

Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling is
authorised by CLIENT. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe
systems.

Backfill trenches with concrete fill where trench excavations pass within 450 mm of
column or wall footings or foundations and which are carried below bottom of such
footings or foundations, or which pass under wall footings of foundations or as
indicated on drawings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing or
foundation.

For piping or conduit less than 750 mm below surface of roadways, provide 150 mm
thick concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping or conduit,
provide minimum 150 mm thick encasement (sides and) of concrete, prior to backfilling
or placement of roadway sub-base.

Inspection Of Excavation

The Contractor shall report to CLIENT when excavations are ready to receive permanent
materials. No material shall be placed in the excavation until the Contractor demonstrates to
CLIENT that the excavation has been carried out to the lines and levels required.

3.7


Removal of Unsuitable Material

3.7.1 The CLIENT may order the excavation and removal of any material deemed unsuitable for
supporting fill, pavements or structures to be placed thereon, and its replacement by
suitable fill material.

3.7.2 Where the excavation reveals a combination of suitable and unsuitable materials the
Contractor shall, unless otherwise agreed by the CLIENT, carry out the excavation in such
a manner that the suitable materials are excavated separately for use in the Works without
contamination by the unsuitable materials.

3.7.3 Over Excavation: If somewhere and for any reason excavations are executed beyond
the established lines and without the CLIENT's previous approval, the CONTRACTOR shall
backfill in layers not to exceed 200mm irrespective of plant type. Compaction shall be
95% MDD and in accordance with BS 1377. Last 200 mm to be filled with concrete in
case the excavation is receiving structural foundation.








3.7.4 Drainage of Excavated Areas: Grading in the vicinity of excavations shall be controlled
to prevent surface water from flowing into excavated areas.

The excavation shall at all times be well drained, kept free from storm water, percolating
water or subsoil water.

The CONTRACTOR shall make good at his own expense any damage that may result
from his failure to keep the excavation free from water.

3.8 Soil Disposal

3.8.1


3.8.2






3.8.3

Excavated material from the Works selected by the CLIENT for re-use shall be placed
directly in its final position or may be stocked on site as directed by the CLIENT.

No excavated suitable material other than that surplus to requirements of the Contract
shall be removed from the site except on the direction or with the permission of the
CLIENT. Should the CONTRACTOR be permitted to remove suitable material from the
site to suit his operational procedure, then he shall make good at his own expense any
consequent deficit of filling arising there from.

Suitable material and sweet soil surplus to the total requirements of the Works and all
unsuitable material shall be removed from the sites to approved dumping area by
Municipality of Abu Dhabi.

3.9 Protection Of Services

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all permanent mains, services etc. serving
adjacent buildings where affected by excavations. All protection of services shall be
carried-out to the regulations of ADNOC Distribution's Fire, Safety & Environment
Department and to the approval of the CLIENT.

3.9.1




a)





b)

Clean-Up

Upon completion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall leave project site clear of debris
and surplus material resulting from the construction operations. The CONTRACTOR
shall dispose of all debris and surplus materials off site limits in a manner meeting all
local authority requirements.

Remove and legally dispose off the site all unsuitable excavated material and found
rubble from the demolition of existing structures on site. Remove the material and
rubble as it is excavated. Do not stockpile excavated material and rubble on the site.




- END OF SECTION -









DIVISION 31 EARTH WORK
31 23 23.13 BACK FILL

1 .0 GENERAL

1.1








1.2


Section Includes

1.1.1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
1.1.2 Co-ordinate with Section 03 30 00 - Cast In Place Concrete and Divisions of Mechanical
and Electricals.

Quality Assurance

1.2.1



1.2.2

Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable
requirements of relevant B.S. Standards and as approved by CLIENT.

Testing and Inspection Service: Employ an independent Geotechnical Inspection and
Testing company to perform soil testing and inspection services, for quality control
during earthwork operations.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1 Test Reports -: Submit three copies of the following reports prepared by the inspection
and testing company:

1.3.1.1



1.3.1.2

1.3.1.3

1.3.1.4



1.3.1.5



1.3.1.6

Condition and suitability of substrates to accept concrete blinding and
foundation.

Field density test reports.

Test reports on backfill material brought to the site.

Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing
tests of each strata tested.

One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of backfill
brought to the site.

Test reports for compaction of backfill materials.

1.3.2 Method Statement - Contractor shall provide a method statement indicating
methodology, sequence, equipment intended to be used, for CLIENT 's reference and
approval.









1 .4





1.5



Related Documents

Drawings and general provisions of the AGREEMENT, including CONTRACT CONDITIONS and
SPECIFICATION Sections, apply to work of this section.

Summary

This section covers:-

Procurement and supply of materials related to earthwork, delivery, transportation,
handling and storing at site.
Survey of the site.
Cleaning and grubbing, stock pilling and disposal of cut material.
All necessary safety measures.
Testing, preparing ground surface to final grade and levels.
Extent of earthwork shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

1 .6


Reference Standards

Earthwork shall be performed in compliance with Drawings, tests and with the requirements of
the specifications of the British Standard Institute (BSI), American Association of State Highway
and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), and the specifications of the American Society of
Testing and Materials (ASTM) as noted below:

British Standard Institute

BS 1377:1990 Methods of Test for Soils for Civil Engineering Purposes



American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

C 136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates C
142 Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates
D 421 Practice for Dry Preparation of Soil Samples for Particle Size Analysis and Determination
of Soil Constants
D 422 Particle Size Analysis of Soils
D 427 Shrinkage Factors of Soils
D698
D854
D1556
D1557

D 1586
D 2167
D 2487
Moisture Density Relation of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures
Specific Gravity of Soils
Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method
Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb (4.54
kg) Hammer and 18 in (457 mm) Drop
Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils
Density and Unit Weight of Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method
Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes







D 2940 Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Sub-bases for Highways or Airports

The American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)

T-191 Sand Cone Method

























































2. PRODUCTS

2.1


Soil Materials:

Materials for backfilling should comply with BS 6031. The chemical composition of the fill shall be
as per BS 1377. Any fill material placed within 500 mm of any concrete structure shall be free of
chemicals in such concentration that it would cause a deleterious effect on the concrete. It should
not contain any Unsuitable material, which is defined/explained below.

2.1.1 Unsuitable Materials: shall mean other than Suitable Materials and shall among
others include:

Particles in excess of 75 mm size
Organic material, peat, logs, stumps and perishable materials
Dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to spontaneous combustion,
metal, rubber or synthetic material.
Material with undefined properties
Materials with high salt content
Materials having a moisture content greater than the maximum specified
Building rubber and domestic and industrial wastes
Soils and rock susceptible to deterioration/change of their properties
Gypsum, and dredged materials
Materials susceptible to volume change, including marine, mud, swelling clays and
collapsible soils.
Soils of liquid limit exceeding 30% and/or plasticity index exceeding 6%.
Any other material which the CLIENT may deem to be unsuitable for earthworks.


2.1.2


Suitable Materials: Materials excavated from the site or imported from outside that
are in conformance with the specifications and are approved by the CLIENT and the
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER for their intended use. Additionally, they shall be free
from refuse, large stones or rocks, or other material which might prevent proper
compaction or cause the compacted fill or embankment to perform inadequately or to
have insufficient stability or bearing capacity for the superimposed loads to which it is
likely to be subjected. Material shall have a maximum allowable chlorides content of
1% and a maximum allowable sulphate content of 5%. Suitable Fill Material shall
comply with the following limits:

- Liquid Limit (AASHTO - T89) 25% max.
- Plasticity Index (AASHTO - T90) 6% max.
- Total Water Soluble Salts (BS1377) 5% max.
- Minimum Soaked CBR of 30% when the material is compacted to 95% of MDD
- Maximum Chloride contents 1%








- Maximum allowable Sulphates 5%
- Maximum particle size to be not more than 100mm.
- MDD is the maximum dry density by BS1377 Test 13.
- CBR values are to be determined by BS 1377 Test 16.

Rock shall mean those geological strata or deposits so designated on the Drawings
and any hard, natural or artificial material requiring the use of approved pneumatic
tools for its removal, but excluding individual masses less than 0.20 cubic meters.
2.1.3 Granular Fill: Washed, evenly graded, crushed stone, with 100% passing a 20 mm
sieve and not more than 5% passing a 6 mm sieve.

2.2 Common Excavation: Common excavation shall mean any excavated materials including soil
and rock. All common excavation shall be classified as suitable or unsuitable materials for use as
fill.

2.3 Concrete Fill: Compressive strength 20N/mm
2
.












































3. EXECUTION

3.1 General:

Workmanship shall comply with BS 8000 Part 1, Sections 3. 1, 3.2 & 3.3

3.2 Site Surveying And Setting Out

Before work commences on the site, the Contractor shall carry out a survey of the levels of
the site and obtain the verification of the CLIENT of these levels. Levels shall be taken on a
grid to be agreed by the CLIENT, and the Contractor shall produce a drawing of these
levels for record purposes. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up and
maintaining a site datum level. "Zero" datum shall be the level of the top of the ground
floor slab of the
proposed buildings. Information pertaining to the nature of the ground may be given to the
Contractor, when available but without any guarantee of its correctness or accuracy.

The Contractor shall be responsible for accurately setting out the works to the specified
lines, levels, and positions in relation to the building lines and existing structures.

3.3 Placing of Fill

3.3.1


3.3.2





3.3.3


3.3.4













3.3.5

Areas of fill shall be built up over their full width, and damage to the compacted layers
due to lack of control of construction traffic shall be made good by the Contractor.

Materials Other than Rock Fill :- All material other than rock fill placed in areas of fill
shall be deposited and compacted as soon as practicable after excavation in layers not
exceeding 200mm loose depth unless as a result of compaction trials the CLIENT
approves spreading to a greater depth up to a maximum of 300mm loose depth.

The field density of layers not exceeding 200mm shall be tested in accordance with BS
1377 Test 15a.

Compacting of Fill Material :- All filling material used in earthworks shall be
compacted to Specification and the Contractor shall submit to the CLIENT for approval
his proposals for the compaction of each main type of material to be used in the filled
areas, the types of plant to be used, the number of passes and the loose depth of
layer. The Contractor shall carry out compaction trials for the earthworks,
supplemented by any approved Independent laboratory investigations, as required by
the CLIENT using an approved procedure proposed by the CONTRACTOR and he shall
satisfy the CLIENT that all the specified requirements regarding compaction can be
achieved. Compaction trials with the main types of materials likely to be encountered
shall be completed before the works, with the corresponding materials, will be allowed to
commence.

Compaction Requirements:- The Suitable fill material shall be compacted to 95
percent maximum dry density. Suitable fill material placed within 200mm of formation
level shall in addition have a minimum soaked CBR Value of 30 percent. Maximum dry










3.3.6


3.3.7


3.3.8





3.3.9

density is determined by the modified AASHTO tests carried out in accordance with BS
1377 (1975) Test No.13.

Testing :- During earthworks construction CLIENT shall instruct control tests to
determine the degree of compaction achieved. Tests shall include:

Dry Density/Moisture Content BS 1377: Test 13 or Test 14, at a minimum rate of 3
tests per 500 square meters for each layer of fill.

In-situ Dry Density BS 1377: Test 15, at a minimum rate of 3 tests per 500 square
meters for each layer of fill. (For compliance with this test the three results may at the
discretion of the CLIENT be averaged. However no individual result is to be less than
95%).

Procedure in the event of compaction being unacceptable:-

If the material deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot be
compacted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, the Contractor shall,
at the CLIENT's discretion, either:

a- make good by removing the material either to tip or elsewhere until it is in suitable
physical condition for re-use, and replacing it with suitable material;

or

b- cease work on the material until its physical condition is again such that it can be
compacted as described in the Contract.

3.4 Protection Of Services

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all permanent mains, services etc. serving
adjacent buildings where affected by excavations. All protection of services shall be
carried-out to the regulations of ADNOC Distribution's Fire, Safety & Environment
Department and to the approval of the CLIENT.

3.4.1




a)





b)

Clean-Up

Upon completion of work, the CONTRACTOR shall leave project site clear of debris
and surplus material resulting from the construction operations. The CONTRACTOR
shall dispose of all debris and surplus materials off site limits in a manner meeting all
local authority requirements.

Remove and legally dispose off the site all unsuitable excavated material and found
rubble from the demolition of existing structures on site. Remove the material and
rubble as it is excavated. Do not stockpile excavated material and rubble on the site.












3.5

Poor Ground Treatment Of Soft Areas

Any subterranean cavity found within the area of the buildings shall be dredged of any soft
material and then filled to the CLIENT's instruction to ensure that the cavity concerned does
not adversely affect the permanent works in any way.

Under foundations the wells or cavities will be filled with mass concrete or equivalent cement
grout. Elsewhere, wells will be filled with approved consolidated filling as indicated in item 14
below, to match the surrounding ground but cavities will be left or filled as instructed by the
CLIENT.

Where soft areas occur treat as follows :

Initially non-friable boulders of sizes between 150 - 300 mm shall be end tipped over the area
and rolled until the area is stabilized to the satisfaction of the CLIENT. Further stones of 10 - 70
mm size shall be rolled into the area until all the areas are leveled and well bound.

3.6





3.7


Minerals

The Contractor is strictly prohibited from digging for sand, gravel or other minerals and no sand or
gravel arising from the excavations may be used in these works.

Ground Preparation Below Formation

Where any material below the natural ground level under embankments or below formation level in
cuttings is required to be excavated it shall be removed to such a depth and over such areas as
are shown on the drawings, or as the CLIENT shall direct, and disposed of in a manner depending
on its nature and condition at the time. The resultant excavation shall be backfilled with the
material defined on the drawings, or as the CLIENT shall direct and shall be compacted as specified,
except in circumstances where the backfill has to be deposited below standing water. In such
cases the Contractor shall use only an approved granular material of maximum size not greater
than 300 mm and which on analysis by sieving complies with the requirements of Table 1 below
and may be deposited below water without the associated use of compaction plant.

Table 1 : Free Draining Material

B. S. Sieve Size

10 mm 5
mm
0.60 mm
0.075 mm


Percentage by Weight Passing

Up to 100
Not more than 85
Not more than 45
Not more than 5

Where the CLIENT shall direct, approved rock fill shall be placed directly on to naturally occurring
material. Such rock fill material shall have a "10 percent fines" value or not less than 10 tonnes when
tested in accordance with BS 812 and shall be graded from 300 mm to 150 mm with not more than








10% less than 150 mm in size. The rock fill material shall be deposited and compacted to the
satisfaction of the CLIENT.

3.8 Required Bearing Capacity

The Contractor shall take care of all necessary measures to get required bearing capacity, indicated in "Soil
Investigation Report", to CLIENT's satisfaction.

After all excavations are finished, and the soil layers are prepared and before any new works are laid on
them. The contractor shall inform the CLIENT when the excavations are ready for inspection. The
inspection should be carried out by qualified geotechnical engineer who should furnish an inspection
report.

Should the soil condition, after the CLIENT has been informed that the excavations are ready for inspection,
be such that the CLIENT deems it necessary to carry out plate bearing tests in accordance with ASTM D
1194. The Contractor shall perform such tests to the satisfaction of the CLIENT. Any expenses incurred in
consequence of the performance of such tests are deemed to be included by the Contractor in his own
tender.

3.9 Backfilling

a) Filling under foundations, Ground Slabs, etc.

If it is required to lay the foundations on levels higher than the existing ground or to improve the soil layers
below foundation the materials to be used for such purposes should be selected granular fill materials
complying with the specified limits in the table below:

The fill shall be laid on soil layer that it was trimmed to a clean, properly compacted uniform surface to the
lines and levels shown in the drawings. Any soft areas considered unsatisfactory by the CLIENT shall be
taken out and the extra depth filled with approved selected granular fill.

Selected Fill Materials

1.




















Grading Limits



Sieve Size
2" (50mm)
1" (25mm)
3/8" (9.5mm)
No. 4 (4.75mm)
No. 10 (2.0mm)
No. 40 (0.425mm)
No. 200
(0.075mm)







100
100
50-85
35-65
25-50
15-30
5-10

























2. Other Physical and Mechanical Properties

Item

1



2

3

4
5


6
7


Test Decription

Soil Classification



Liquid Limit

Plasticity Index

Organic Matter
Sulphate Content
(Water Extraction)

Los Angeles Abrasion
4 days soaked CBR (95%
of Max. Dry Density in
accordance with heavy
proctor)

Standard Test
Method
AASHTO T 145-91
(1995)

BS 1377:P2:Cl.4

BS 1377:P2:Cl5

BS 1377:P3:Cl.3
BS 1377:P3:Cl5


ASTM C 131
BS 1377:P4:Cl.7


Specified Limits

A1a, A1-b



25% Max.

6% Max.

0.1% Max.
Max. 1.2 gm/liter


Max. 50%
Min. 30%



b) Filling Around Foundation, Trenches, and Ground Slabs

Foundations, trenches, column baises and like are to be filled with selected excavated material, the
excavated material to be used in works should be tested for its suitability as a fill material before using it. If
the excavated materials were not suitable for backfilling imported materials should be used. Materials
should be used, excavated or imported materials should comply with the following:


FILL AROUND FOUNDATIONS, TRENCHES,
COLUMN BAISES AND THE LIKE

Item
1

2
3
4
5
6

7
8

Test Description
Materials larger than 63mm

Materials finer than 0.075mm
Soil Classification
Liquid Limit
Plasticity Index
Water Soluble Salts (Sulphate
Content)
Organic Matter
Max. Dry Density

Standard Test Method
BS 1377:P:2, Cl.9

BS 1377:P:2, Cl.9
AASHTO M 145:1991 (1995)
BS 1377:P2, Cl.4
BS 1377:P2, Cl.5
BS 1377:P3:1990, Cl.5

BS 1377:P3:Cl.3
BS 1377:P3:4:Cl.3.5 and 3.6

Specified Limits
No materials largers than
75mm
Max. 12%
A1-a, A1-b, A2-4
35% Max. 10%
Max.
1.2 gm/L Max.

0.1% Max.
Not less than 1.6gm/cm3







9






c)

California Bearing Ratio, soaked 4
days (at 95% max. dry density,
determined by BS 1377:P4:Cl3.5
and 3.6



Compaction of Fill



BS 1377:P4:Cl.7

30% Min.

The specified thickness of a layer of fill/backfill is the thickness after compaction has be
completed.
The Maximum Dry Density and the Optimum Moisture Content at which this density is
achieved are the values obtained by BS 1377:Part 4:1990, Method 3.5 or 3.6,
(Determination of the Dry Density Moisture Content Relationship (4.5kg Rammer
Method).
The field density tests called for in the specification are those described in BS 1377:Part
9:1990, Method 2.1 or 2.2 - Determination of the Dry Density of soil on site.

d)







e)
















f)






g)





General Requirements

Fill shall be compacted in layers of optimum thickness for the compaction plant in use but in any
case not thicker than 250mm except in the case of rock fill.

Fill shall be compacted to Dry Density not less than 95% of the Max. Dry Density.

Compactive Effort

Fill shall be compacted using the type of equipment, the depth of layer and the number of
passes determined in accordance to the table below, and the notes appended thereto, provided
that the required dry density is obtained. If the dry density is not obtained the depth of layers
shall be decreased or the number of passes shall be decreased or the number of passes shall be
increased, or the type of equipment shall be changed until the required dry density is achieved.

If the contractor proposes to use compaction equipment which is not covered by the provided tables,
he shall place fill in a trial section to a total depth of at least 600mm using the plant, layer thickness
and number of layers which he proposes, in order to demonstrate the adequacy of his proposals. The
trial area may form part of the permanent works provided it complies with the specifications.

Plate Bearing Tests

When it is required to lay selected fill under foundations, for soil improvement purposes or to higher
the foundation level, after the laying, compacting and testing as specified above, at the completion
of each four layers (250mm x 4 = 1.0m) it is required to check the quality of the laid fill by plate
bearing tests in accordance with ASTM C 1194.

Dispoal of Surplus Material








Surplus excavated material and all unsuitable material shall be removed from site and run to spoil
by the Contractor in tips provided by himself and approved by the CLIENT or as otherwise directed by
the CLIENT



i) Settlement

The Contractor shall be responsible for making good all settlement of filling that may occur up to the
end of the maintenance period of the Contract, unless stated otherwise in the specification.



- END OF SECTION -















































DIVISION 31 EARTH WORK
31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL


1 GENERAL

1 .1 . Related Documents

Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section


1 .2 . Submittals

1 .2 .1 Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA


1 .2 .2


1 .2 .3




1 .2 .4
(Environmental Protection Agency)-Registered Label.

Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying
that treatments furnished comply with requirements.

Qualification Data: For firms and persons to demonstrate their capabilities and
experience. Include lists of completed projects with names and addresses of
projects, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other related
information.

Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termite control treatment is
completed, submit report for CLIENT record information, including the following as
applicable:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

Date and time of application.
Moisture content of soil before application.
Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
Areas of application.
Water source for application.

1 .2 .5 Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


1 .3 . Quality Assurance

1 .3 .1





1 .3 .2

Applicator Qualifications: A licensed PCO (Pest Control Operator) having license to
apply termite control treatment with authorities having jurisdiction where Project is
located. The sub-contractor should be minimum five year experienced and has
completed termite control treatment for projects similar this Project with a record of
successful in-service performance.

The PCO should have an experienced workers trained and approved by bait
station system manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.










1 .3 .3 Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a
Federal registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having
jurisdiction.

1 .4 . Project Conditions

Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1 .5 . Coordination

1 .5 .1



1 .5 .2

1.6. Warranty

1 .6 .1




1 .6 .3





1 .6 .3

Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and
concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-
supported slabs, before construction.

Install bait Station System after construction, including landscaping, complete.



General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive
Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties
made by Contractor under requirement of the Contract Documents.

Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying
that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will
prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or
damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace
damage caused by termite infestation.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Provisional acceptance certificate.

1.7. Maintenance Service

Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring,
inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to
Owner, in the form of a standard yearly ( or other period ) continuing service
agreement, starting on the date of Provisional acceptance certificate. State services,
obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.





















2 PRODUCTS

2 .1 .

Soil Treatment

Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water
or foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment
solutions that are not harmful to plants. Contractor shall provide MSDS (Material Safety Data
Sheet) of the termiticide.





















































3 EXECUTION

3.1




3.2

















3.3





3.4

Examination

Examine the site and proceed with application only when it is in satisfactory conditions as per
the requirement of the manufacturer.

Preparation

General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and
with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous
sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and
roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.

Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.

Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventor, complying with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



Application, General

Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.


Applying Soil Treatment

3 .4 .1

Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide
quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum
specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered
Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier
or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the
treatment evenly. Anti Termite treatment shall be provided to all the following
elements/areas:

a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Slabs-on-Grade.
Foundations.
Crawlspaces.
Masonry.
Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will
be penetrated.


3 .4 .2 Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until
completely dry.









3 .4 .3



3 .4 .4

3 .4 .5

Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted
until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-
Registered Label instructions.

Post warning signs in areas of application and provide safety supervision.

Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,
grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application.



END OF SECTION





















































CIVIL & ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS


Division 32 00 00 - Site Construction
- 32 14 13.13 - Interlocking Precast Concrete Unit Paving
- 32 17 23 - Pavement Marking





















































DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 14 13.13 INTERLOCKING PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING



1.0 GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

1 .1 .1


1 .1 .2


Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General
and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section
Supply and installation of interlocking concrete pavers, concrete Kerbs to separate
pavers from the road paving, all to CLIENT'S approval and to the approval of local
Authorities having Jurisdiction.


1.2 Description of Work

1 .2 .1 This section of the Specification covers the supply and installation of block paving,
and precast concrete kerbs and associated bedding materials.
1 .2 .2 The contractor is to construct paved areas using patterned concrete block paving
as shown on the drawings.

1.3 Submittals

1.3.1






1.3.2



1.3.3

Samples: Contractor shall submit three (3) samples of each type and colour of
unit pavers for approval. The samples submission procedures are intended to
assist with the design selection; the Contractor's assistance is mandatory in this
process. Resubmit samples as often as is deemed necessary by CLIENT to
obtain approval. Mock-up shall match approved samples.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings as specified for CLIENT'S approval.
Show layout of Kerbs, pavers, patterns and colours, installation details and
interface details with adjacent constructions.
Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification indicating that materials
supplied and installed are in strict accordance with the requirements of this
Section.

1.4 Quality Assurance

1.3.1

Mock-up: Provide sample installation (mock-up) of road pavers, and Kerbsing to
size and location as directed by CLIENT. The mock-up shall be equivalent to
area of 2 m x 2 m. Mock-up shall show installation techniques, quality of
workmanship, patterns and jointing to adjacent construction. Modify mock-up as
often as necessary to obtain CLIENT's approval. Finished work shall match
approved mock-up.









1.3.2 Samples: Shall be tested in accordance with relevant BS standards. Tests
shall be carried out to verify the transverse strength and water absorption of the
pavers.




























































2. PRODUCTS
2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE KERBS
The precast concretes products, referred to as a product of products in this part of BS 7263 are
intended for use in the construction of carriageways and footways laid in accordance with BS 7263 ;
Part 2.
2.1.1 Scope :
The part of BS 7263 specifies requirements for the following precast concrete products :
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)



2.1.2
Wet pressed and semi-dry flags
Kerbs;
Channels;
Edging;
Quadrants.



Definitions :
For the purposes of this part of BS 7263 the definitions in BS G100; Subsection 1.5.1, from which the
following definitions are taken, apply.
1 .1 Nominal size. The size which identifies a component.
1 .2 Work size. The target size of a building component specified for its
manufacture.
2.1.3 Binders
Products shall be made using one or more of the binders complying with the appropriate British
standards as given in table 1.


2.1.4 Aggregates.
Products shall be made using one or more of the aggregates complying with the appropriate
standard as given in table 2.


2.1.5 Water.
The water shall be either of drinking quality or shall comply with BS 3148.
2.1.6 Admixtures
Admixtures shall comply with the uniformity requirements of BS 5075 and if appropriate with the
acceptance tests of the standard.















Table 1. Binders
Type of binder
Portland cement
Portland blastfurnace
cement
Sulphate resisting
Portland cement
Portland Pulverized-fuel
Ash cement
Pulvarized -fuel ash
Ground granulated
Blastfuranace slagT
Lime
Low heat Portland
Blastfurnace cement
Pozzolanic cement with
Pulverized-fuel ash as pozzolana



Table 2. Aggregates
Type of aggregate Natural
aggregates


Air-colled blastfurnace slag


Pulverized-fuel ash
Ground granulated blastfurnace slag





Standard to be complied with
BS 12
BS 146 : Part 2



BS 4027


BS 6588


BS 3892 : Part 1
BS 6699



BS 890
BS 4246 : Part : 2



BS 6610






Standard to be complied with
BS 882 : 1983 (except grading
requirements in clause 5)
BS 1047 : 1983 (except grading
requirements in 4.8)
BS 3892 : Part 2
BS 6699



2.1.7


2.1.8



Pigments
Pigments shall comply with BS 1014.
Air content
The concrete used in kerbs channels quadrants and edgings produced by the wet cast process
shall have the following entrained air contents measured in accordance with BS 1881 ; part
106 : -








(i) Products with 14mm nominal maximum aggregate size ; 6% 1.5%.
(ii) Products with 20mm nominal maximum aggregate size : 5% 1.5%
2.1.9






2.1.10

a.
Finish
Products described as natural shall contain no pigment where products are made with two-part
mixes the surface layer shall be not less 12 mm thick for flags or not less than 25 mm thick for
all other products. The surface layer shall be produced as an integral part of the product.


Dimensions and tolrances

Dimensions

Flags sized shall be given in table 3.



Table 3. Flag sizes

Flag type

A
B
C
D
E
F
G

Nominal size
mm
600 x 450
600 x 600
600 x 750
600 x 800
450 x 450
400 x 400
300 x 300

Work size
mm
598 x 448
598 x 598
598 x 748
598 x 898
448 x 448
398 x 398
298 x 298

Thickness
Mm
50 or 63 50
or 83 50 or
63 50 or 63
50 or 70 50
or 65 50 or
60
NOTE ; Tactile flags type TA are normally available in sites of flag types E,F and
G with an average thickness of 50mm, Tactile flags are thus designated type
TA/E TA/P or TA/G depending on their size.

Tactile flags shall be provided with domes on the wearing surface. A wearing surface edge chamfer with
dimensions 5 1 mm vertically and 5 1mm horizontally measured at right angles, shall be provided on
flags type E, F and G unless otherwise specified.
b. Kerbs

Kerbs channels and edgings shall have a length in the range 450 mm to 915 m. The length shall be
measured along the vertical contact face between the kerbs and channel. The radius of the vertical
contact face of a kerb or channel shall be as given in table 4. All angles except those resulting from
splayed radiuses or chamfered force meeting as shown in figure 1 shall be square.




Table 4. External and Internal radii for kerbs and channels









External only Internal and external
m m
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.5 6.0 7.5
9.0 10.5 12.0

c. Quadrants :

Quadrants shall have faces to match the profiles for kerbs type 6N, SP HB2 or HB3 respectively.

d. Dropper Kerbs:

Dropper Kerbs shall have the sizes shown in relevant figure 1(k) or (1) dropper kerbs type or type 2
respectively.


e. Tolerances

Flags : the maximum dimensional deviation of any flag measured in accordance with
appendix A shall be as follows :

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

thickness 3mm.
dome height (tactle flags) ; 1 mm
length and width 2mm
squareness of plan (difference between diagonals)
- flag types A, B,C,D : 6 mm
- flag types E,F,G 3 mm
(v) flatness, winding and bowing;
- measured over 550 to 850 mm 2 mm -
measured over 250 to 400 mm 1 mm

Kerbs, channels and edging : The maximum dimensional deviations of any kerb channel
and edging measured as described in appendix A shall be as follows :

- length, width or height = 6 mm
- straightness and winding;
- measured over 550 to 850 mm 2 mm
- measured over 250 to 300 mm 1 mm
- squareness: 2 mm clearance.

f. Transverse strength

Flags

When sampled and tested as described the falling loads shall be not less than the
appropriate value given in table 5.










Table 5 Transverse strength of flag

Flag Type Minimum failing load for thickness
50 mm 60 mm 63 mm 65 mm 70mm
kN kN kN kN kN
8.3 12.7
B,C,D 11.1 16.9
E 8.0 18.6
F 9.1 15.4
G 9.6 13.8

g. Kerbs, channels and edgings
When sampled and tested as described the failing loads shall be not less that the appropriate value
given in table 6.



Table 6. Transverse strength of Kerbs, channels and edging

Depth of
(see note 1)
mm
150
125
50
50
50
50
Dropper kerbs
125


Width as tested

mm
305
160
255
255
205
160
255 to 150

Failing load (
see note 2)
KN
32.2 8.0
13.3 3.1
2.7 2.0
10.3


Note 1 . Units are placed in the testing machine with the depth as settled being the smallest dimension.

Note 2 : The failing load for kerbs of various length may be obtained by extrication. e.g. if the failing load for
a 125 mm x 255 mm x 915 mm curb tested on a span of 750 mm is 13.3 kN the falling load for a 550 mm
curb of the same cross section tested on a span of x mm will be 13.3 x (750 / x )kN.

Notes 3: Outlet kerbs, quadrants and angle kerbs are not tested for transverse strength.

h. Water absorption.

Kerbs, channels, edgings and flags: When tested as described in appendix C the water
absorption shall not exceed the approximate value given in table 7.











Table 7. Maximum water absorption of kerbs, channels, edgings and flags.
Kerbs channels and quadrants % by mass 2.5 % by mass 4.0
shown in figure 1.

i. Sampling for independent testing.

Samples shall be taken before the products are laid and wherever practicable, whilst they are being
moved. e.g. during loading or unloading. A sample of three products shall be taken from a consignment of
not more than 1000 products. Each of the three products in the sample shall be taken from one of three
approximately equal sections or the consignment to be tested.
Each product of a sample shall be uniquely marked and accompanied by a certificate from the person
responsible for taking the samples, stating that sampling was carried out in accordance with BS 7263: Part 1.

The sample shall be dispatched to the test laboratory taking precautions to avoid damage to the products in
transit.

Note : Products used for the dimensional checks may subsequently be used for transverse strength or
water absorption, tests.

j. Marking

The following particulars relating to products made in accordance with this British Standard shall be clearly
marked on the delivery note, invoice, suppliers or manufacturers certificate or brochure relating to a
consignment of products:

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

The name trademark or other means of identification of the manufacturing plant.
The number and date of this British Standard, i.e BS 7263 : part 1 : 1990,
Type of binder constituent(s) used (see clause 3)
Type of admixture(s) used (see clause 8)
For flags, the type and thickness in millimeters. e.g. A50.

Marking BS 7263 : Part 1on or in relation to a product represents a manufacturer's declaration of
conformity, i.e a claim by or on behalf of the manufacturer that the product meets the requirements of the
standard. The accuracy of the claim is therefore solely the responsibility of the person making the claim.
Such a declaration is not to be confused with third party certificates of conformity which may also be
desirable.

2.2 IN-SITU CONCRETE KERBS

In-situ concrete kerbs shall be laid by an approved automatic kerbing machine or by a method approved by the
CLIENT. The kerbs shall be dense with regular sides, arises and chamfers finished to a fine surface free from
blow holes and dragging and shall be to the dimensions shown on the drawings.











The coarse and fine aggregates shall be as specified in the Concrete Specification with a ten per cent fines
value for the coarse aggregate of not less than 50kN when tested in accordance with BS 812. The nominal
maximum size of aggregate shall be 20 mm.

Concrete for kerbs shall have a 28 day cube strength of not less than 25.0 N/sq.mm. The concrete mix shall
contain not less than 280 kg nor more than 540 kg of sulphate-resisting cement per cubic meter. The ratio by
mass of free water to cement for saturated surface dry aggregate (the water/cement ratio) shall not exceed
0.50. The quantity of water used shall not exceed that required to produce a dense concrete with suitable
workability to obtain full compaction with the plant used. The mix shall be designed by the contractor who shall
prepare and compact trial mixes in the presence of the CLIENT using the same plant as that proposed for the
Works. The concrete mix and compaction plant shall be subject to the CLIENT's approval. After approval, no
variations shall be made to mix proportions or to any constituents without the CLIENT's prior consent.

Delivery, storage and batching of material and mixing, transporting and placing of concrete shall be as
specified in the Concrete Specification. Immediately after compaction and for 7 days thereafter the kerbs shall be
fully cured and protected from drying out and against the harmful effects of weather, including rain and rapid
temperature changes. The method of protection shall be subject to the CLIENT's approval. The use of coloured
curing membranes will not be permitted as the colour of the kerbs after weathering shall be similar to that of
adjacent precast units. Concrete not properly cured and protected will be rejected and shall be removed from
the Works.

Kerbs shall remain firmly secure on the surface on which they are cast. Kerbs shall be cut whilst the concrete is
green to form expansion/contraction joints at 3 m centers. Joints shall be filled and sealed with materials
approved by the CLIENT.

The vertical alignment of the finished curb shall not depart from the design level by more than 3 mm and, at
any point, the maximum deviation of the curb in line and level shall not be greater than 3 mm in 3 m.

2.3

PRECAST CONCRETE PAVING BLOCKS:
Interlocking block paving shall be 60 mm or 80 mm thick precast concrete block to shape, pattern, colours and
layout subject to approval. Block shall be uniform in shape and colour hard duty type suitable for vehicular
traffic supplied by an approved manufacturer conforming to the requirements of BS 6717 and laid on well
compacted bed of 50 mm layer of clean sharp crushed sand over minimum 150mm layer of road base material
compacted to 95% of the M.D.D. as obtained in BS 1377 test 13 (field density test to be carried out at a
frequency of 2 test per 1000 m2 as per BS 1377 test 15 B) and laid over a properly watered and compacted
base course. All the works shall be subject to final approval of the CLIENT.

2.3.1 Materials

(i)




(ii)


Cement:




Aggregates:

The cement used in the manufacture of precast concrete paving blocks
shall comply with the requirements of either BS 12, 4027 or BS 146. The
cement content of compacted concrete shall not be less than 400 kg/m3.

The aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring crushed aggregate to
comply with BS 882. The salt contents shall not exceed the following








limits:

Acid Soluble Chlorides:




Acid Soluble Sulphates:

0.06% by weight of Fine Aggregates
0.02% by weight of Coarse
Aggregates

0.3% by weight of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates

(iii) Water: The water shall be clean and free from any deleterious matter
having pH value in the basic range (7-9).

The inorganic impurities shall not exceed the following limits:
Total dissolved solids 2000 mg/litre
Chlorides 250 mg/litre
Sulphates 350 mg/litre
Alkali Carbonates & Bicarbonates 500 mg/litre

(iv) Pigments: Any pigments used shall comply with BS 1014

2.3.2 Dimensions & Tolerances

(i)






(ii)

Standard rectangular blocks shall be manufactured with a nominal length of 200 mm and a
nominal width of 100 mm or to match with existing. Alternative sizes and shapes shall have a
ratio of length to width on plan of not less than 1
1
/
2
or greater than 2
1
/
2
; the width shall not
be less than 80 mm or greater than 115 mm. The minimum normal thickness for paving
blocks of any size shall be 60 mm. The preferred nominal thickness shall be 60 and 80 mm.

All arrises shall be clean, plane and of uniform dimension. Wearing surface
areas shall not be less than 70% of the plan area.

Tolerances: Length +/- 2 mm
Width +/- 2 mm
Thickness +/- 3 mm
2.3.3

(i)




(ii)
Compressive Strength

The average compressive strength of the block on delivery when sampled and tested in the
manner described below, shall be not less than 49 N/sq mm in wet conditions. No individual
block strength shall fall below 40 N/sq mm in wet conditions.

Correction factors for chamfers and thickness shall be :
___________________________________________________________________
Block Thickness Correction Factors
___________________________________________________________________








Plain Block Chamfered Block

60 1.00 1.06
80 1.12 1.18




2.3.4






2.3.5




Sampling Blocks
Two blocks shall be drawn from each group of 1000 blocks for sampling, 10 blocks every designated
5000 block section or part thereof in a consignment. All samples shall be clearly marked at the time of
sampling in such a way that the designated section or part thereof and the consignment represented by
the sample, are clearly defined.

Test for Compressive Strength
The sample specimens shall be tested in a wet condition after being stored for at least 24 hours in
water maintained at a temperature of 27 Deg.C +/- 3 Deg.C. Before the specimens are submerged in
water, the necessary area shall be determined as follows:

(i) Where possible, the plan area or the wearing surface area shall be calculated by
multiplying the length by the width.

(ii) Alternatively the plan area or the wearing area shall be calculated by cutting out shapes of
cardboard and weighing it to the nearest 0.01 g.

As = 20000 ms
m
WhereAs = Area of block (sq mm)
ms = Mass of cardboard shape matching test block
(g); the block shall be placed wearing surface
uppermost on the cardboard.
m = Mass of 200 x 100 mm cardboard rectangle (g)
cut from the same cardboard.

In case of chamfer or radius, the width of chamfer or radius shall be measured and marked on the
cardboard shape. This shape shall then be cut out accurately and weighed for calculation of the
wearing surface area. Plywood, nominally 4 mm thick, shall be used as packing between the upper
and lower faces of the specimen and the machine platens, and these boards shall be larger than the
specimen by a margin of at least 5 mm at all points. Fresh packing shall be used for each specimen
tested.

The load shall be applied without shock and increased continuously at a rate of approximately 15
N/sq.mm. per minute until no greater load can be sustained. The maximum load applied to the
specimen shall be recorded. The strength shall be expressed to the nearest 0.1 N/sq.mm.

2.3.6 Test for Water Absorption








Blocks shall be tested for water absorption in accordance with BS 1881. Blocks shall be
deemed acceptable provided that the maximum absorption does not exceed:

a) 2% after 10 mins. b)
5% after 24 hours

2.3.7 Certificate of Compliance
This certificate is to be provided by the manufacturer at the time of sale as peritem no.12 of BS 6073




















































3. EXECUTION


3.1 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION

3.1.1 EMBANKMENT SUBGRADE CONSTRUCTION

These works shall consist of construction road embankment, including preparation of the areas upon which
they are to be placed, placing and compacting approved material within areas where unsuitable material
has been removed, and placing and compacting approved embankment material all in accordance with the
lines, grades and cross sections shown on the drawings.

3.1.2 MATERIALS FOR FILLS, EMBANKMENTS, AND
SUBGRADES

A- Soil Suitable for Fills, Embankments, and Subgrades

Max. Dry Density not less than 1.7 (BS 1377:P4, Test 3.5 or 3.6)
Water Soluble Salt not more than 5% (BS 1377:P3:1990)
Soil Classification: Materials of A-1, A-3 , A-2-4 (when confined) as per AASHTO T 145-
91 (1995). Materials of A-6, and A-7 should not be used.
Maximum size-not more than 2/3 of the layer thickness.
Expansive soils should not be used.
California Bearing ratio 4 days soaked and compacted at 95% of the max. dry density in
accordance with BS 1377:P4:1990, Method 3.5 or 3.6 should be not less than 30%.

3.1.3 ROADBASE CONSTRUCTION

The road bases should consists of granular materials, naturally occurring gravel, blended as
necessary with fine or coarse materials and screened to produce the specified gradation.

The gravel shall consist of hard, durable and sound stones, free from deleterious substances.
The materials should comply with the following:

- Gypsum Content (SO
3
) 5% max. -
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles 1% max. -
Flakiness and elongated particles 30% max.
- Max. Dry density When tested in
accordance with
- BS 1377:P.4, Methods 3.5 or 3.6 2.0 gm/cm
3
min
- Sand equivalent 25% min.
- Los Angeles Abrasion 30% Max.
- California Bearing Ratio
(100% of BS 1377:P4: Test 7) 80% Min.
- Soundness by sodium sulphate (5 cycles) 12%
- Liquid Limit 25% max.









- Plasticity Index 6% max.

The material shall comply with the following grading limits:

63mm (2 1/2")
50mm (2")
37.5mm (1 ")
25mm (9")
12.5mm (1/2")
4.75mm (No. 4)
2.00mm (No. 10)
0.425mm (No.
40) 0.075mm
(No. 200)
% Passing by Weight
-
100
80-100 60-
95 47-80
30-60 22-45
10-30 5-12

Granular sub-base material of compacted granular material and recycled aggregates and/or
aggregates shall be from industrial waste by-products (no chalk). No Asbestos Containing
Materials (ACMs) are used within the development.

3.1.4 COMPACTION OF FILLS , EMBANKMENTS, SUBGRADES AND
ROADBASES

The materials shall be placed on the previous layer in uniform layer or layers not exceeding 200mm
thickness (after compaction).

The materials shall be compacted by means of approved compaction equipment.

Rolling shall continue until the entire thickness of each layer is thoroughly and uniformly compacted: to
95% of the max. dry density ( Modified Proctor), except the road base which shall be compacted to
100%.

REQUIRED TESTS AND FREQUENCIES


Material Type Required Test Frequencies
Fills, Embankment * Grading * Test for each source
and Subgrade * Liquid Limit
* Plasticity Index
* Water Soluble Salts
* Sulphate Content
* Proctor
* CBR
* Classification
** In-situ Density (Compaction Test)
***Plate Bearing
* For every 2000cu. Meter
* When material is changed.
**Three tests per 500 square meters for
each layer
***Each 1.0m thick wherever applicable






Native Soil











Road Bases













3.1.5

* Grading
* Liquid Limit
* Plasticity Index
* Classification
* Proctor
* CBR
** In-situ Density

* Grading
* Liquid Limit
* Plasticity Index
* Sand Equivalent
* Los Angeles Abrasion * Flakiness
* Elongation
* Proctor
* CBR
* Soundness
** In-situ Density


Laying Course

* Test for each source
* When materials changed
** Three tests per 500 square meters for
each layer





* Test for each source
* For every 2000 cu.meter *
When materials changed
** Three tests per 500 square meters for
each layer

a)















b)



c)

The laying course shall consist of clean sand with a practical size of 0.5 mm containing not more than 3% silt
plus clay by weight. The sand shall be obtained from a single source, allowed to drain, before use and
covered to minimise moisture changes.

Acid soluble sulphate and chloride contents shall not exceed 0.3% and 0.5% by weight respectively. Tests
shall be carried out to confirm achievement of these requirements at the rate of one set of tests for each 1000
m
2
in accordance with BS 812, Part 118 and Part 117 respectively.

The profile of the laying course before compaction shall be similar to that of the finished surface. The
maximum deviation from the design levels shall be +/- 5 mm. The laying course shall be placed to a level
which takes into account the compaction which occurs during vibration of the blocks, the amount of this
compaction shall be determined by trials prior to commencement of surfacing.

The surface course shall consist of approved pre-cast concrete blocks. The concrete constituents shall comply
with the requirements of the Concrete Specification given elsewhere Cement shall be SRPC. Additional
requirements are contained in the following Clauses of this Section.
Concrete block shall be of precast hydraulically pressed type of the size and shape specified or indicated on
the Contract drawings.

Each load of precast concrete and paving blocks must be accompanied with the following documents :
i) A Certificate confirming that this particular consignment complies with relevant standard specifications
and that all necessary tests have been conducted.
ii) An identification trademark inscribed on each block pallet fixed by the producer.









iii) A certificate from the manufacturer, stating the category and dimension of blocks and the average
compression strength of the subject lot.

d)









e)










f)









g)




h)












i)

20 samples from each consignment of up to 10,000 blocks will be selected which the Contractor shall bring for
testing characteristics strength and dimensional accuracy at a testing centre to the approval of the CLIENT.

If the parameters of the specification are consistently met over the first 3 months of full production the
frequency of block testing will subsequently be relaxed to 20 random blocks from each consignment of up to
20,000 blocks. If any of the 20 test blocks do not comply with the requirements for compressive strength and
dimensional accuracy the whole consignment may be rejected.

The testing machine shall be of suitable capacity and capable of applying the required load at the rate specified
and shall comply with the relevant requirements of BS 1610 and BS 1181.

The average compressive strength of the 20 blocks on delivery when sampled and tested as specified shall not be
less than 48 N/m
2
in wet condition.

The thickness of each sample shall be measured to the nearest 1 mm at 4 different points using steel calipers.
The value of thickness measured shall have a maximum deviation of +/- 2 mm from the specified dimensions.

Blocks may be required to be tested for water absorption. The test shall be based on that specified
in BS 1881, Part 122, and the maximum acceptable limits for water absorption shall be :
2.4% absorbed after 10 minutes. 5%
absorbed after 24 hours.

The acceptable limits for water absorption may be required to be varied to achieve the minimum absorption
compatible with the aggregate approved for use in the paving blocks.

The colour of blocks shall be uniform and as detailed on the drawings or as directed. Samples of each different
colour shall be submitted for approval. The Contractor shall be responsible for any change in the shade of the
same colour and may be required to replace the discolored tiles after laying even during maintenance period.

Block laying shall commence right angle to the main pavement axis starting at one end of the area. The paving
blocks shall be laid in a herringbone pattern at 45
o
to the main pavement axis, or in any other pattern as
required with no extra cost.

Blocks shall be laid on black sand cushion so that blocks already laid are not disturbed. Blocks shall be placed to
fit closely together; the width of joints shall not exceed 3 mm.
Special edge blocks shall be used on all edges, which are parallel to or perpendicular to the main pavement
axis. Where the shape or dimensions of paved areas preclude the use of special blocks on all edges, cut
blocks shall be used. Blocks shall be cut to suit, using a mechanical block splitter or bolster chisel. In-situ
concrete shall not be used to make up to edge restraints.

The blocks shall be compacted to the required levels, using an approved plate vibrator as each of 100 m
2
of
paving is laid and checked.








The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.2 to 0.3 and a compaction force of 9 to
16 KN.

Joints shall be filled by brushing in black dry sand with a particle size of 0 to 3 mm and a maximum sulphate
content (as SO3) of 0.5% by weight. A further pass of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction. The
finished surface level shall be within 5 mm of the design level and the maximum deviation within the compacted
surface, measured by a 3 m straight edge, shall not exceed 5 mm. The level of any two adjacent blocks shall
not differ by more than 2 mm, in one meter.

3.1.6 Bond Pattern

(i)



(ii)





(iii)




(iv)



(v)

(vi)



(vii)

Precast paving blocks used for vehicular carriageways will be laid to a
herringbone pattern. The direction of the pattern shall be maintained throughout the total
area to be paved. Any change of direction will require the approval of the CLIENT.
The laying course shall be laid to compacted thickness of 50 mm plus a surcharge
necessary to provide the specified final bed thickness after vibration of the block paving.
During laying the sand shall be carefully screeded to a smooth surface to receive the paving
blocks. No compaction of the sand layer and no traffic including pedestrian is to be permitted
before the blocks are laid.
The profile of the laying course shall be similar to that of the finished surface. The maximum
deviation from the design levels shall be + 10 mm. The edge restraints to the paved area
shall be laid in advance of the laying course and all obstacles within the area, such as
manhole covers, shall be constructed to the correct finished levels.
The paving blocks shall be laid on the sand laying course in such a manner as not to disturb
the blocks already laid. Each block shall be placed firmly against its neighbour so that they fit
closely together.
The joints between blocks shall not exceed 3 mm.

Where blocks do not fit at the edge, restraints or other obstructions such as
manholes or upstands the gaps shall be filled using cut blocks. Blocks shall be cut using a
damaged during compaction shall be replaced at the discretion of the CLIENT.
Due allowance shall be made in the final levels of the base for the compaction
of the laying course above, which occurs when the paving blocks are being vibrated. The
amount of surcharge required for the laying course shall be determined by site trials prior to
the commencement of the actual surfacing and shall be repeated when the source of sand
supply or a change of weather conditions occurs.

3.1.7

(i)

(ii)

(iii)


Compaction

After each 20 sq.m., or such area that has been agreed with the CLIENT, has been laid, the blocks shall
be compacted to the required levels using a plate vibrator.
The plate vibrator shall have a plate area of 0.20 to 0.35 sq.m. and have a compaction force of 12-24
kN and a frequency of approximately 75-100Hz.
A minimum of two passes of the plate vibrator shall be made in each direction, i.e. at 90 degrees to
each other. Vibration shall continue until no further compaction of the sand layer is apparent. Fine dry








sand with particle size of 0.3 mm shall then be brushed over the paving, and further passes of the
plate vibrator made in each direction until the sand is no longer absorbed into the joints.
(iv) The plate vibrator shall not pass closer than 1 m to a temporarily unrestrained edge during laying.
(v) No paving shall be left uncompacted overnight except for the one metre strip at the temporarily
uncompacted edge, which shall be covered and protected from rain.




- END OF SECTION -



















































DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKING


1. GENERAL


1.1 General Requirements

1 .1 .1 Compliance with Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section



1.2 Related Work

1.2.1 Section 32 14 13.13 "Interlocking Precast Concrete Unit Paving".


1.3 Submission

1.3.1 Submit a complete set of data sheets for paint and equipment, together with
manufacturer's certificates, indicating that materials and equipment to be
used are in accordance with the Specifications.

































2. PRODUCTS

2.1

Materials

2.2.1




2.2.2



Paint: Traffic grade paint - high built coating with vinyl and acrylic base, c/w
glass bead inclusions, formulated to be applied directly on asphalt or
concrete, to BS 4800. Colours to be: white - 00 E 55, yellow - 10 E 51, black -
00 E 53, and blue for handicapped parking.

Pavement Markings: The markings to pavement shall be applied as
indicated, on the Drawings and according to the standards and regulations of
local Authorities having Jurisdiction.

















































3. EXECUTION


3.1 Equipment Requirements

3.1.1 Paint applicator to be an approved pressure-type mobile spray distributor,
capable of applying paint in single, double, and dashed lines. Applicator to be
capable of applying marking components uniformly, at rates specified, and to
dimensions as indicated, and to have positive shut-off.
3.2 Preparation

3.2.1



3.2.2

Ensure pavement surface is free from surface water, dust, oil, grease and
other foreign materials, which would reduce the bond between paint and
pavers.
Immediately before application of paint, a final cleaning shall be performed using
a water jet and after drying, an oil-free compressed air jet to remove any scaling,
loose materials and other debris.
3.3 Application

3.3.1


3.3.2



3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6


3.3.7
3.3.8

Layout pavement markings according to the drawings and/or as required by
CLIENT.
Unless otherwise approved by CLIENT apply paint only when air temperature
is
above 10C and below 40C, when no rain is forecast, and when weather is
not excessively windy or dusty.
Apply pavement marking paint evenly at spreading rate of 5 m
2
/liter.
Do not thin paint unless approved by paint manufacturer or CLIENT.
Paint lines of uniform colour and density with sharp edges.
Symbols to conform to dimensions indicated and to local traffic markings
standards.
Thoroughly clean disturbutor tank before refilling with paint of different colour.
Apply paint using oil-less spraying equipment in accordance with paint
manufacturer's recommendations. Use brush application only at locations which
cannot be reached with the painting equipment.


3.4 Tolerances

3.4.1 Paint markings to be within + 12 mm of dimensions indicated.
3.4.2 Finish thickness of paint markings shall be between 1 mm and 1.5 mm.


3.5 Protection of Completed Work

3.5.1 Protect pavement markings from traffic and from any kind of damage until paint is
completely dry.


END OF SECTION